Quarterlytics / Packaging & Containers / Macfarlane Group PLC / FY2021 Annual Report

Macfarlane Group PLC
Annual Report 2021

MACF · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker MACF
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Packaging & Containers
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Macfarlane Group PLC
Loading PDF…
Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Focused on creating value from 
sustainable packaging solutions

View our Annual Report and  
Accounts and other information  
about Macfarlane Group at  
www.macfarlanegroup.com

Contents

Overview

01  

02  

 Financial and sustainability  
highlights 2021
 Macfarlane Group –  
serving our customers

Strategic review

 Chairman’s statement
 Business model and strategy

04  Our key highlights
06  
08  
10    Chief Executive’s review
 Finance review
16  
19  Viability statement 
20   Principal risks and uncertainties
 Stakeholder engagement  
24  
s172 statement
28  Sustainability report
40	 Non-financial	information	statement

Governance

41  Chairman’s introduction to governance
42   Board of Directors
44   Report of the Directors
46   Remuneration report 
63   Corporate governance
 Statement of Directors’ 
72  
responsibilities

Financial statements

73  

81  
82  

83  

 Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC
 Consolidated income statement
 Consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income
 Consolidated statement of changes  
in equity 
 Consolidated balance sheet
 Consolidated	cash	flow	statement

84  
85  
86  Accounting policies
93  
118  Company balance sheet
119   Company statement of changes 

 Notes	to	the	financial	statements

in equity

120  	Notes	to	the	Company	financial	

statements

Shareholder information

131   Five year record 
132   Principal operating subsidiaries  
and related undertakings

IBC  Financial diary

Financial and sustainability highlights 2021

Macfarlane Group PLC designs, manufactures  
and distributes protective packaging to business 
users. Protective packaging products are sold  
to customers in the UK, Ireland and Europe.

Revenue

Profit before tax

Carbon intensity
(tCO2e per £000 revenue)

£264.5m
(2020* £210.2m)

£18.7m
(2020* £12.4m)

0.0234
(2020 0.0295)

Operating profit 
(% of sales)

7.6%
(2020* 6.5%)

Gross margin
(% of sales)

Diluted earnings per share 

GHG emissions 

7.90p
(2020 6.42p)

Dividend per share

6,676 tCO2e 
(2020 6,786 tCO2e)

33.8%
(2020* 33.2%)

3.20p
(2020 2.55p)

*				In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	

Labels division, sold on 31 December 2021, as a discontinued operation.

01

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Macfarlane Group – serving our customers

Packaging Distribution

Packaging Design 
and Manufacture

Labels 

The Netherlands

Venlo

Inverness

Glasgow

Newcastle

Stockton-on-Tees

Leyland

Wake�eld

Wigan

Heywood
Manchester

Wicklow

Nottingham

Grantham

Wolverhampton

Leicester

Coventry

Gloucester

Milton Keynes

Sudbury

Swindon

Bristol

Westbury

Harlow

Aylesbury

Reading

Horsham

Salisbury

Fareham

Exeter

Plymouth

Redruth

02   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

*    Numbers relate to operating sites only.  
Sales are stated before adjusting for 
inter-company and inter-divisional sales.

 
 
Headquartered in Glasgow, Macfarlane Group PLC  
employs over 900 people at 36 sites in the UK, one each  
in Ireland and The Netherlands and services more than  
20,000 customers across a wide range of sectors.

Europe *
Sales
£5.3m
No. of employees 10
No. of vehicles 2
No. of sites 1
No. of customers 4,397

North *
Sales
£69.5m
No. of employees 151
No. of vehicles 35
No. of sites 9
No. of customers 3,582

Midlands *
Sales
£82.8m
No. of employees 260
No. of vehicles 44
No. of sites 9
No. of customers 3,467

South west *
Sales
£47.1m
No. of employees 236
No. of vehicles 33
No. of sites 8
No. of customers 3,037

South east *
Sales
£64.2m
No. of employees 153
No. of vehicles 29
No. of sites 7
No. of customers 9,212

03

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Our key highlights

The key highlights of 2021 
for Macfarlane Group PLC1 
are set out below:

•  Sales from continuing operations2 

•  Net cash inflow from operating 

grew by 26% versus 2020 to 
£264.5m.

•  Operating profit at £20.1m  
and operating profit before 
amortisation3 at £23.4m, both 
from continuing operations, 
increased by 47% and  
44% respectively. 

•  Profit for the year of £12.6m 
increased £2.4m or 24% 
compared to 2020.

•  Basic and diluted earnings per 
share were 7.98p per share 
(2020: 6.45p per share) and  
7.90p per share (2020: 6.42p  
per share) respectively.

•  Packaging Distribution achieved 
strong growth in sales and an 
improvement in operating profit 
before amortisation of 19% 
versus 2020.

•  Manufacturing Operations 
delivered an encouraging 
recovery versus 2020 in both 
sales and operating profit  
before amortisation.

•  GWP Holdings Limited (‘GWP’) 

and Carters Packaging (Cornwall) 
Limited (‘Carters Packaging’), 
which were acquired in February 
and March 2021 respectively,  
have performed well.

•  The Group sold its Labels4  
division in December 2021.  
Labels generated a loss before 
tax of £0.9m (2020: Profit of 
£0.6m) after charging goodwill 
impairment of £1.0m and costs  
of disposal of £0.3m. Labels has 
been treated as a discontinued 
operation in the year.

activities of £23.8m (2020: £23.3m) 
reflects increased activity and 
continuing good management  
of working capital.

•  Net bank funds5 on 31 December 
2021 was £2.5m, an increase of 
£3.0m from 31 December 2020, 
including £12.2m of investment  
in the acquisition of GWP and 
Carters Packaging and £5.2m6  
of net proceeds from the sale of 
Labels. The Group is operating 
well within its existing bank  
facility of £30.0m which runs  
until 31 December 2025.
•  Pension scheme surplus of  

£8.3m at 31 December 2021  
(31 December 2020 deficit of 
£1.5m). The improvement is due  
to continued contributions from 
Macfarlane Group, an increase  
in the discount rate and growth  
in investments during the year.

•  The Board is proposing a final 

dividend of 2.33p per share (2020: 
1.85p per share) which would take 
the total dividend for 2021 to 
3.20p per share (2020: 2.55p  
per share) up 25 % on 2020.

1 

2 

3 

4 

 Macfarlane Group PLC (‘Macfarlane Group’, ‘the Group’, 
‘Macfarlane’).

 In accordance with IFRS5 2020 has been restated  
to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	 
31 December 2021, as a discontinued operation.

 See page 87 for reconciliation of Alternative Performance 
Measure	operating	profit	before	amortisation	to	 
operating	profit.

 Macfarlane Labels Limited and its subsidiaries,  
Macfarlane Group Ireland (Labels & Packaging) Limited  
and Macfarlane Group Sweden AB (collectively ‘Labels’).

5	 Alternative	Performance	Measure	as	defined	in	note	22.

6	

	Gross	proceeds	of	£6.1m	offset	by	£0.6m	of	cash	retained	
within Labels at completion and £0.3m costs of disposal.

04   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

05

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Chairman’s statement

I am pleased to report that Macfarlane Group PLC  
has performed strongly in the year ended 31 December 
2021. Our results are well ahead of the previous year 
and better than market expectations.

In the face of challenging market 
conditions our team has shown 
great commitment and dedication 
in servicing our customers and the 
Board wishes to place on record  
its thanks for their outstanding 
performance in helping the Group 
to continue its positive progress. 

Trading
Macfarlane Group achieved good 
sales growth from continuing 
operations	in	2021,	benefiting	from	
the ongoing structural shift to 
e-commerce retail, the recovery in 
certain industrial sectors which had 
been	affected	by	Covid-19	in	2020	
and the acquisitions of GWP and 
Carters Packaging. Despite ongoing 
difficult	operating	conditions	due	to	
Covid-19,	significant	inflationary	
pressure on input costs and supply 
shortages of some materials, the 
business has produced a strong  
profit	performance.	

Packaging Distribution has grown 
sales through strong demand  
from existing customers in the 
e-commerce retail and medical 
sectors and recovery in a number of 
industrial sectors. However, demand 
from the aerospace, high street retail 
and hospitality sectors has not yet 
recovered to pre-pandemic levels. 
New business activity has increased 
significantly	compared	with	2020	and	
Carters Packaging has traded well 
since its acquisition in March 2021. 

Manufacturing Operations has 
benefited	from	the	acquisition	of	
GWP, which is performing ahead of 
expectations, and a strong recovery  
in the Packaging Design and 
Manufacture business which 
returned	to	profit	following	the	
restructuring actions that we took  
in H2 2020. The development of  
the partnership with our Packaging 
Distribution business has played  
a key part in the recovery of the 
Manufacturing Operations in 2021.

The Group sold its Labels business  
on	31	December	2021	to	The	Reflex	
Group Limited, a well-established, 
privately owned UK company focused 
on the manufacture of labels and 
flexible	packaging.	We	believe	the	sale	
gives the best opportunity for the 
Labels business to develop and allows 
the Group to focus its resources on 
accelerating the growth of our 
protective packaging distribution  
and manufacturing businesses. 

Stuart Paterson

06   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Group performance

Revenue (£m)

Profit before tax (£m)

Basic earnings per share (p)

2020*
210.2

2021
264.5

2020*
12.4

2021
18.7

2020
6.45

2021
7.98

Our	effective	management	of	
operating cash in 2021 has enabled 
the	business	to	finance	two	good	
quality acquisitions through our 
existing bank facility. The sale of 
Labels provides the Group with 
additional cash resources to invest  
in the further development of the 
protective packaging businesses. 

The pension scheme was in surplus 
at 31 December 2021 of £8.3m 
(2020:	deficit	£1.5m).

Covid-19 response
Throughout 2021 the Covid-19 
pandemic has continued to impact the 
Group	and	has	presented	significant	
challenges to the operations of the 
businesses. However, in supporting 
our customers we have continually 
adapted to the changing government 
guidance to ensure we provide a safe 
workplace for our teams with particular 
focus on their health and well-being. 

Environment, Social and 
Governance (‘ESG’)
The Board has always recognised  
the importance of ensuring ESG is 
prioritised within the business and 
ESG is now a standing item on the 
Board agenda. A comprehensive ESG 
action plan has been approved by the 
Board which will clearly demonstrate 
our commitment to sustainability, 
effective	customer,	employee,	
supplier and community engagement 
and governance.

In September 2021 Andrea Dunstan, 
the Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee, retired from the Board 
and after an extensive search 
process we welcomed Aleen 
Gulvanessian as a new Non-executive 
Director to the Board in October 
2021. Aleen, who is the new Chair of 
the Remuneration Committee, has a 
strong governance background and 
brings extensive commercial and 
legal experience to the business. 

In 2022 I will enter my 10th year of 
service on the Macfarlane Group 
Board and as such cease to be seen 
as independent under the Corporate 
Governance code. I have therefore 
given the Board notice of my intention 
to stand down this year once a new 
Chair	has	been	identified	and	a	
smooth transition ensured. Plans for 
my succession are well advanced. 

Proposed dividend
The	Board	is	proposing	a	final	
dividend of 2.33 pence per share, 
amounting to a full year dividend of 
3.20 pence per share, compared to 
the prior year dividend of 2.55 pence 
per share. Subject to the approval of 
shareholders at the Annual General 
Meeting on Tuesday 10 May 2022,  
the	final	dividend	will	be	paid	on	
Wednesday 1 June 2022 to those 
shareholders on the register at  
Friday 13 May 2022.

Outlook
We anticipate that 2022 will see 
ongoing	inflationary	pressure	on	
input prices, continuing supply 
constraints on most raw materials 
and operating costs increasing due 
to	staffing	pressures.	However,	
despite these challenges, trading  
in the early months has been 
encouraging and the Board is 
confident	that,	given	the	
effectiveness	of	our	strategy,	the	
resilience of our business model and 
the experience and commitment  
of our people, Macfarlane Group  
will continue to deliver further 
growth in 2022. 

Lord Macfarlane of Bearsden
It was with great sadness that  
we learned of the passing of  
our founder Lord Macfarlane of 
Bearsden in November last year. 
Lord Macfarlane was the driving 
force in building the Macfarlane 
Group between 1949 and 1999 
when, as Chairman, he retired from 
the Board. Since then, he was a 
constant supportive presence  
and he is greatly missed.

Stuart R. Paterson 
Chairman

24 February 2022

*	In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

07

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Business model and strategy

Our business model
What we do
Macfarlane Group designs, 
manufactures and distributes 
protective packaging products to 
business users across a range of 
sectors including e-commerce 
retail, logistics, medical, automotive, 
aerospace, electronics, high street 
retail, household essentials, food and 
hospitality. For reporting purposes, 
we split the Group into two segments. 
Macfarlane Packaging Distribution 
and Manufacturing Operations.

Our customer profile
Protective packaging products  
are sold to customers in the UK, 
Ireland and Europe.

Our operations
The protective packaging business 
operates a Stock and Serve model 
from 27 Regional Distribution 
Centres (RDCs) and 3 satellite sites 
providing a UK national network  
to support customers on a local, 
regional and national basis. The 
Group also operates a National 
Distribution Centre (NDC) and four 
manufacturing centres. There is a 
central administration centre in 
Coventry, and the Group head  
office	is	located	in	Glasgow.

Macfarlane Group has over 900 
employees, mainly in the UK. Our 
sites range in size from over 100 
employees at manufacturing 
locations to under 20 for smaller 
RDCs and satellite sites. The Group 

operates a decentralised structure 
for sales and operations supported 
by central teams covering areas such 
as procurement, logistics, HR, IT  
and	finance.

How our business generates value
Macfarlane Group is the UK market 
leader in the distribution of protective 
packaging products. We leverage its 
purchasing	scale	to	cost-effectively	
source from over 1,000 suppliers a 
comprehensive range of protective 
packaging products. 

Added value for the customer  
is achieved as follows:

•  by providing independent advice  

on	the	most	cost-effective	choice	
of product and packing processes.

•  the sustainability of our product 

offering.

•  by operating as a single-source 
supplier for these products on a 
Just In Time basis, with tailored 
stock management programmes 
and electronic trading capability. 

Key	benefits	to	customers	are	 
lower costs in the areas of packing, 
logistics and warehousing, reduced 
customer returns and product 
damage and enhanced brand 
presentation.

The manufacturing businesses  
utilise design, intellectual property 
and know-how to provide a bespoke 
service to support major retail and 
industrial customers to cost 
effectively	protect	their	high-value	
products in storage and distribution.

The role for organic growth
Macfarlane Group’s strategy is to grow 
its business organically by increasing 
the range of products supplied to 
existing customers and by winning 
new customers. New business 
generation is key to Macfarlane 
Group’s organic growth and we have 
specialist teams, providing focus on 
specific	target	market	sectors	to	 
win new customers. We then target 
acquisition growth through the 
purchase of high-quality businesses 
in the protective packaging market. 

Our strategy
We have followed a consistent 
strategy to create value for 
shareholders, operating in markets 
offering	above-average	growth	
opportunities to develop business 
with existing customers and build 
relationships with new customers.

We also improve the performance  
of	the	business	by	more	effective	
sourcing	and	increasing	the	efficiency	
of our logistics and property portfolio. 
We then supplement this organic 
growth in the existing business by 
acquiring quality businesses.

Our objective is to achieve an 
operating	profit	return	on	sales	of	
between 7% and 10% (2021: 7.6%).

Key	financial	KPIs	used	in	the	Group	are	
sales growth, gross margin, operating 
profit	margin	and	profit	before	tax	
and these link in to our strategic 
priorities as set out on the right.

> 1,000 

global suppliers of 
protective packaging

27 

Regional Distribution 
Centres (RDCs)

> 20,000 

customers throughout 
the UK

08   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Strategic priority

Progress in 2021

Sales
Implement a segmental sales strategy to  
improve customer retention, increase product 
penetration and accelerate new business.  
The Group targets new business generation  
in excess of £12m per annum and aspires to  
a Net Promoter Score (‘NPS’) of 60.

Sectors
Focus on key sectors with growth potential, 
particularly E-Commerce Retail National 
Accounts and Third Party Logistics.

Gross margin
Maintain gross margins through effective sourcing, 
operational efficiencies, and management of 
fluctuations in input prices. The Group targets 
gross margins of 30%+ for Packaging Distribution 
and 40%+ for Manufacturing Operations.

Logistics
Ensure operational effectiveness is maximised 
through efficiencies in logistics. The target for 
Packaging Distribution is to remain below 2.5%.

Infrastructure
Optimising the costs associated with the  
physical infrastructure. 
The Group aims to reduce the Packaging 
Distribution costs below 4.0% of sales.

Environment
Reduce the Group’s impact on the Environment 
through reduction of its internal carbon footprint 
and supporting customers through its ‘Significant 
Six’ sales approach. 
The Group has set a target of reducing its Scope 1 
and 2 carbon footprint by 30% by 2030. 

Acquisitions
Supplement organic growth with at least two  
good quality acquisitions each year.

Our segmental sales approach provides increased 
customer focus. New business generated in Packaging 
Distribution was £12.3m in 2021 (2020: £11.3m). NPS was 
48	(2020:	53).	The	small	decrease	from	last	year	reflects	
the challenging supply chain conditions during 2021 but still 
represents a good score relative to other B2B companies.

Our	Innovation	Lab	continues	to	be	an	effective	tool	 
to demonstrate the range of our capability to customers. 
Retail sales in Packaging Distribution represent 30% of 
sales (2020: 28%).

The	Group	has	experienced	significant	inflation	in	raw	
material	input	prices	which	has	been	managed	effectively	
working closely with customers to pass through the  
changes and where possible minimise the impact.

Gross margins in Packaging Distribution were 32.4%  
(2020: 32.5%) and Manufacturing Operations were  
41.6% (2020:37.3%).

Logistics costs in Packaging Distribution increased  
to 2.5% of sales (2020: 2.4%) primarily due to the impact  
of Covid-19 and supply chain challenges during 2021.

Property costs in Packaging Distribution are 4.1%  
of sales (2020: 4.5%). Our aim is to reduce the costs  
below 4.0% of sales.

The largest contributor to the Group’s CO2 emissions  
is	its	commercial	vehicle	fleet	(71%).	The	Group	has	
commenced	the	electrification	of	its	fleet	with	the	ordering	
of 5 electric vehicles in 2021 due for delivery in 2022.

The Group acquired GWP Group and Carters Packaging  
in the year both high quality businesses manufacturing  
and distributing protective packaging. Both businesses 
have performed well since being acquired.

09

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Chief Executive’s review – Packaging Distribution

Packaging Distribution performance

Revenue (£m)

Operating profit (£m)

Return on sales (%)

2020
201.7

2021
239.5

2020
14.0

2021
17.1

2020
6.9%

2021
7.1%

Macfarlane is the UK’s leading 
specialist distributor of protective 
packaging materials. Macfarlane 
operates a stock and serve supply 
model from 27 Regional Distribution 
Centres (‘RDCs’) and 3 satellite 
sites, supplying industrial and retail 
customers with a comprehensive 
range of protective packaging 
materials on a local, regional  
and national basis.

Competition in the packaging 
distribution market is from local  
and regional protective packaging 
specialist companies as well as 
national/international distribution 
generalists who supply a range of 
products including protective 
packaging materials. Macfarlane 
competes	effectively	on	a	local	
basis through its strong focus on 
customer service, its breadth and 
depth	of	product	offer	and	through	
the recruitment and retention of 
high-quality	staff	with	good	local	
market knowledge. On a national 

basis Macfarlane has market  
focus, expertise and a breadth of 
product and service knowledge,  
all of which enables it to compete 
effectively	against	non-specialist	
packaging distributors.

Packaging	Distribution	benefits	its	
customers by enabling them to ensure 
their	products	are	cost-effectively	
protected in transit and storage 
through the supply of a comprehensive 
product range, single source stock 
and serve supply, just–in-time 
delivery, tailored stock management 
programmes, electronic trading and 
independent advice on both packaging 
materials and packing processes. 
Through	the	‘Significant	Six’	sales	
approach we reduce our customers’ 
Total Cost of Packaging and their 
carbon footprint. This is achieved 
through supplying sustainable 
packaging solutions, optimising 
warehousing and transportation, 
reducing damages and returns and 
improving	packaging	efficiency.

Packaging Distribution

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross margin
Operating expenses

Operating profit before amortisation
Amortisation

Operating profit

2021
£000

2020
£000

2021 
growth

239,508
161,896

201,739
136,177

77,612
57,915

19,697
2,642

17,055

65,562
49,054

16,508
2,520

13,988

19%

18%
18%

19%

22%

10   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

2021 trading
Packaging Distribution grew sales  
by 19% in 2021 due to continued 
strong demand from customers  
in the e-commerce and medical 
sectors and some recovery in the 
home & garden, automotive and 
electronics sectors which were 
adversely impacted by Covid-19 in 
2020. Sales to e-commerce retail 
companies in 2021 represented  
30% of sales (2020: 28%). 

We grew new business by 9% in  
2021 due primarily to the impact  
of Covid-19 restrictions on 2020 
performance. However, this 
performance compares favourably to 
the performance in 2019 pre Covid-19. 
Our customers increasingly see the 
benefits	of	transacting	with	us	online	
and this has resulted in a growth in 
activity through our website:  
shop.macfarlanepackaging.com  
and through our Simplicit-e  
electronic trading platform. In 2021, 
44% of our customers managed  
their transactions with us online.

The business has experienced 
significant	increases	in	input	prices	 
in all product categories throughout 
2021. Against this backdrop, the gross 
margin in Packaging Distribution has 
held up well at 32.4% (2020: 32.5%), 
through	our	effectiveness	in	working	
with our customers to manage these 
input price changes.

We	continued	to	deliver	the	benefits	
from acquiring high quality packaging 
distribution businesses and in March 
2021 we completed the acquisition  
of Carters Packaging based in 
Redruth, Cornwall. 

During 2021 we made steady progress 
in extending our service into Europe to 
support a number of our pan-European 
customers. Through the Group’s 
subsidiary company, based in the 
Netherlands, sales exited 2021 on  
an annual run-rate of c£5m with  
sales in 2021 of £2.3m (2020: £1.1m).

There were several factors behind  
the increase in operating expenses, 
the	most	significant	being	the	impact	 
of the acquisition, dilapidation costs 
related to the North West of England 
property consolidation planned for 
2022 (see Future below), increased 
volumes of business, an increase in 
labour	costs	driven	by	wage	inflation	
and higher level of incentive payments 
to reward employees for the strong 
performance of the business in 2021. 

Packaging Distribution’s operating 
profit	at	£17.1m	grew	22%	vs	2020	
reflecting	a	7.1%	(2020:	6.9%)	return	
on sales.

Future
Our plans for 2022 are focused  
on continuing to grow sales and 
improving	profitability	through	 
the following actions:

•  Prioritise engagement with 

potential new customers in stable 
and growing sectors such as 
e-commerce retail, medical, 
scientific,	and	third-party	logistics;
•  Effectively	manage	the	significant	
input price increases and supply 
shortages being experienced 
across all product categories;

•  Launch our new ‘Packaging 

Optimiser’ to allow our sales teams 
to better demonstrate our ability to 
add value for customers through 
our	‘Significant	Six’	sales	approach;

•  Improve our engagement with 

existing and new customers with 
the introduction of Microsoft 
Dynamics as our new Customer 
Relationship Management platform;

•  Refine	and	extend	our	product	
range to ensure we continue to 
offer	our	customers	sustainable	
packaging solutions that reduce 
their carbon footprint;

•  Introduce improvements to our 
web-based solutions to allow 
customers access to our full 
range of products and services 
more easily;

•  Accelerate the progress we have 
made in our ‘Follow the Customer’ 
programme in Europe;

•  Reduce operating costs through 
efficiency	programmes	in	sales,	
logistics and administration;
•  Implement	our	first	major	site	

consolidation with the relocation 
of our Wigan and Manchester 
RDCs to a new site at Middleton, 
north of Manchester;

•  Maintain the focus on working 

capital management to facilitate 
future investment and manage 
effectively	the	ongoing	bad	debt	
risk within the current economic 
environment; and

•  Supplement organic growth 
through progressing further 
high-quality acquisitions.

11

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Chief Executive’s review – Manufacturing Operations

Manufacturing Operations performance

Revenue (£m)

Operating profit (£m)

Return on sales (%)

2020*
8.5

2021
25.0

2020*
(0.3)

2021
3.0

2020*
(3.9)

2021
12.0

increases, and control of overheads, 
operating	profit	before	amortisation	
in	2021	is	significantly	ahead	of	the	
same period in 2020.

Future
Priorities for Manufacturing 
Operations in 2022 are to:

•  Focus the sales team on new 

business growth in target sectors 
e.g., medical and defence;

•  Prioritise new sales activity on  

our higher added-value bespoke 
composite pack product range;
•  Effectively	manage	the	significant	
material price increases being 
experienced across all product 
categories to minimise the impact 
on gross margins;

•  Continue to strengthen the 

relationship with our Packaging 
Distribution businesses to create 
both sales and cost synergies;
•  Commence the process of GWP 
working more closely with the 
Macfarlane Packaging Design  
and Manufacture and Packaging 
Distribution businesses.

Manufacturing Operations 
comprises our Packaging Design 
and Manufacture business and 
GWP, acquired in February 2021. 
The Labels division included in 
Manufacturing Operations in 2020 
was sold in December 2021 and has 
been classified as a discontinued 
operation (see page 13).

Manufacturing Operations designs, 
manufactures, assembles and 
distributes bespoke packaging 
solutions for customers requiring 
cost-effective	methods	of	
protecting high value products in 
storage and transit. The primary  
raw materials are corrugate, timber 
and foam. The businesses operate 
from four manufacturing sites, in 
Grantham, Westbury, Swindon and 
Salisbury, supplying both directly to 
customers and through the national 
RDC network of the Packaging 
Distribution business.

Key market sectors are defence, 
aerospace, medical equipment, 
electronics, automotive, 
e-commerce retail and household 
equipment. The markets we serve 
are highly fragmented, with a range  
of locally based competitors. We 
differentiate	our	market	offering	
through technical expertise, design 
capability, industry accreditations 
and national coverage through the 
Packaging Distribution business.

2021 trading
Manufacturing Operations sales 
increased by 194% in 2021, consisting 
of organic growth of 16% (£1.4m) 
following a strong recovery in the 
automotive and defence sectors 
supplemented by £15.1m of sales 
through the acquisition of GWP. 
Combining	the	benefit	of	the	
acquisition	of	GWP	with	effective	
management of the gross margin  
in	the	face	of	significant	input	price	

Manufacturing Operations

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross margin
Operating expenses

Operating profit/(loss) before  
 amortisation
Amortisation

Operating profit/(loss)

2021 
growth

194%

178%
78%

2021
£000

24,957
13,102

11,855
8,186

3,669
669

3,000

Restated
2020*
£000

8,488
4,223

4,265
4,594

(329)
–

(329)

*		In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	 

Labels division, sold on 31 December 2021, as a discontinued operation.

12   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Discontinued operations
On 31 December 2021, the Group 
sold	its	Labels	businesses	to	Reflex	
for £6.3m. Labels realised a loss 
before tax of £0.9m in 2021 (2020: 
profit	before	tax	£0.6m),	after	
charging costs of disposal of £0.3m 
and goodwill impairment of £1.0m. 
Labels grew sales in 2021 by 7% but 
operating	profit	reduced	by	£0.3m	
due primarily to higher costs of 
serving customers outside the UK 
and lower gross margins impacted  
by higher input costs.

Labels has been a long-standing  
part of the Macfarlane Group but 
being	part	of	Reflex,	which	is	a	 
£135m revenue business focused  
on the manufacturing of labels and 
flexible	packaging,	offers	the	best	
opportunity for Labels’ future 
development. The proceeds of the 
sale will be strategically invested in 
the continuing growth of the Group’s 
protective packaging businesses.

13

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Chief Executive’s review – Group

The Group has performed well in the face of 
extremely challenging market conditions with 
the ongoing impact of the Covid-19 pandemic, 
significant	increases	in	input	prices	and	supply	
shortages of some raw materials.

Despite these challenges the 
Group financial performance from 
continuing operations in 2021 has 
been resilient, with sales growth 
of 26% and an operating profit 
47% ahead of 2020.

2022 outlook
The Group has demonstrated in 
2021 that it can deliver a strong 
financial	performance	despite	
challenging market conditions and 
the impact of Covid-19. With the 
sale of Labels, the Group is focused 
on the strategic growth of its 
protective packaging businesses  
in the UK and Northern Europe.

The Group’s businesses all have 
strong market positions with low 
customer concentration and 
differentiated	product	and	service	
offerings	which	give	both	value	and	
sustainability to our customers. We 
have	a	flexible	business	model	and	

proven	effective	implementation	of	
our	strategic	plan,	which	is	reflected	in	
consistent	profit	and	cash	generation	
over a sustained period. 

Our future performance continues  
to	depend	on	our	effectiveness	in	
growing	sales,	increasing	efficiencies	
and bringing high quality acquisitions 
into the Group. Whilst we have 
experienced	significant	challenges	in	
2021, and there remain uncertainties 
ahead, our strategy and business 
model have proved to be resilient.  
We expect to deliver further growth 
in	sales	and	profit	in	2022.

Peter D. Atkinson
Chief Executive

24 February 2022

Operating
 profit before
 amortisation
2021
£000

Operating
 profit
2021
£000

Restated*
Revenue
2020
£000

Restated*
Operating
profit/(loss)
before
amortisation
2020
£000

Restated*
Operating
profit/(loss)
2020
£000

19,697
3,669

23,366

8.8%
372

17,055
3,000

20,055

7.6%
372

201,739
8,488

210,227

19,802

16,508
(329)

16,179

7.7%
710

13,988
(329)

13,659

6.5%
710

23,738

20,427

230,029

16,889

14,369

Revenue
2021
£000

239,508
24,957

264,465

21,220

285,685

Group performance

Segment
Packaging Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

Continuing operations

% of revenue
Discontinued operations

Group total

*				In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

14   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
Macfarlane Packaging Optimiser

Storage costs
• Free up space for growth 
• Reduce storage costs 
• Reduce pallet handling 
• Reduce the impact on goods-in

Transport costs
• Improve delivery fleet utilisation 
• Reduce transport costs 
• Reduce carbon emissions

Damages and returns
• Reduce product waste 
• Reduce administration and handling 
• Reduce transportation 
• Reduce packaging waste 
• Improve the customer experience

Admin costs
• Free up time 
• Work more effectively 
• Reduce costs

Increased productivity
• Make informed decisions on pack cost 
• Reduce labour costs or reallocate time 
• Fulfil forecasted business growth
• Reduce material waste

Customer experience
Optimised packaging all contributes 
to the ideal customer experience. 
From quick dispatch through to 
unboxing and easy recycling.

15

Helping our customers drive 
down the cost of packaging and 
reduce their CO2 emissions.

At Macfarlane Packaging, we have spent decades innovating and perfecting 
packaging solutions for a wide range of markets that are strong, efficient 
and sustainable. With that experience we have created the Packaging 
Optimiser – a new interactive tool that shows businesses the true financial 
and environmental cost of their packaging. The Packaging Optimiser 
illustrates six important costs that impact on most packaging operations 
 – we call these ‘The Significant Six’, as well as the material cost itself. 
These areas can account for 90% of all costs in a packaging operation.

The Packaging Optimiser analyses the client’s own Significant Six profile 
and with that information we can:
- review material options to find the right packaging 
- meet their corporate sustainability goals 
- unlock savings in their packaging operations

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Finance review

2021 represents the Group’s twelfth 
consecutive year of growth in its  
profit	before	tax.

Trading review
The Group saw growth in sales from 
continuing operations of 26% during 
2021, driven by strong organic 
growth in Packaging Distribution 
(16%) and Manufacturing Operations 
(16%) combined with a strong 
contribution from the acquisitions 
made in the year. Group sales from 
continuing operations are £264.5m, 
an increase of £54.2m from 2020. 
Profit	before	tax	from	continuing	
operations for 2021 increased to 
£18.7m, an increase of £6.2m from 
that achieved in 2020.

The Group sold its Labels division on 
31 December 2021 and it is disclosed 
as a discontinued operation. The 
loss before tax of £0.9m consists of 
£0.3m	profit	from	trading,	a	goodwill	
impairment charge of £1.0m and a 
loss on disposal of £0.2m (including 
costs of disposal of £0.3m). 

Each month our management 
reporting provides the information to 
review the productivity of all locations 
in the Packaging Distribution 
business using performance against 
benchmark metrics as a percentage 
of sales for gross margin, payroll and 
related employment costs, property 
costs,	other	overheads	and	net	profit.	
The	resultant	net	profit	by	location	is	
also compared to the original budget 
and prior year performance.

Our Manufacturing Operations also 
measure relevant operating costs to 
sales	ratios	and	net	profit	generated.

Taxation
The tax charge for 2021 was £5.1m 
on	profit	before	tax	of	£17.7m,	a	rate	
of 28.9%, above the prevailing rate  
of	19.0%	mainly	due	to	the	effect	on	
deferred tax of an adjustment in the 
long-term corporation tax rate from 
19% to 25% and goodwill impairment, 
acquisition costs and disposal costs 
not being deductible for tax purposes. 
This compared with a tax charge of 
£2.8m	on	the	2020	profit	before	tax	
of £13.0m, a rate of 21.8%.

Macfarlane Group and its subsidiary 
companies have no uncertain tax 
treatments with HMRC in the UK.

Earnings per share
Basic and diluted earnings per share 
amounted to 7.98p (2020: 6.45p) and 
7.90p (2020: 6.42p) respectively, 
broadly	reflective	of	the	movement	 
in	profitability.	The	calculations	take	
account of the dilution caused by  
the issue of LTIP awards.

Dividends
A dividend of 0.87p per share was 
paid on 14 October 2021. A further 
dividend of 2.33p per share is subject 
to approval by shareholders at the 
AGM in May 2022 and is not included as 
a	liability	in	these	financial	statements.

Dividend cover has been maintained 
at 2.5 times. The Group continues to 
balance the aim to pay an attractive 
level of dividend against the need  
to retain funds in the business to 
finance	growth,	make	the	agreed	
levels of pension fund contributions, 
fund acquisitions and meet capital 
expenditure requirements.

Cash flow and net bank debt
The Group’s debt facility with Lloyds 
Banking Group PLC comprises a 
committed borrowing facility of  
up to £30.0m secured over part of 
Macfarlane Group’s trade receivables 
and at the start of 2021, the term  
of the facility was extended to  
31 December 2025. The facility  
bears interest at normal commercial 
rates	and	carries	standard	financial	
covenants in relation to interest 
cover and levels of headroom over 
trade receivables. The Group has 
been in compliance with these 
covenants throughout 2021 and 
2022 to date.

The facility accommodates increased 
working capital requirements from 
our	organic	growth	as	well	as	finance	
for pension scheme contributions 
and an ability to fund acquisitions. 
Our	financing	requirements	are	 
met through cash generation from 
profitable	trading	as	well	as	by	
maintaining committed borrowing 
facilities for the medium-term.

16   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

2021 
17.7

2020 
13.0

2019 
11.9

2018 
10.7

2017 
9.1

2016 
7.6

2015
6.8

2014 
5.6

2013 
5.1

2009 
3.2

2010 
3.4

2012 
4.5

2011 
3.9

Profit before tax (£m) from total operations

On 31 March 2021, MGUK acquired 
100% of Carters Packaging (Cornwall) 
Limited (‘Carters Packaging’), for a 
maximum consideration of £4.5m. 
£3.0m was paid in cash on acquisition 
and the deferred consideration of 
£1.5m is payable in the second 
quarters of 2022 and 2023, subject 
to certain trading targets being met 
in the two twelve-month periods 
ending on 31 March 2022 and  
2023 respectively.

We expect to pay the full deferred 
consideration on the GWP and 
Carters Packaging acquisitions 
based on their strong trading 
performance. Across both 
acquisitions the Group inherited  
net cash of £0.8m.

On 31 December 2021, the Group 
sold its Labels division comprising 
Macfarlane Labels Limited and its 
subsidiaries, Macfarlane Group 
Ireland (Labels & Packaging) Limited 
and Macfarlane Group Sweden AB 
(collectively ‘Labels’) for an 
estimated gross consideration of 
£6.3m, with £0.2m deferred subject 
to	agreement	of	final	completion	
accounts. Labels retained £0.6m  
of cash on completion and the cost 
of disposal was £0.3m.

Group net bank funds were £2.5m at 
31 December 2021, an increase of 
£3.0m from 2020 as set out in note 
22. The Group’s cash generation 
continued to be strong enabling  
us	to	finance	growth,	make	agreed	
levels of pension contributions,  
fund acquisitions and meet capital 
expenditure requirements. The 
Group spent £12.2m on acquisitions in 
2021 (2020: £2.7m), £2.1m on capital 
expenditure in 2021 (2020: £0.8m) 
and received £5.2m net proceeds 
from the disposal of Labels.

We will continue to invest where 
there are needs or opportunities to 
meet future growth plans. The Group 
will strive to ensure that in 2022, 
profit	generation	is,	at	the	very	
minimum, matched by cash 
generation. The Group will remain 
prudent in its assessment of the likely 
returns from capital expenditure and 
potential acquisitions

Acquisitions/disposals
On 26 February 2021, the Group’s 
subsidiary Macfarlane Group UK 
Limited (‘MGUK’) acquired 100% of 
GWP Holdings Limited (‘GWP’), for a 
maximum consideration of £15.1m. 
£10.0m was paid in cash on acquisition 
and the deferred consideration of 
£5.1m	is	payable	in	the	first	quarters	
of 2022 and 2023, subject to certain 
trading targets being met in the two 
twelve-month periods ending on 28 
February 2022 and 2023 respectively. 

Market capitalisation and  
share price movements
The number of shares in issue at  
31 December 2021 was 157,812,000 
unchanged from 31 December 2020. 
At the year-end the Company’s 
market capitalisation was £205.2m, 
compared with £138.1m last year. 
The share price at 31 December 
2021 was 130.00p, compared with 
87.50p at 31 December 2020. The 
range of transaction prices for 
Macfarlane Group shares during 
2021 was 82.60p to 145.00p for 
each ordinary share of 25p.

Financial instruments
The	Group’s	principal	financial	
instruments comprise bank 
borrowings, cash balances and 
other items, such as trade 
receivables and trade payables that 
arise directly from its operations  
as well as shareholders’ equity and 
deferred consideration arising from 
acquisitions. The main purpose of 
these	financial	instruments	is	to	
provide	finance	for	the	Group’s	
operations. It is the Group’s policy 
that no speculative trading in 
financial	instruments	is	undertaken.	
The main risks arising are liquidity 
risk and credit risk and the 
secondary risks are interest rate  
risk and currency risk. The policies 
for managing these risks, which 
have remained unchanged since  
the beginning of 2021 are set out in 
note	15	to	the	financial	statements.

17

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Finance review
(continued)

Strong trading performance  
from acquisitions GWP and  
Carters Packaging.

The Group operates a number of 
defined	contribution	arrangements	
for the majority of the employee 
base. Over 750 of our employees  
are members of one of our pension 
scheme arrangements.

International Financial Reporting 
Standards and accounting policies
The Group continues to comply  
with all International Financial 
Reporting Standards adopted  
by the United Kingdom.

Going concern
The Directors, in their consideration 
of going concern, have reviewed the 
Group’s	cash	flow	forecasts	and	
profit	projections,	which	are	based	 
on the Directors’ past experience  
and their assessment of the current 
market outlook for the business. The 
Group’s business activities together 
with	the	factors	likely	to	affect	its	
future development, performance 
and	financial	position	are	set	out	in	
the Chairman’s Statement and the 
Strategic Report on pages 4 to 40. 
The Directors have carried a detailed 
scenario analysis over three years to 
31 December 2024 as set out in the 
Viability Statement on page 19.

Pension schemes
The Group’s pension scheme surplus 
at 31 December 2021 was £8.3m 
(2020:	deficit	£1.5m).	This	is	sensitive	
to movements in bond yields, 
inflation,	longevity	assumptions	and	
investment returns. The impact of 
these sensitivities is set out in note 
24	to	the	financial	statements.	The	
Board continues to make regular 
deficit	reduction	contributions	each	
year based on the triennial actuarial 
valuation. This, combined with careful 
stewardship of the investment 
portfolio by the Trustees, in 
conjunction with the Group, has 
helped match the investments  
with	the	scheme’s	liability	profile.

Following the triennial actuarial 
valuation of the scheme at 1 May 
2020, the Group agreed a new 
schedule of contributions with the 
Pension Scheme Trustees, which 
assumed a recovery plan period of  
4 years. Annual contributions have 
been £1.3m since 1 May 2021.

The next triennial actuarial valuation 
will be carried out at 1 May 2023.

Following the sale of Macfarlane 
Labels Limited, the company ceased 
to be a sponsoring employer. The 
Group is in discussions with the 
trustees regarding a Flexible 
Apportionment Arrangement  
to satisfy any obligation arising  
as a consequence of the sale.

18   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

After making enquiries, the Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that 
the Company and the Group have 
adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for at least the 
next twelve months. For this reason 
they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the 
financial	statements.

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

24 February 2022

 
Viability statement

The Board is required to formally 
assess that the Group has adequate 
resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future 
and as such can continue to adopt 
the going concern basis of 
accounting. The Board is also 
required to state that it has a 
reasonable expectation that the 
Group will continue in operation 
and meet its longer-term liabilities 
as they fall due.

To support this statement, the Board 
is required to consider the Group’s 
current	financial	position,	its	strategy,	
the market outlook and its principal 
risks. The Board’s assessment of the 
principal risks facing the Group and 
how	these	risks	affect	the	Group’s	
prospects are set out on pages 20  
to 23. The review also includes 
consideration of how these risks 
could prevent the Group from 
achieving its strategic plan and the 
potential impact these risks could 
have on the Group’s business model, 
future performance, solvency and 
liquidity over the next three years.

The Board considers the Group’s 
viability as part of its ongoing 
programme to manage risk. Each 
year the Board reviews the Group’s 
strategic plan for the forthcoming 
three-year period and challenges  
the Executive team on the plan’s 
risks.	The	plan	reflects	the	Group’s	
businesses, which have a broad 
spread of customers across a range 
of	different	sectors	with	some	
longer-term contracts in place. The 
assessment period of three years is 
consistent with the Board’s review  
of the Group strategy, including 
assumptions around future growth 
rates for our business and acceptable 
levels of performance.

Financial modelling and scenarios
The Group’s existing bank facilities 
comprise a £30m committed facility 
with Lloyds Banking Group, which is 
available until December 2025. The 
Group has performed well during 
2021, despite the ongoing Covid-19 
pandemic and challenging market 
conditions,	which	gives	confidence	 
in the strength of the underlying 
business model. The Directors have 
also considered the longer-term 
economic outlook for the UK. Given 
the current uncertainty of the 
economic outlook we have modelled  
a ‘severe but plausible downside’ 
scenario as described below. In 
forming conclusions, the Directors 
have also considered potential 
mitigating actions that the Group 
could take to preserve liquidity  
and ensure compliance with its 
financial	covenants.

A	detailed	financial	model	covering	a	
three-year period is maintained and 
regularly updated. This model enables 
sensitivity analysis, which includes 
flexing	the	main	assumptions,	including	
future revenue growth, gross margins, 
operating	costs,	finance	costs	and	
working capital management. The 
results	of	flexing	these	assumptions,	
both individually and in aggregate, are 
used to determine whether additional 
bank facilities will be required during 
the three-year period and whether 
the Group will remain in compliance 
with the covenants relating to the 
current facility.

We have modelled a range of 
scenarios, including a central case,  
a downside scenario, a severe but 
plausible downside and a reverse 
stress test, over the three-year 
horizon. The ‘severe but plausible 
downside’ scenario is conservative in 
assuming, compared to the central 
case, revenue reductions of 5% and 
gross margin reductions at the rate 
of 2% in each of the three years, with 

no reduction in costs. Even under  
this	scenario,	and	before	reflecting	
any mitigating actions available to 
Group management, the Group 
would forecast compliance with all 
financial	covenants	throughout	the	
period and would not require any 
additional	sources	of	financing.

The Group has also modelled a 
reverse stress test scenario. This 
models the decline in sales that  
the Group would be able to absorb 
before	breaching	any	financial	
covenants. Such a scenario, and the 
sequence of events that could lead 
to it, is considered to be remote, as 
it requires sales reductions of c.15% 
per annum between 2022 and 2024, 
compared to the central case, 
before	there	is	a	breach	in	financial	
covenants in the period under 
review and is calculated before 
reflecting	any	mitigating	actions.

Even in the severe but plausible 
scenario, Macfarlane Group is 
forecast	to	have	sufficient	liquidity	
to continue trading, comfortably 
meeting	its	financial	covenants	and	
operating within the level of its 
facilities for the foreseeable future. 
The reverse stress test modelling 
has shown that a c.30% reduction  
in sales in 2022 compared to 2021 
could lead to a breach of covenants 
in the period under review. However, 
in this scenario, management would 
also be able to take mitigating 
actions to reduces its costs and 
conserve cash.

Conclusions
For this reason, the Board considers 
it appropriate for the Group to 
adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing	its	financial	statements.	

The Board also has a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will 
continue in operation and meet  
its longer-term liabilities as they  
fall due.

19

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Principal risks and uncertainties

The principal risks and uncertainties 
faced by the Group and the factors 
mitigating these risks are detailed 
on pages 20 to 23. These risks are 
complemented by an overall 
governance framework including 
clear and delegated authorities, 
business performance monitoring 
and appropriate insurance cover 
for a wide range of potential risks. 
There is a dependence on good 
quality local management, which 
is supported by an investment in 
training and development and 
ongoing performance evaluation.

We continue to evolve our risk 
management processes to ensure 
they	are	robust,	effective	and	
integrated within our decision-making 
processes. We have included a brief 
description of how we assess that 
each risk level has changed. For risks 
 the risk level is broadly 
shown as 
similar between 2021 and 2020. If the 
 the risk level has 
risk is shown as 
increased or decreased respectively 
during 2021 and is being addressed 
accordingly through mitigating 
actions by management.

The business has added 
Environmental Change as a new risk  
in	2021.	This	reflects	the	changing	
nature of the markets the Group 
operates in, with increased 
expectations from our stakeholders 
regarding how the Group mitigates 
the	effect	of	its	operations	on	the	
environment and responds to wider 
environmental concerns.

The business has also experienced 
continued impact from the Covid-19 
pandemic and Brexit during 2021.

Response to Covid-19 pandemic 
(‘Covid-19’)
The Group continues to respond to 
Covid-19 with the focus being on the 
safety and wellbeing of our people, 
protecting	our	financial	position	and	
limiting the interruption of service  
to our customers. Covid-19 was not 
classified	as	a	separate	principal	risk	
due	to	its	pervasive	effect	across	all	
the principal risks and uncertainties. 
These uncertainties will remain for 
some time and to date the Group  
has adapted well to the constantly 
changing conditions.

Response to Brexit
The new trading arrangement 
between the UK and the EU came 
into	effect	on	1	January	2021.	Whilst	
there has been some disruption to 
the supply chain and an increased 
administration burden, the impact on 
the	Group	has	not	been	significant	
– largely due to mitigation measures 
put in place. We continue to monitor 
the impact of ongoing negotiations 
over the Northern Ireland protocol 
and the full implementation of 
customs checks at ports which  
came	into	effect	from	January	2022.

There are a number of other risks 
that we manage which are not 
considered key risks. In addition,  
the Group is subject to the impact  
of general economic conditions 
including any economic uncertainty, 
the competitive environment, 
compliance with legislation and risks 
associated with business continuity. 
These are mitigated in ways common 
to	all	businesses	and	not	specific	to	
Macfarlane Group.

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

Strategic changes in the market

Failure to respond to strategic 
shifts in the market, including  
the impact of weaknesses in the 
economy as well as disruptive 
behaviour from competitors and 
changing customer needs (e.g. the 
move towards online retail) could 
limit the Group’s ability to continue 
to grow revenues.

We monitor this through Net 
Promoter Score, an annual 
customer satisfaction survey  
and interaction with customers  
at our Innovation Lab.

•  The	Group	has	a	well-diversified	customer	

base	giving	protection	from	changes	in	specific	
industry	sectors	as	well	as	a	flexible	business	
model with a strong value proposition to 
meet the changing needs of customers.
•  The Group strives to maintain high service 

levels for customers ensuring that customer 
needs are met. The Group continues to 
invest in electronic trading platforms to 
further	enhance	its	service	offering.

•  The Group maintains strong partnerships 
with key suppliers to ensure that a broad 
range of products is available to respond to 
customers’ requirements, including any 
changes in their environmental and 
sustainability priorities.

•  The Group’s supply chain in 2021 has been 
stressed due to strong market demand for 
packaging resulting in a shortage of certain 
products and extended lead times from 
suppliers. With the support of strategic 
partners, the Group has continued to provide 
a good service to its customers in challenging 
circumstances. We expect these supply chain 
difficulties	to	continue	into	2022.

•  During	2021	the	Group	has	made	a	significant	
investment in a new Customer Relationship 
Management system to support customer 
service teams in managing the complex and 
changing needs of our customers in an 
increasingly competitive environment. The 
full	benefit	of	this	investment	is	expected	to	
be realised from 2022 onwards.

20   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

Impact of environmental changes (new risk introduced in 2021)

Customers are increasingly 
focused on the environmental 
impacts of packaging, changing 
their buying behaviours in 
response to climate and 
sustainability concerns. 

Investors are looking to invest  
in companies that demonstrate 
strong Environmental, Social and 
Governance (ESG) credentials. 

There is increasing regulatory 
focus around reporting disclosures 
and new requirements, such as the 
Plastic Tax being introduced from 
April 2022. 

If the Group is not proactive and 
transparent in how it is responding 
to environmental changes, this 
could lead to a loss of employees, 
customers and investors.

The key measure the Group 
monitors is Scope 1 and 2 CO2 
emissions.

Raw material prices

The Group’s businesses are 
impacted by commodity-based raw 
material prices and manufacturer 
energy costs, with profitability 
sensitive to input price changes 
including currency fluctuations. 

The principal components are 
corrugated paper, polythene films, 
timber and foam, with changes to 
paper and oil prices having a direct 
impact on the price we pay to our 
suppliers.

This risk is monitored through our 
procurement teams interacting 
with key suppliers and management 
regularly reviewing gross margin  
by customer.

•  The Group has implemented an ESG working 
group	to	examine	specifically	how	we	can	
reduce our impact on the environment. 
•  The working Group is focused on measuring 
the CO2 footprint and setting reduction targets 
for TCFD (Taskforce for Climate-related 
Financial Disclosures).

•  The Group has committed to the 

development of a transition plan towards 
net-zero, which is continually reviewed and 
adapted to latest demands and available 
technologies

•  Regular reviews of our environmental strategy 
are to be carried out at Board level to challenge 
performance against key milestones, as well 
as to ensure that priorities are aligned with 
stakeholder objectives.

•  The Group recognises the increased 

significance	of	our	ESG	obligations.	Our	 
plans include actions to reduce our own 
carbon footprint, including the introduction 
of	electric	trucks	to	our	fleet	in	2022,	as	well	
as actions to support our customers on how 
to reduce their CO2 emissions, including the 
roll-out of our new ‘packaging optimiser’ tool.

•  See Sustainability Report on pages 28 to 39.

•  The Group works closely with its supplier and 
customer	base	to	manage	effectively	the	scale	
and timing of price changes and any resultant 
impact	on	profit.	Our	IT	systems	monitor	and	
measure	effectiveness	in	these	changes.	

• 

•  Where possible, alternative supplier 

relationships are maintained to minimise 
supplier dependency. 

•  We work with customers to redesign packs 
and reduce packing cost to mitigate the 
impact of cost increases.

•  The Group has a well-established supplier 
relationship management process which  
is subject to periodic management review 
and auditing.

Input	prices	have	increased	significantly	and	
continuously throughout 2021 primarily due 
to rising timber, paper and polymer prices. 
The business has robustly managed these 
challenges and gross margins have remained 
strong	throughout	2021,	reflecting	the	effort	
of our teams to mitigate these increases. We 
expect upward pressure in input prices to 
continue into 2022. In addition, the Group is 
preparing for the introduction of the Plastics 
Tax in April 2022 with action plans being 
developed to minimise the impact on the 
Group and our customers through redesign, 
substitution or reduction in use of the 
affected	products.

21

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Principal risks and uncertainties
(continued)

Risk description

Acquisitions

The Group’s growth strategy has 
included a number of acquisitions in 
recent years. There is a risk that such 
acquisitions may not be available 
on acceptable terms in the future.

It is possible that acquisitions will 
not be successful due to the loss of 
key people or customers following 
acquisition or acquired businesses 
not performing at the level 
expected. This could potentially 
lead to impairment of the carrying 
value of the related goodwill and 
other intangible assets.

Execution risks around the  
failure to successfully integrate 
acquisitions following conclusion 
of the earn-out period also exist.

Property

The Group has a property portfolio 
comprising 2 owned sites and 45 
leased sites. This multi-site portfolio 
gives rise to risks in relation to 
ongoing lease costs, dilapidations 
and fluctuations in value. 

Cyber-security

The increasing frequency and 
sophistication of cyber-attacks is  
a risk which potentially threatens 
the confidentiality, integrity and 
availability of the Group’s data  
and IT systems.

These attacks could also cause 
reputational damage and fines in 
the event of personal data being 
compromised.

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

•  The Group carefully reviews potential 

acquisition targets, ensuring that the focus is 
on high-quality businesses which complement 
the	Group’s	existing	profile	and	provide	good	
opportunities for growth. 

•  Having completed a number of acquisitions in 
recent years, the Group has well-established 
due diligence and integration processes and 
procedures.

•  The Group’s management information 
system	enables	effective	monitoring	of	
post-acquisition performance with earn-out 
mechanisms also mitigating risk in the 
post-acquisition period.

•  Goodwill and other intangible assets are 
tested annually for impairment with the 
results set out in note 10.

•  The Group adopts a proactive approach to 
managing property costs and exposures.
•  Where a site is non-operational the Group 

• 

seeks to assign, sell or sub-lease the building 
to	mitigate	the	financial	impact.	
If this is not possible, rental voids are provided 
on vacant properties taking into 
consideration the likely period of vacancy  
and incentives to re-let.

•  The Group engages with external property 
advisers to assess the level of provisioning 
required for dilapidations and negotiate to 
minimise	the	final	costs.

•  The Group continually invests in its IT 

infrastructure to protect against cyber-security 
threats. This includes regular testing of IT 
Disaster Recovery Plans.

•  We engage the services of a cyber-security 

partner to perform regular penetration tests 
to assess potential vulnerabilities within our 
security arrangements.

•  This is complemented by a program of 

cyber-security awareness training to ensure 
that	all	staff	are	aware	of	the	potential	threats	
caused by deliberate and unauthorised 
attempts to gain access to our systems  
and data.

•  The Group has made 14 acquisitions since 
2014, including two in 2021, all of which 
continue to perform well. The Group has 
well-established due diligence and 
integration processes while only acquiring 
well established quality businesses which  
will perform well in the Group.

•  Our property consolidation strategy has 

continued during 2021. Work is ongoing to 
finalise	exit	costs	following	the	expiry	of	three	
leases and there are known future exits from 
another three existing operating sites. 
Provisions have been established to cover 
the anticipated exit costs. (note 21)
•  The Group currently has no vacant or  

sub-let properties.

•  Remote working practices introduced in 
response to Covid-19 have now become  
the norm, with the Group adopting hybrid 
home/office	flexibility	for	its	employees.	 
This is a feature within the Group’s risk to 
cyber-security attacks. 

•  The Group has continued to invest in 
prevention/detection software and 
education programmes to mitigate the  
risks of cyber-security attacks.

•  The frequency and sophistication of 

cyber-attacks is anticipated to continue  
to evolve, and the Group is committed  
to continually investing in upgrading its 
infrastructure to respond to the changing 
threats.

22   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

Financial liquidity, debt covenants and interest rates

The Group needs continuous 
access to funding to meet its 
trading obligations and to support 
organic growth and acquisitions. 
There is a risk that the Group may 
be unable to obtain funds and that 
such funds will only be available on 
unfavourable terms.

The Group’s borrowing facility 
comprises a committed facility  
of up to £30m. This includes 
requirements to comply with 
specified covenants, with a  
breach potentially resulting in 
Group borrowings being subject  
to more onerous conditions. 

Working capital

The Group has a significant 
investment in working capital in 
the form of trade receivables and 
inventories. There is a risk that this 
investment is not fully recovered.

•  The Group’s borrowing facility comprises  
a committed facility of £30m with Lloyds 
Banking	Group	PLC,	which	finances	our	
trading requirements and supports controlled 
expansion, providing a medium-term funding 
platform for growth.

•  The Group regularly monitors net bank debt 
and	forecast	cash	flows	to	ensure	that	it	will	
be	able	to	meet	its	financial	obligations	as	
they fall due.

•  Compliance with covenants is monitored  
on a monthly basis and sensitivity analysis  
is applied to forecasts to assess the impact 
on covenant compliance.

•  Credit risk is controlled by applying rigour to 
the management of trade receivables by our 
Credit Manager and the credit control team 
and is subject to additional scrutiny from the 
Group Finance Director.

•  All aged debts are assessed, and appropriate 
provisions are made using the Expected 
Credit Loss model.
Inventory levels and order patterns are 
regularly reviewed and risks arising from 
holding bespoke stocks are managed by 
obtaining order cover from customers.

• 

Defined benefit pension scheme 

The Group’s defined benefit pension 
scheme is sensitive to a number of 
key factors including investment 
returns, the discount rates used to 
calculate the scheme’s liabilities and 
mortality assumptions.

Small changes in these assumptions 
could cause significant movements 
in the pension surplus/deficit. 

•  The scheme was closed to new members  
in	2002.	Benefits	for	active	members	were	
amended by freezing pensionable salaries  
at April 2009 levels.

•  A Pension Increase Exchange option is 

available	to	offer	flexibility	to	new	pensioners	
in both the level of pension at retirement and 
the rate of future increases.

•  The	investment	profile	is	regularly	reviewed	to	
ensure continued matching of investments 
with	the	scheme’s	liability	profile.

•  The Group has proved to be strongly  

cash generative in 2021 and has operated  
well within its existing bank facilities 
throughout the year.

•  The Group’s £30m committed facility with 
Lloyds Banking Group PLC was extended 
until December 2025.

•  Bad	debt	write-offs	in	2021	have	reduced	
from	2020	and	this	is	reflected	in	the	
Expected Credit Loss allowance being 
decreased accordingly (note 14).

•  However, there continues to be uncertainty 
over the impact of the withdrawal of Covid-19 
government support programmes and the 
ongoing	effect	of	continuing	Covid-19	
restrictions on the wider economy and  
our customers.

•  Aged stock over 6 months old has increased in 
2021 (note 13) due to challenging supply chain 
conditions. Extended manufacturing lead 
times and a shortage of some raw materials 
has required the Group to increase inventories 
to maintain good service to its customers.

•  The	IAS	19	valuation	of	the	Group’s	defined	
benefit	pension	scheme	as	at	31	December	
2021 estimated the scheme surplus to be 
£8.3m,	compared	to	a	deficit	of	£1.5m	at	 
31 December 2020. 

•  Deficit	repair	contributions	reduced	from	
£3.0m to £1.3m per annum following the 
triennial actuarial valuation at 1 May 2020. 
This	reflects	continued	progress	in	reducing	
the	deficit.

23

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Stakeholder engagement s172 statement

Stakeholder group: Shareholders

Principal methods of engagement
Members of the Board normally engage with shareholders throughout the year  
at events such as the Annual General Meeting, the results roadshows and Capital 
Markets Days. Our Chairman also consults with major shareholders each year. Due 
to Covid-19 restrictions a mixture of face to face and virtual meetings were held 
throughout 2021. These meetings gave shareholders a number of opportunities 
to raise concerns. Presentations to Shareholders are also shared on the  
www.macfarlanegroup.com website.

Stakeholder group: Employees

Principal methods of engagement
The	Board	normally	holds	at	least	four	of	its	meetings	at	different	Group	locations	
and this provides the opportunity to engage with the local teams and hear their 
views on working within Macfarlane Group. Due to Covid-19 restrictions in the  
last year 5 of 7 Board meetings were held virtually and employee representatives 
were	invited	to	those	meetings	to	engage	with	the	Board	on	issues	affecting	
employees, including Health & Safety and well-being. In addition, Executive Board 
members have held monthly communication meetings with teams across the 
Group to provide an update on key issues and discuss any concerns.

Stakeholder group: Pension members

Principal methods of engagement
The Group Finance Director attends all Trustee Board meetings of the Macfarlane 
Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance Scheme (1974) and works with the Board of 
Trustees to ensure the pension is funded in line with UK pension legislation to 
meet our commitments to the 560 current and former employees who are 
members of this pension arrangement. Feedback from each of these meetings  
is provided to the Board for consideration of any actions required in the interests 
of pension scheme members.

Stakeholder group: Customers

Principal methods of engagement
Teams at all our locations interact with our existing and potential customers in the 
Local,	Core	and	National	customer	groups	on	a	daily	basis	to	understand	and	fulfil	
their	product	and	service	requirements.	Using	our	‘Significant	Six’	sales	approach	 
we work with our customers to optimise their packaging requirements from both  
a value and sustainability perspective.

Stakeholder group: Suppliers

Principal methods of engagement
Our procurement teams and employees at all our locations interact with both our 
strategic and operating suppliers on a daily basis to ensure that the supply chain is 
robust and that the trading relationships with suppliers continue to operate well. In 
the last year, supply chain issues and shortages have been experienced across the 
industry and we have worked closely with our suppliers to ensure that their business 
has been maintained and can continue to serve our customers’ requirements. The 
Group pays suppliers in line with agreed credit terms.

Stakeholder group: Local community

Principal methods of engagement
We operate from good quality facilities throughout the UK and deliver to customers 
using	our	own	fleet	of	trucks,	driven	by	our	drivers.	We	act	in	a	manner	intended	to	
recognise and reduce our impact on our local environments in terms of the types of 
product supplied, usage of energy and CO2 emissions. We employ people from the 
local areas of each of our businesses and invest in their training and development.

24   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

The Board and its individual 
Directors consider that they have 
acted in good faith in the manner 
that is most likely to promote the 
success of Macfarlane Group for 
the benefit of its members as a 
whole and have done so having 
regard to the stakeholders and 
matters set out in Section 172  
of the Companies Act 2006.

There is a recognition by the 
Directors that they are not expected 
to balance the interests of the 
members of Macfarlane Group 
against those of other stakeholders 
but rather, after considering all 
relevant factors, to decide on the 
actions which will best lead to success 
for the Group having regard to the 
long	term.	Decisions	may	not	affect	
all stakeholders equally. Depending 
on the particular matter requiring 
Board decision, this can mean that 
certain stakeholder Groups may be 
inadvertently	adversely	affected,	
but this will not of itself call into 
question the decisions made.

Given the listed status of the 
Company and the nature of its 
operational activities the Directors 
view the key Company stakeholders 
and means of engagement as 
shown in the table to the left.

In all cases, these engagement 
actions help to keep the Board 
informed throughout the year in 
relation to stakeholder concerns 
and priorities, such that, where 
appropriate, they can be taken  
into account within the Board’s 
decision-making.

We expect our people to act with  
the highest level of integrity in 
dealing with all stakeholders. We 
operate a suite of policies which are 
intended to ensure that Macfarlane 
Group employees are empowered 
to make decisions locally that are 
aligned with those values but within 
a control framework which meets 
Group objectives.

Board decision:
Strategy

Board decision:
Performance

Stakeholder group engagement

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders

Employees

Customers

Suppliers

Local community

Shareholders

Employees

Customers

Suppliers

The Board approves the annual 
budget for the forthcoming year  
at its December meeting.

The Board reviews the trading 
performance of the business 
throughout the year, monitoring 
performance against the agreed 
budget	and	the	previous	financial	
year.

At each meeting the Board receives 
reports from the Chief Executive 
and the Finance Director. These 
reports cover trading performance, 
relationships with key customers 
and suppliers as well as aspects of 
operational performance and the 
impact on our employees. The 
reports also give the Board visibility 
of the up to date trading terms with 
both customers and suppliers.

The activities of our competitors 
are reviewed, along with any 
potential impact on the Group  
and its stakeholders.

The Board reviews the Group’s 
strategic direction and growth plans 
during each calendar year. In doing 
so, it considers the position of its  
key stakeholder groups.

The Board approved the acquisition  
of Carters Packaging and GWP Group, 
concluding that the businesses 
acquired had a similar customer and 
business approach to Macfarlane and 
would	be	a	good	strategic	fit,	providing	
the Group with a strong packaging 
distribution presence in Cornwall  
and	a	significant	strengthening	of	 
the Group’s protective packaging 
manufacturing capabilities. As such, 
the Board concluded that the 
acquisitions were in the interests  
of suppliers, customers and 
employees of both the Group  
and the acquired businesses.

Each year the Board reviews and 
approves Corporate Defence 
documents designed to protect  
the value of Macfarlane Group and 
the interests of stakeholders in the 
event of an unexpected approach.

The Board uses its regular meetings 
as a mechanism to address and meet 
its obligations under Section 172 of 
the Companies Act 2006. The 
following narrative covers the key 
decisions made during the year and 
the Stakeholder Groups impacted  
by those decisions.

Board decision:
Sale of the Labels division

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders

Employees

Customers

The	Board	reviewed	the	offer	for	the	
Labels	division	made	by	The	Reflex	
Group	Limited	(‘Reflex’)	in	July	2021	
and after robust assessment agreed 
the terms were good value for 
shareholders. Heads of terms were 
agreed and following extensive due 
diligence the Labels division was sold 
to	Reflex	on	31	December	2021	in	line	
with the terms approved by the Board. 
The Board was regularly updated on 
progress by the Chief Executive and 
the Group Finance Director.

The Board, in making its decision to 
sell the Labels division, considered 
Reflex’s	future	plans	for	the	business	
and	were	satisfied	that	they	were	
committed to the future success  
of the business and to maintaining  
a manufacturing presence and 
workforce in Scotland and Ireland. 
With their well-established position 
and scale in the labels market, the 
Board believed this created the best 
opportunity for the Labels division  
to develop and to continue to serve 
its customers and suppliers.

The Board concluded that the sale 
would allow the Group to focus its 
resources on growing its protective 
packaging businesses both in the  
UK	and	Europe	for	the	benefit	of	all	
stakeholders.

25

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Stakeholder engagement s172 statement
(continued)

The Board approves all location 
moves, including property exits as 
well as the terms of new property 
arrangements, in order to ensure 
that these are aligned with the 
interests of all stakeholders and 
provide sustainable solutions for  
the long term success of the Group. 
In 2021, the Board approved the exit 
from property leases in Glasgow, 
Wigan and Manchester to move to 
new larger properties in Glasgow  
and Middleton to support the growth 
of the business in Scotland and the 
North West of England. The new 
Glasgow lease was for a period of ten 
years,	with	a	break	clause	after	five	
years and the Middleton lease is for  
a	period	of	fifteen	years	with	a	break	
clause after ten years.

The Board considers and approves 
any items of capital expenditure with 
a value in excess of £100,000 and 
contracts which commit the Group 
to annual operational expenditure in 
excess of £250,000. During 2021 the 
major items approved were for four 
new corrugate box and die-cutting 
machines and mobile technology to 
enable hybrid working at a cost of 
£850,000. Major capital allocation 
decisions are a matter reserved for 
the Board, which considers the 
interests of all relevant stakeholder 
groups prior to approval.

Board decision:
Financing

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders

Employees

Pension members

Customers

Suppliers

Local community

The Board approves the terms and 
conditions attaching to the Group’s 
major banking arrangement and 
receives	regular	reports	confirming	
compliance with bank covenants. 
This provides assurance regarding 
the ability of the Group to continue 
to operate for the foreseeable 
future in the interests of all 
stakeholder groups.

The Board approves the payment  
of dividends to shareholders, taking 
into account distributable reserves 
and	likely	cash	flows	and	the	level	of	
dividends	relative	to	other	financing	
requirements. In doing so, the Board 
considers	the	financing	and	free	
cashflows	available	to	maintain	its	
operations, to continue to meet its 
obligations to its employees and 
members of its pension scheme 
and	to	fulfil	its	strategic	objectives	
in the interests of all stakeholders.

At the conclusion of each triennial 
actuarial valuation of the pension 
scheme	surplus/deficit,	the	Board	
approves the contributions being 
proposed under the recovery plan 
for	any	deficit	and	ensures	that	
these	are	within	the	financing	and	
cashflow	capacities	of	the	Group.	
The	formal	schedule	of	deficit	
reduction contributions, following 
the conclusion of the actuarial 
valuation at 1 May 2020 was  
agreed in February 2021.

Board decision:
Risk

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders

Employees

Pension members

Customers

Suppliers

Local community

The Board reviews and monitors the 
Company’s internal control framework 
ensuring regular updating of the Group 
and the business’s risk registers. In 
doing	so,	it	considers	the	effectiveness	
of the risk management and internal 
control systems in terms of the 
objective of providing reasonable  
but not absolute assurance against 
material misstatement relative to the 
interests of relevant stakeholders. 

The Board regularly reviews the 
Group’s risk register, ensuring that, 
where appropriate and practical, 
there are appropriate monitoring 
procedures, mitigating controls and 
actions in respect of each major risk. 
This includes a formal consideration 
of emerging risks.

The Board receives a Health and 
Safety status report at every meeting 
as well as an annual presentation 
from the Group’s Health & Safety 
Manager, which covers the impact  
on our employees, our sites and our 
local environment. These reports 
included measures to ensure the 
well-being of employees as the 
Group responded to changing 
government advice relating to  
the ongoing Covid-19 pandemic.

The	Audit	Committee	confirms	to	the	
Board that the Internal Audit Plan has 
been completed and that all internal 
audit reports have been considered 
and action taken where necessary.

26   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Board decision:
Governance and legal 
requirements 

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders

Employees

The Board conducts an annual  
review	of	its	effectiveness	and	 
the	effectiveness	of	the	Board	
Committees, including the adequacy 
of its decision-making processes with 
regard to key stakeholder groups.

The Board considers current and future 
Board composition, with a focus on all 
forms of diversity and Board capability 
and reviews succession planning for 
both Executive and Non-executive 
Directors to ensure orderly succession.

The Board reviews the Annual 
Report,	confirming	that	in	its	view,	
the Annual Report is fair, balanced 
and understandable and provides  
the information necessary for 
shareholders and other stakeholders 
to assess the Group’s performance, 
business model and strategy.

The	Board	reviews	and	satisfies	 
itself with all other trading updates, 
including the AGM statement, the 
half-year report and trading update  
in	the	final	quarter	of	the	year.

The Board accepted the Audit 
Committee’s recommendation to 
re-appoint Deloitte LLP as external 
auditor in 2021.

Board decision:
Culture and organisation

Board decision:
Response to Covid-19

Stakeholder group engagement

Stakeholder group engagement

Shareholders

Employees

The Board seeks to satisfy itself that 
the Group’s policies and practices  
for	staff	are	consistent	with	the	
Company’s values and are designed 
to promote the long-term success  
of the Group with appropriate regard 
to all stakeholders.

The Remuneration Committee 
reviews the remuneration packages 
for the Executive Directors and the 
Chief Executive’s key reports each 
year. The Board reviews annual pay 
increases for Executive Directors 
each year, ensuring these are 
appropriate relative to the wider 
employee group.

The Board reviews and approves  
the Group’s Gender Pay reports  
each year.

The Board consulted with its largest 
shareholders on the triennial review 
of its Remuneration Policy on pages 
56 to 62. 

The Board receives a report from the 
HR Director each year covering key 
employee matters and developments. 
This report covers the results of our 
annual employee survey.

Shareholders

Employees

Pension members

Customers

Suppliers

Local community

The Board received regular updates 
on the Group’s response to the 
Covid-19 pandemic from the Chief 
Executive, the Group Finance 
Director and the HR Director with 
particular focus on the health, 
safety and well-being of employees, 
service to customers and the 
Group’s	financial	position.	

Board decision:
Environment

Stakeholder group engagement

Local community

The Board recognises that the 
largest contributor to the Group’s 
CO2 footprint (71%) is the operation 
of its commercial vehicles used to 
deliver product to its customers. 
The Board approved the leasing of 
five	electric	commercial	vehicles	in	
2021. The Board is committed to 
the	gradual	electrification	of	its	
commercial	vehicles	fleet	as	
technology improves and the 
existing	fleet	is	due	for	renewal	as	
this is considered to be the most 
appropriate means to manage the 
risk and cost of progressing the 
Group’s sustainability strategies  
and thereby serving the interests  
of	both	financial	and	wider	
stakeholders in the Group.

27

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Sustainability report

TCFD report

In line with the listing rule for 
premium listed companies, the 
Group reports on its compliance 
with the Task Force on Climate-
related Financial Disclosures 
(‘TCFD’). This report sets out the 
climate-related financial disclosures 
in the Group for 2021. The Group  
is fully committed to the adoption 
of the TCFD’s proposals, and we 
are keen to demonstrate our clear 
focus on climate change to 
investors and wider stakeholders. 
The report below sets out our 
progress in each of the four key 
TCFD reporting areas:

Strategy
In developing its strategy, Macfarlane 
Group recognises that the future 
trading landscape could look very 
different	as	climate	change,	including	
extreme weather events, becomes 
an increasingly important factor. 
Increasingly, customers are making 
choices towards using less 
packaging where possible, as well  
as selecting packaging that is  
more environmentally friendly.

As the leading protective packaging 
distributor in the UK, we have a 
responsibility to support our 
customers to make an informed 
choice around their packaging 
requirements, enabling them to 
achieve their sustainability 
objectives and meet the needs of 
their end-customers. The support 
we provide covers a number of areas:

•   The main role of protective 

packaging is to reduce product 
damage during both storage and 
delivery. Product damage and 
returns create additional, 
avoidable carbon emissions, 
therefore minimising product 
damage is critical in the design 
and manufacturing service we 
provide to our customers.

•   In designing their packaging, 

reducing the amount of packaging 
materials employed is fundamental 
and we achieve this by ensuring the 
protective	packaging	we	sell	is	fit	for	
purpose and also ‘right-sized’ for its 
contents, so minimising the amount 
of	void	fill	in	the	pack	and	the	amount	
of material used to carry the product.

•   Our designs wherever possible  

use recycled materials and, where 
possible, the used pack can also 
itself be recyclable.

•   In addition to ensuring the pack 

design is environmentally friendly 
we have a Packaging Optimiser tool 
that allows us to help reduce the 
carbon footprint of our customers in 
areas such as logistics, warehousing 
and operations. 

Macfarlane Group is principally a 
distribution business and as such  
is ideally strategically positioned to 
provide our customers with unbiased 
advice. We can help them to make 
informed choices on pack designs, 
the most environmentally friendly 
materials and to work with 
manufacturing partners who 
themselves operate to a strong 
environmental agenda.

The risks are that we do not move  
fast enough for the market, or that we 
move too fast and alienate sections  
of the market. With our position in the 
market, it is vital that we obtain the 
right balance, demonstrating our 
environmental	credentials	by	offering	
customers an informed choice for 
their protective packaging. 

Macfarlane Group’s exposure
to climate change
We believe our business model is 
highly resilient to climate change. 
With	our	flexible	footprint	as	a	
consequence of operating from 
leased facilities, as well as the ability 
to select which suppliers we partner 
with, we have a strong base from 
which	to	continue	to	offer	customers	
an informed choice over the best 
protective packaging to suit their 
environmental goals. 

•   Through our Innovation Lab, we 
can continue to design bespoke 
packaging that adds value to the 
customer, and their end consumers 
– whilst also satisfying carbon 
reduction goals.

•	 	We	operate	our	own	vehicle	fleet	
using route optimisation software 
that ensures we minimise the miles 
driven and carbon used for all 
deliveries. Our performance in  
this area will improve as we switch 
our	delivery	fleet	to	electric	
vehicles in line with the planned 
technological advancements in 
electric vehicle design.

•	 	Our	financial	planning	takes	 

into account key initiatives and 
investment required in sustainability 
in order to meet our CO2 reduction 
targets. 

•   Our risk management process has 
highlighted both intermediate and 
longer-term risks relating to climate 
change. This includes the location 
of our distribution centres, which 
may	be	more	likely	to	suffer	
extreme weather events such  
as	flooding.	In	2022	we	plan	to	
introduce scenario planning into 
our strategic process, to ensure 
our strategy remains robust and 
resilient in the face of a potentially 
very	different	trading	environment	
in the intermediate and long term.

Going forward, there are 
opportunities to highlight the 
particular environmental credentials  
of the individual products we are 
selling, enabling targets to be set. 
This is the next initiative planned for 
2022, which will allow us to report our 
future	targets	on	the	profile	of	the	
products we are selling, including 
their recyclability.

Governance 
The Board has taken the view that 
climate	change	could	have	a	significant	
impact on the operations of the 
business. This applies both to the 
current period, where stakeholders  
are increasingly aware of this issue, and 
longer term should extreme weather 
events increase in frequency. 

28   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

place on how to achieve the 
reduction. While the Board fully 
supports the ultimate achievement 
of Net-Zero carbon emissions, at 
present	no	firm	target	is	in	place	on	
when this will be achieved. This is 
because it is not in our nature to set 
vague or distant targets without  
a clear plan on how they can be 
achieved. Our 2030 target will 
require	significant	change	and	
investment therefore that will be 
our key focus going forward.

Over the longer-term, we consider 
our business to be resilient and 
viable in a situation where global 
temperatures have risen 2 degrees 
or more. The key to this is the 
flexibility	of	our	geographic	footprint,	
through our leased facilities – as well 
as our strategic partnerships with 
suppliers where we can exercise 
flexibility	as	required.	In	2022,	plans	
are in place for scenario analysis to be 
conducted as part of our approach 
to strategic planning. 

Metrics and targets 
A detailed review took place in 2021 
to determine the best approach  
for our business in determining 
appropriate metrics and targets.  
As the leading UK packaging 
distributor, we believe that making 
investments to reduce our own 
carbon footprint complements our 
business model and strategy by 
ensuring we continue to operate 
with strong and demonstrable 
sustainability credentials.

•   ESG is now a standing item on  

the Board agenda, providing the 
framework to discuss environmental 
issues at each meeting – including 
factoring in these considerations 
into major decisions. E.g. the 
proposal to introduce electric trucks 
in	2022	–	a	significant	commitment,	
which was subject to Board scrutiny 
to ensure it is the right way forward 
for the business in meeting its 
climate goals.

•   The Board considers the reporting of 
the Company’s CO2 emissions to be 
fair, balanced and understandable. 
As a growing Company with an 
acquisitive strategy, it is appropriate 
that we continue to assess our 
carbon emissions on a volume basis. 
The move to tonnage was seen as 
the best way to capture this, as a 
fairer barometer of carbon progress 
compared to the previous intensity 
figure	based	on	sales.

•   The executive sponsor for ESG is the 
Company Secretary. In 2022, a Head 
of Sustainability will be appointed, 
reporting to the Company Secretary 
and providing regular updates to the 
Board. Our ESG committee has a 
broad range of leaders from a wide 
spectrum of the business, including 
sales; procurement; operations  
and HR. This committee has 
responsibility for developing the 
sustainability strategy of the 
Company, as well as promoting 
sustainability throughout the Group.

•   In 2022, the Board will continue to 
ensure it has the right skills and 
expertise on climate related matters 
– using external speakers where 
appropriate to bolster the existing 
personnel. The Board will continue 
to report against TCFD in the years 
to come, providing updates on 
progress made towards our goal  
of a CO2 per tonne reduction of 
30% by 2030. From 2022 onwards, 
targets will also be set in relation  
to the recyclability of our product 
range and the availability of 
replacement products which are 
more environmentally friendly. 

Risk Management 
Macfarlane has a robust approach  
to Risk Management, as outlined in 
the Principal Risks and Uncertainties 
section on pages 20 to 23 and the 
Governance section on pages 41 to 72.

•   In 2021, a new risk was added to  

our corporate risk register, having 
previously only been visible at an 
operating risk level. This highlights 
the environmental challenge  
faced by the Company, both in  
the intermediate period and 
longer-term horizon including  
that of losing market share due to 
our environmental credentials not 
being perceived favourably, or even 
by moving too fast in this area. This 
transition	risk	reflects	the	risk	of	
the market changing considerably 
in this area.

•   There is also the risk of an 

increased frequency of extreme 
weather	events	affecting	the	
operations at our sites. This 
transition risk and physical risk  
are only increasing in likelihood  
and consequently will be subject  
to regular review by the Board 
throughout 2022.

•   Climate Change risk ties in with 

other risks faced by the business 
that could result in overall loss of 
market share. The risk is inclusive, 
as it embraces reputational risk 
from a perception of ‘not doing 
enough’ in this area, as well as 
pressure from shareholders, 
customers and end-consumers 
alike. The risk will be considered 
along with other key corporate  
risks on a rolling basis in 2022 as 
part of the regular Board agenda. 

The Board has considered a 5-10  
year horizon when considering 
environmental risk. Whilst the risk 
certainly pervades well beyond this,  
it is important in reinforcing our 
requirement to take action now or 
risk the consequences from acting 
too late. In line with the core 
Company value of integrity, our focus 
is on what clear actions we can take in 
the next period to 2030. This is why 
we have set our reduction target for 
2030 accordingly, with a clear plan in 

29

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Sustainability report
(continued)

The Company has used external 
expertise from ‘EcoAct’ in capturing 
our carbon emissions for the year. 
From 2022, we also plan to work 
closely with Renault on their new  
16 tonne electric truck, providing 
data and feedback to them on its 
performance. This will allow a 
partnership to develop which could 
pave the way for future collaboration 
in a more extended and faster 
roll-out	of	our	electric	truck	fleet.

The methodology behind the 
metrics is similar to other companies 
in the sector, with CO2 per tonne 
deemed the most appropriate 
measure to capture the planned 
reductions.	Also	in	2022,	for	the	first	
time an environmental objective will 
be built into the personal objectives 
of the senior management team. 
This is a positive step, signifying  
that real actions and progress are 
expected in the intermediate period, 
rather than just talking about green 
initiatives. At present we have 
chosen to focus on Scope 1 and 2 
CO2, being the direct emissions  
that we can fully control. Only once 
our action plan is embedded and 
significant	progress	made	towards	
our planned 2030 target, would we 
look to perform a review including 
our Scope 3 emissions.

4.  Other natural resources
(i)  Water
Our business model requires very little 
water usage, given our relatively small 
manufacturing footprint compared 
to our distribution business. This is  
a balance we will seek to maintain, 
therefore keeping our water usage 
low is of paramount importance in 
our strategy and business model.

(ii)  Waste
Currently 99% of our waste avoids 
landfill	–	we	plan	to	maintain	this	and	
increase to 100%, as well as continue 
to promote our recycling arm as an 
option for customers.

(iii) Land-use
Our use of land is limited to the 
running of warehouses close to our 
customers, geographically spread 
across the UK and Ireland, and 
expanding into mainland Europe.  
The	flexibility	of	leased	facilities	
means we do not require any 
significant	alteration	of	the	premises/
land where we do business. We plan to 
maintain this operating model, with 
limited usage of natural resources. 

Summary
Overall,	we	have	made	a	firm	
commitment with our 30% reduction 
in CO2 per tonne of goods sold. In 
2022 we will commence our action 
plan to begin these CO2 reduction 
initiatives, as well as perform a detailed 
review of our product lines to develop 
targets on recyclability and % recycled 
content. Further detail on these 
environmental targets can be found in 
the ESG section of our Sustainability 
Report on pages 32 to 35.

1.  Our carbon footprint
Our own direct (Scope 1 and 2) carbon 
footprint	is	the	first	important	metric	
for us to track. Following a detailed 
review of our carbon emissions, the 
following target has been set:

•   By 2030, we will have reduced our 
CO2 per tonne of sales by 30%.

This target is greatly dependent  
on further advances in battery 
technology used in electric trucks, 
given this currently comprises two 
thirds of our carbon footprint. In 
2022, we will publish our timetable 
showing the assumptions and 
investment required to get us to net 
zero by 2050. The Board’s policy is to 
keep the targets under review, and to 
be prepared to increase them where 
this is facilitated by transition in 
operating cost reductions and 
advances in technology.

2.  Our products
As a packaging distributor, we believe 
the products we sell and their usage by 
our customers is a key element of our 
environmental strategy. Therefore, 
the aim is to reduce the number of 
products we sell that are currently 
not recycled, or have less than 30% 
recycled content. By 2025, we aim to 
have 90% of our products containing 
at least 30% recycled content, and we 
will report on progress in this each year. 
We will also include a planned annual 
target of how we have reduced the 
CO2 of our customers operations, 
through	more	efficient	packaging	
usage and materials.

3.  Other carbon targets
•   We aim to have all of our sites FSC 
certified	by	2025	(currently	77%).	
From 2025-2030, the focus will shift 
to	specific	product	FSC	certification.

•   By 2025, 100% of our energy will 
come from renewable sources.

30   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

ESG report

Overview and introduction from our CEO

Protecting what matters 

At Macfarlane Group we recognise our responsibilities to operate and invest in our business to 
improve sustainability. We also understand our role in supporting our customers to minimise 
the impact their operations have on the environment.

Consequently, we have set stretching targets for reducing Macfarlane Group’s carbon 
emissions and are sharply focused on implementing initiatives that help our customers 
achieve their sustainability objectives.

A particular highlight of the past year has been Macfarlane Group achieving a Gold rating in  
the EcoVadis sustainability survey. This rating puts the Group in the top 5% of companies 
assessed globally within our industry for sustainability performance across key areas 
including environment, labour & human rights, ethics and sustainable sourcing. 2021 also 
saw us launch our employee assistance programme aimed at improving our response to 
mental well-being in the workplace.

The	next	year	will	see	us	add	electric	vehicles	to	our	commercial	logistics	fleet	and	increase	our	
sustainable packaging portfolio. This will ensure that, wherever possible, the packaging products 
that we sell are either sourced from recycled materials or are fully recyclable once they have 
performed the vital task of protecting our customers’ products on their way to market.

The	support	we	offer	customers	using	our	Significant	Six	Programme	has	and	will	continue	
to be a key aid in enabling them to reduce their carbon emissions. By helping our customers 
reduce damages, minimise their packaging use, optimise their warehouse footprint and 
decrease vehicle movements we can demonstrate how we can help them achieve their 
sustainability goals.

In the past year, Macfarlane Packaging’s sixth Annual Unboxing Survey has highlighted the 
need for businesses to respond to the sustainability expectations of their customers. 2022 
will see the launch of our latest sustainability initiative, the Packaging Optimiser™. This 
unique tool will help us demonstrate to customers how packaging innovation can transform 
supply chains, help reduce material use and make carbon emissions savings – all at the click  
of a mouse. 

In	the	pages	that	follow	in	this	first	Macfarlane	Group	Environment,	Social	and	Governance	
Report we have set out our corporate responsibility goals for the next eight years. I am 
confident	that,	the	successful	execution	of	the	actions	we	have	planned	will	ensure	we	 
make further meaningful progress in contributing to a sustainable future for us all.

Peter Atkinson 
Chief Executive Officer

31

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Sustainability report
(continued)

Highlights 2021

• 20.7% CO2e intensity reduction in 2021 (1.6% absolute reduction).
•  Five new electric trucks ordered and being added to the Macfarlane Group  

delivery	fleet	in	2022.

•  Charitable employee engagement events including supporting Mental Health 
Awareness Week by encouraging colleagues to reconnect with nature in 2021. 

•	99%	of	Macfarlane	Group	waste	diverted	from	landfill.
• Helping customers reduce waste & CO2 through optimised packaging. 
• 48 – our average Net Promoter Score for 2021 (2020:53).
•	Significant	investment	in	new	health	&	safety	management	system.
• Macfarlane Group given an EcoVadis Gold rating in 2021.

Protecting what matters… 
How we manage Environment, 
Social and Governance (ESG) 
We manage ESG through our ESG 
committee, which is chaired by our 
HR Director. The committee meets 
monthly and reports directly to the 
Board. Macfarlane’s ESG committee 
is guided by our core values and  
has clear objectives that drive our 
ESG strategy. 

Our ESG committee objectives 
1.  To improve the awareness of  

ESG across the Group.

2.  To develop and implement action 
plans that support the Group’s 
ESG strategy.

3.  To ensure that ESG is an integral 
part of daily operational activities.

4.  To monitor and report on ESG 
performance using agreed key 
performance indicators.

This report will provide an insight into 
our ESG focus areas, highlighting  
the targets and initiatives we are 
implementing. The report is set out 
into three key sections: Environment; 
Social; and Governance. 

Environment
Tackling carbon emissions  
and climate change 

What we are doing about it 
•   Macfarlane currently emits 6,676 
tonnes of carbon (2020: 6,786T).

•   The major sources of carbon 
emission	are	fuel	for	our	fleet	
(4,809T) and our electricity  
usage (1,211T).

•   By 2030 we will reduce our scope 1 
and 2 carbon emissions (CO2e) by 
at least 30% per tonne of products 
sold compared to 2020. 

Macfarlane Group initiatives  
to tackle carbon emissions and 
climate change 
•	 	Aiming	to	convert	the	delivery	fleet	
to 50% electric vehicles by 2030. 
The	first	five	electric	vehicles	will	 
be	introduced	to	the	fleet	in	2022.	
100% of vehicles of 3.5tn or under 
will be electric by 2030. All new 
vehicles have zero emissions. 
Assuming technology develops 
allowing greater range and payload 
we would expect beyond 2030 to 
have	the	majority	of	our	fleet	
converted to electric vehicles. This 
commitment to electric vehicles 
has	been	made	despite	a	significant	
cost disadvantage over the existing 
fleet.	(Estimated	tCO2e saving of 
1,500 tonnes per year)

•   Introduction of a driver performance 
scheme from 2021 to encourage 
optimal driving behaviour that 
reduces fuel consumption and 
emissions. This programme makes 
use of telematics to track speed, 
braking and acceleration. (Estimated 
tCO2e saving of 250 tonnes per year)
•   The Paragon software and vehicle 
tracking system will be operational 
at all Macfarlane locations by the 
end of 2023. This initiative will allow 
Macfarlane Group to increase 
Paragon utilisation to 100% to 
further reduce emissions created 
by	our	delivery	fleet.	(Estimated	
tCO2e saving of 15 tonnes per year)

•   50% of Company cars will be 

electric by 2026. Macfarlane Group 
commits	to	offering	Company	car	
users more choice of electric 
vehicles. To support all employees 
using electric vehicles, 100% of 
Macfarlane Group sites will have 
electric vehicle charging points by 
2030. (Estimated tCO2e saving of 
180 tonnes per year)

•   Solar panels to be installed at one 
Macfarlane Group site per year, 
saving an average of 20 tonnes  
of CO2e per site. We aim for solar 
panels to be installed in at least 10 
sites by 2030. (Estimated tCO2e 
saving of 90 tonnes per year)

32   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Mandatory greenhouse gas 
reporting 2021
The Group seeks to minimise the 
impact of our operations on the 
environment and is committed to 
reducing its greenhouse gas (’GHG’) 
emissions. This report outlines the 
Group’s GHG emissions for 2021. 
Using an operational approach, the 
Group	identified	its	boundaries	to	
ensure all activities and facilities for 
which it is responsible were being 
recorded and reported in line with 
Scope 1 and 2 of the SECR regulation, 
which	applies	to	Company	financial	
years starting on or after 1st April 

2019. Relevant data was provided to an 
independent consultant, EcoAct. The 
validity, accuracy and completeness 
of the data was audited by EcoAct 
and then used to calculate the GHG 
for Macfarlane Group. Calculations 
were completed in accordance with 
the main requirements of ISO-14064-1 
standard and deliver both absolute 
values and an intensity ratio for 
Macfarlane’s emissions. Activities 
conducted in the Republic of Ireland, 
the Netherlands and Sweden, and 
Scope 3 (Business travel fuel) are now 
included in the calculations as per the 
SECR regulations. 

The Group used total turnover 
(£000) in the reporting period to 
calculate the intensity ratio, as this 
allows emissions to be monitored 
over time, taking into account 
changes in the size of the Group. 
This method was historically chosen 
because it provides the greatest 
degree of accuracy. While the 
turnover basis allows for business 
growth to be considered, it can 
include variances due to material 
price increases. Therefore, from 
2022, we plan to use tonnage as  
a basis for the intensity. 

2021 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

435
4,809
221

5,465

1,211

1,211

6,676

2020 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

449
4,785
161

5,395

1,391

1,391

6,786

2021 

2020

6,676

6,786

285,685

230,029

0.0234

0.0295

Type of emissions

Type of emissions

Activity

Direct (Scope 1)

Natural gas (kWh)
Vehicle fuel (litres)
Other

Sub-total

2021 
Units

2020 
Units

2,375,152
2,503,822
50,627

2,442,273
1,850,967
86,721

Indirect (Scope 2)

Purchased electricity (kWh)

5,700,248

5,968,628

Sub-total

Total gross emissions (tCO2e)

Intensity ratio

Total gross GHG emissions (tCO2e)

Total sales (£000)

Carbon intensity (tCO2e/£000)

Business segment

Business segment

Packaging Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

Total 

2021 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

4,949
1,727

6,676

2020 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

5,185
1,601

6,786

2021
Sales 
£000

2020
Sales 
£000

2021
tCO2e/£000

2020
tCO2e/£000

239,508
46,177

285,685

201,739
28,290

230,029

0.0207
0.0374

0.0234

0.0257
0.0566

0.0295

The tables above include the Labels division sold on 31 December 2021.

33

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Sustainability report
(continued)

Protecting natural resources 

What we are doing about it 
Macfarlane Group is taking a range of 
actions that aim to conserve natural 
resources for future generations… 

•   All sites will be assessed for water 
stress in 2022. High-risk sites will 
have action plans put in place to 
lower water usage. Reminders 
about conserving water will also  
be put in place at all sites.

•	 	We	aim	for	100%	landfill	avoidance	
by 2030. Currently, over 99% of 
waste generated by Macfarlane 
Group	avoids	landfill	and	is	re-used	
or recycled, contributing to a 
circular economy.

•   We will remove half a tonne of 
paper from Macfarlane Group 
warehouse operations by the end 
of 2022. This will be achieved by 
introducing a digital iWMS system 
across	at	least	five	sites	during	
2022 alone.

•	 	By	the	end	of	2024,	the	head	office	
in Coventry will use 75% less paper 
compared to 2020. Processes will 
be gradually digitised to reduce 
paper consumption.

•   100% of Group sites will be FSC® 
certified	(FSC® – C149407) by the 
end of 2025. This gives us the 
ability to source all paper and 
timber products from sustainably 
managed forestry. Currently 27 
sites	are	FSC	certified.

•   We aim to have 100% of our energy 
coming from renewable sources 
by 2025, and are committed to 
reducing our overall energy usage.

They can be recycled up to seven 
times and are compostable at end of 
life. We will do this by ensuring better 
packaging design and sourcing. Our 
initiatives and goals include: 

•   By 2025 at least 90% of products 

will contain recycled content.

•   By 2025 at least 90% of products 

will be recyclable.

•   We are committed to applying  
clear and consistent recycling 
instructions on any own-brand 
packaging we supply, to support 
end-user recycling.

Closing the loop through better 
design and sourcing 

Why it matters 
Packaging is an essential component 
to most supply chains to ensure 
products arrive at their destination 
safely and intact to prevent the need 
for multiple trips. However, it is 
important that this packaging uses the 
minimum amount of materials and that 
these are as recyclable and contain  
as much recycled content as feasible 
whilst still performing as required.

What we are doing about it 
Macfarlane Group is committed to 
helping create a circular economy. 
This is helped by our primary focus on 
corrugated paper products, which are 
intrinsically environmentally friendly. 

Recycling and recovery rate
100%

95%

90%

85%

80%

75%

70%

65%

60%

55%

50%

Recycling and 
recovery (diversion 
from landfill)

2009

2011

2013

2015

2017

2019

2021

Waste management reporting 2021 
The Group continues to manage waste generated through its activities  
in a legal and environmentally responsible manner. Waste generated at our 
sites	is	segregated	into	differing	waste	streams	and	manufacturing	sites	
continue to re-use material where possible. This includes recent projects 
such as the installation of a CAD (computer aided design) cutting machine 
to	maximise	the	efficient	usage	of	corrugate	and	reduce	waste.	The	overall	
waste tonnages increased in line with full year reporting of acquisitions  
and additional sales within the Group whilst maintaining our waste 
management objectives to deliver a high recycling and recovery rate.

34   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Leading sustainable change  
in protective packaging 

Why it matters 
We recognise our responsibility to 
lead sustainable change in packaging 
distribution through ethical and 
environmentally friendly procurement 
and sourcing. Packaging should be 
designed with consideration of its 
entire lifecycle to help reduce its 
impact on the planet.

What we are doing about it 
•   Macfarlane Group will invest in 
circular design & sustainability 
requirement training for 
procurement colleagues and  
our Innovation Lab teams.

•   Macfarlane Group is committed to 
ethical sourcing – we are a member 
of Sedex, who provide independent 
verification	of	responsible	
operations and ethical sourcing. 

Social
Supporting our customers  
to build a sustainable future

Why it matters 
Our success is dependent on us 
meeting the needs and aspirations of 
our customers and their customers. 
Packaging plays a key part in the 
sustainability goals for businesses, 
with many looking to reduce packaging 
use and minimise material waste. 

What we are doing about it 
The Group works in partnership with its 
customers and suppliers to ensure that 
we provide an expert, independent 
and tailored approach, which takes 
into consideration the impact which 
the products and services we provide 
have on the environment. To measure 
how we are supporting customers and 
continually improving our products 
and services we have put the following 
goals and initiatives in place: 

•   By 2025 we aim for our distribution 
Net Promoter Score to be 60 to 
ensure we are providing world class 
customer satisfaction. 
•   Macfarlane Group aims for 

customer satisfaction scores in  
our annual survey for all divisions  
to remain above 90%. By 2025,  
we aim for this to be 95%. 

The following improvement projects 
will be introduced in 2022 to continue 
to enhance the experience we 
provide to our customers.

•   Microsoft Dynamics will be 

introduced in 2022 as the new 
Macfarlane Packaging CRM system. 
This will allow us to protect and use 
customer	data	more	effectively	to	
make	sure	customers	are	offered	
products and services that 
enhance their experience.
•  I n 2022 we will launch the 
Packaging Optimiser – an 
interactive, customer-facing cost 
and emissions saving tool. The 
tool calculates the impact that 
improved packaging can have  
on a supply chain. It can illustrate 
savings	in	financial	cost,	labour	
time and CO2e reduction and will 
help Macfarlane Group customers 
make informed choices about 
their packaging materials and 
sustainability.

•   100% of front-line distribution 

sales	staff	will	be	trained	in	2022	
to use the Macfarlane Packaging 
Optimiser so they can help 
customers make informed 
choices about sustainability  
and packaging.

 •   In 2022 we will introduce a 

Microsoft Customer Voice to  
help provide better customer 
experience – the software will 
allow us to analyse and track 
real-time customer feedback to 
improve the overall experience  
we provide to customers.

Net Promoter Score/customer satisfaction

NPS
Annual customer satisfaction score

2021

48
91%

2020

53
91%

Commentary 
In 2021 the team has been focussed on meeting the needs  
of our customers in an unprecedented environment including 
global supply chain challenges and material price increases. 

35

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Sustainability report
(continued)

Investing in the community  
we serve 
Why it matters 
Engaging with the community and its 
stakeholders is more than providing 
financial	support.	Macfarlane	Group	
believes that understanding the 
communities within which we operate 
allows us to serve our people and 
stakeholders in these local areas 
better and more sustainably. To 
support our approach, we give our 
employees the opportunity to get 
involved in community projects, 
including fundraising, and supporting 
charity initiatives throughout the year.

What we are doing about it 
Macfarlane Group has several 
initiatives aimed at supporting the 
communities we serve, including: 

•   We will support our colleagues in 
raising funds for charitable causes 
alongside our own pro-active 
fundraising.

•   Our colleagues have the 

opportunity to spend at least one 
day per year volunteering through 
our community engagement 
scheme.

Protecting our colleagues  
and culture 
Why it matters 
Our	colleagues	make	the	difference	
in our business. The value added by 
each individual ensures Macfarlane 
Group continues to grow and 
remain successful. By enabling, 
encouraging, and empowering our 
people whilst striving for an inclusive 
culture where colleagues have the 
confidence	to	be	themselves,	
Macfarlane Group is aiming to 
create a culture where everyone  
can achieve their full potential.

What we are doing about it 
Macfarlane Group has a wide range 
of initiatives that help to protect and 
develop our colleagues and culture: 

•   We protect the wellbeing of our 
colleagues now and in the future 
through assistance programmes. 
This includes independent 
specialised counselling; Health  
& Wellbeing 24 hour support line 

and	on-line	portal	and	fully	qualified	
Mental Health First Aiders. There is 
also dedicated support on issues 
relating to Covid-19.

seek to inform, engage and inspire 
individuals on matters of potential 
interest to them alongside wider 
business performance.

•   We aim to increase employee 

engagement and employee voice 
through our colleague surveys, 
colleague focus groups and forums.
•   We aim to increase the awareness 
of Diversity, Equity and Inclusion 
(DEI) through mandatory training 
for colleagues in leadership roles  
in 2022.

•   100% of managers will have full  
DEI training by the end of 2022.
•   Each site will have a DEI champion 

by 2023.

Employee development 
Macfarlane Group believes that  
each employee should be provided 
with the opportunity to realise  
their potential. Through several 
mechanisms, including Career 
Development Plans, apprenticeship 
schemes and the Macfarlane 
Leadership Programme, we provide  
a platform for personal development 
and career enhancement whilst  
also ensuring, through structured 
training, that employees have the 
correct skills and knowledge to 
effectively	fulfil	their	role.

The	significant	developments	 
in technology within Macfarlane 
Group over the past two years have 
enabled us to enhance virtual training 
programmes, supporting our ability 
to engage all employees in their 
development no matter where they 
are geographically located. The 
Group has provided an average of  
16 hours of training per employee in 
2021, an increase on previous years 
(2020: 10 hours).

Employee engagement 
Our aim as a business is to be an 
inclusive employer of choice. The 
successful engagement of our 
employees is not only critical to us 
achieving this aim but also in ensuring 
the overall success of the business.

Excellent colleague communication 
continues to be a key area of focus. 
We have a framework of internal 
communication channels which  

We encourage the engagement of 
every colleague to ensure the delivery 
of an outstanding service to our 
customers. This is achieved through 
a number of tools including business 
update sessions run by our CEO, 
functional forums, regular structured 
meetings, focus groups, informal 
review meetings and employee 
surveys. These methods, along with 
individual one-to-one discussions, 
provide opportunities for individuals to 
engage in two-way dialogue covering 
topics such as the overall well-being of 
our employees in addition to business 
and personal performance. 

The Group-wide implementation of 
Microsoft Teams has improved the 
level of connectivity across the 
business. Platforms such as this, 
along with tools such as Yammer, will 
enable us, to continue to widen our 
feedback and engagement channels.

Employee well-being 
Inspiring and enabling our colleagues 
to	fulfil	their	potential	starts	with	
supporting their overall well-being. 
We are passionate about creating a 
culture where all our colleagues feel 
able to seek support and have access 
to helpful resources. Throughout the 
year we raised awareness of mental  
ill health and encouraged all our 
colleagues to understand that mental 
health is an issue for everyone.

Guides, support tools and online 
training have been made available  
to all employees with the aim of 
creating a healthy, supportive  
working environment. A full Employee 
Assistance Programme (EAP) is 
available 24 hours a day to all our 
colleagues with Mental Health First 
Aiders available for support in the 
workplace.

As a Group we understand how 
important a healthy home life is to  
an individual’s well-being. Flexible 
working practices, including hybrid 
working, are adopted whenever 

36   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

possible to support the ability  
of employees to manage the 
demands of both work and home.

Diversity 
Throughout Macfarlane Group we 
continue to work to create a more 
diverse and inclusive culture. This  
will in turn improve our performance, 
better	reflect	the	communities	we	
operate within and enhance our 
employee engagement. In support  
of this aim we plan to improve the 
quality of the diversity information  
we gather on our colleagues over  
the next 12 months.

The gender breakdown of Directors, 
Senior Managers and other Group 
employees at the year-end is shown 
in the table below.

Gender Pay Gap 
Macfarlane Group has previously 
reported its Gender Pay Gap 
information for the snapshot  
date 5 April 2020. As with many 
organisations there was an impact  
of furlough on the calculations used 
to produce the data. However, this 
was	not	significant	for	Macfarlane	 
as the number of males and females 
placed on furlough were similar.

The report showed men’s mean hourly 
rate to be 5.9% higher than women’s 
and women’s median hourly rate to 
be 4.6% higher than men. As with 
previous years the median pay gap in 
favour	of	women	is	reflective	of	our	
sales function being predominantly 
female, while the lower earning band 
of employees in production and 
logistics is predominantly male.

These results do however change 
when reviewing the mean pay gap 
information.	This	is	reflective	of	the	
demographics of the Senior Executive 
team and those Printers (typically male) 
employed in Macfarlane Labels as 
skilled professionals, who receive 
competitive basic pay and a full shift 
system,	offering	a	significant	uplift	 
on standard hourly rates.

Macfarlane Group is a progressive 
company operating in a traditionally 
male oriented sector. We continue to 
engage in initiatives that promote a 
career in Logistics and Production to 
those in under-represented groups, 
and our focus on this area will enable 
us to build toward having a more 
diverse organisation in future years.

Macfarlane Group Gender Pay Gap 
information can be found on our 
website (www.macfarlanegroup.com).

Human rights 
Macfarlane Group does not currently 
have	a	specific	human	rights	policy.	
However, it does have a range of 
policies	which	reflect	established	
human rights principles. These include:

•  Equality – We are committed to 

providing equality of opportunity to 
colleagues and potential colleagues.

This applies to recruitment, training, 
career development and promotion, 
regardless of physical ability, gender, 
sexual orientation or gender 
reassignment, pregnancy and 
maternity, race, religious beliefs, age, 
nationality or ethnic origin. Full and fair 
consideration is given to employment 

applications by people with 
disabilities wherever suitable 
opportunities exist, having regard to 
their particular aptitudes and abilities.

Striving to ensure that the work 
environment is free of harassment 
and bullying and that everyone is 
treated with dignity and respect is an 
important aspect of ensuring equal 
opportunities in employment and 
there	is	a	specific	Dignity	at	Work	
Policy, which deals with these issues. 
Where an employee becomes 
disabled,	every	effort	is	made	to	
ensure that their employment with 
the Group continues and that 
appropriate adjustments are made. 
Disabled employees receive equal 
opportunities regarding selection 
for training, career development 
and promotion. 

•   Engagement – the Group 

recognises the importance of 
meaningful communication and 
consultation in maintaining good 
employee relations. This is 
achieved through formal and 
informal meetings across all 
business units. 

•   Anti-bribery and corruption –  
the Group has an anti-bribery  
and corruption policy, which is 
supplemented by a gift register 
and an associated policy on 
accepting gifts. This was 
externally reviewed in 2020. 

Diversity

Directors
Senior Managers
All other employees

2021

2020

Male

6
14
677

Female

1
8
351

Male

6
11
547

Female

1
5
285

37

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Sustainability report
(continued)

•   Whistleblowing policy – there is 

•   Introduced a New Driver and 

provision for employees to use an 
independent service if they are not 
comfortable speaking to anyone 
within the Group about any matters 
which give them concern. This 
service is promoted throughout 
the Group. This provision was 
extended during 2020 to include  
a	specific	support	line	linked	to	
Covid-19 and the Health & Safety 
of every stakeholder.

•   Modern Slavery Act – each year, 

the Group make a statement under 
the Modern Slavery Act which is 
supported by internal procedures 
to ensure that the principles of 
the act are adhered to.

The statement is  
available on the website  
(www.macfarlanegroup.com). 

No material breaches of the above 
policies were noted during 2021,  
nor	were	any	matters	of	significant	
concern reported through our 
whistleblowing service.

Health & Safety 
Macfarlane Group continues to 
adopt a risk-based approach to our 
Health & Safety programme. This 
ensures that resources are directed 
in	the	most	efficient	and	effective	
way possible.

In 2021 we:

•   Invested in a new Health and 
Safety Management System  
(SHE Assure Software) – to assist 
with the reporting of Leading and 
Trailing Indicators and ensuring 
improvement actions created  
are tracked and implemented.
•   Added a new Regional Health and 
Safety Advisor to the existing team 
– to help drive operational safety 
compliance, deliver training, and 
help achieve our strategy.

•   Reviewed and developed Policies 
and Procedures around Covid-19 
– ensuring our workplaces  
remain safe.

In 2022, our aim is to continue the 
journey towards zero harm by raising 
our standards and expectations. This 
includes implementing a positive 
safety culture throughout the Group 
using continuous improvement 
methodology. We aim to drive this 
process through:

•   Continued implementation and 
integration of Health & Safety 
Management System Software 
(Evotix) to identify any areas of 
concern, learnings and trends. We 
will use this information to drive 
improvement in our Health and 
Safety Culture.

•   Implementing a programme of 

behavioural safety to drive further 
focus and improvement.

•   Encouraging and promoting good 

working practices.

•   Accident investigation and root 

cause training.

•   Analysis of all incidents, accidents, 
an d high potential near misses.
•   New enhanced Operational Safety 
Audits to be conducted using the 
Evotix Software.

Warehouse employee SOP (Safe 
Operating Procedure) – this was 
implemented across the Group  
and will continue moving forward.

•   Continued the integration of 
acquired businesses into our 
Management Systems.

Five reportable incidents occurred  
in 2021 compared to 7 in 2020. All 
reportable incidents are investigated 
thoroughly by our Health & Safety 
team and changes to working 
practices implemented if required. 
We also ensure that training in a 
particular area where incidents  
have arisen is reinforced. 

Slips, trips, and falls are the highest 
cause of reportable incidents and  
we continue to review and improve 
our training and oversight of these 
activities as part of our ongoing 
commitment to the safety of our 
people.

The Accident Frequency Rate  
(‘AFR’) representing the number of 
reportable incidents per 100,000 
person-hours worked is shown below.

Accident Frequency Rate (AFR)

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

Packaging Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

Group 

0.22
0.50

0.28

0.18
1.17

0.45

0.15
0.43

0.23

0.48
1.20

0.73

0.53
0.22

0.43

0.42
1.11

0.64

Group

Linear (Group)

Group AFR
0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

38   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

About this report 
How we have measured  
our carbon emissions 
To measure the carbon emissions 
EcoAct (Atos) has used the main 
requirements of the standard ISO 
14064:2018 Greenhouse gasses – Part 
1,	specifications	with	guidance	at	the	
organisation	level	for	the	quantification	
and reporting of greenhouse gas 
emissions and removals.

In this report, the term Carbon 
emissions not only includes carbon 
dioxide (CO2) but all other greenhouse 
gasses: methane (CH4), nitrous oxide 
(N2O),	hydrofluorocarbons	(HFC),	
perfluorocarbons	(PFC)	and	sulphur	
hexafluoride	(SF6).

Carbon emissions are calculated and 
reported in tonnes of CO2 equivalent 
(tCO2e) following recommended  
best practice.

The carbon footprint calculations  
use published emission factors and 
agreed formulae taken from the UK 
Government Conversion Factors for 
Company Reporting, Department  
for Business, Energy and Industrial 
Strategy (BEIS) 2021 and the 
International Energy Agency 
electricity emissions factors 2020.

Governance 
Board 
Background
•   The Board makes decisions in full 
consideration of their potential 
effect	on	the	environment,	
employees and local communities. 
In 2022 ESG will be embedded as a 
standing item on the Board agenda. 
It is clearly understood that only 
with	a	firm	commitment	to	
sustainability can the Group 
continue	to	grow	and	flourish.

Diversity
•   The Board is fully committed to 

diversity, on the basis that the best 
quality personnel from a range of 
backgrounds can enhance the 
overall quality of our business. This  
is also fully supported across the 
Group. The lack of gender pay gap 
in the organisation is clear evidence 
of this positive approach.

Executive pay
•   Macfarlane Group is proud of its 

prudent and transparent approach 
to Executive Remuneration. 
Further details on this can be found 
in our Directors Remuneration 
Report on pages 46 to 55.

Tax
•   Macfarlane Group takes a highly 

conservative and prudent approach 
to meeting its tax obligations, 
ensuring it pays the right amount  
of tax in a transparent manner. This 
includes no elaborate overseas 
schemes to avoid tax, with the 
appropriate tax paid in all the 
territories in which we operate.

Ethics
•   There are clear policies in place  
to promote strong ethics in the 
business. This is further supported 
by our core value of integrity, 
ensuring that is the basis for our 
key decisions and interactions.

39

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Non-financial information statement

The table below sets out how the Group has 
complied with the Non-Financial Reporting 
Requirements set out in Sections 414C and 414CB  
of the Companies Act 2006. Where these provisions 
do not form part of the Strategic Report, they are 
deemed to be incorporated by cross-reference for 
the purposes of compliance with these sections.

Reporting requirement

Details including the impact on Macfarlane Group including any risks  
in relation to these matters and financial and non-financial KPIs

Business model

Our business model is described on page 8.

Outlook and developments

Main	trends/factors	likely	to	affect	the	future	development,	performance	and	position	 
of the business including KPIs are set out in the Business and Finance reviews and in the 
Sustainability report both within the Strategic review on pages 4 to 40.

Principal risks 

The principal risks, potential adverse impacts and mitigating actions are set out in the 
Principal risks and uncertainties section on pages 20 to 23.

Stakeholder engagement

Employees

The Stakeholder engagement section on pages 24 to 27 includes details summarising how 
Directors have had regard to the need to foster the Company’s and the Group’s business 
relationships	with	all	stakeholders,	and	the	effect	on	the	principal	decisions	taken	by	the	
Group	during	the	financial	year.

The main policies and interactions with our employees are set out in the Business Review  
on pages 10 to 15, Principal risks and uncertainties on pages 20 to 23, the Stakeholder 
engagement section on pages 24 to 27, the Employees section of the Sustainability report  
on pages 35 to 38 and the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 46 to 55.

Environmental matters

Environmental matters are disclosed in the Environmental care section of our Sustainability 
report on pages 32 to 35 and the Stakeholder engagement section on pages 24 to 27.

Financial risk management

Details	of	the	use	of	financial	instruments	and	financial	risk	management	are	set	out	in	the	
Finance review on page 18.

Human rights

Details of our policies in these areas are set out in the Human rights section of our 
Sustainability report on page 37 and the Stakeholder engagement section on page 27.

Social and community matters

Social and community matters are disclosed the Stakeholder engagement section on pages 
24 to 27 and the Sustainability report on pages 35 to 38.

Anti-bribery and corruption  
and whistleblowing

Details of our policies in these areas are set out in the Human rights section of our 
Sustainability report on page 37.

Post year end events

Details	of	important	events	affecting	the	Group	which	have	occurred	since	the	end	of	the	
financial	year	are	included	on	page	117.

Overseas branches

Details of the Group’s overseas branches are included on page 132.

40   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Chairman’s introduction to governance

Macfarlane is a proud company  
which is value-led, and has a 
strong culture of integrity.

There is also a highly transparent 
approach to Executive Remuneration, 
as outlined in our Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 46  
to 55. With regard to provision 38 of 
the Code, the Board has taken action 
to ensure that, by the beginning of 
2023, our executive pensions will be 
in line with the wider workforce. A full 
version of the Code can be found on 
the Financial Reporting Council’s 
website www.frc.co.uk.

Sustainability
As the leading packaging distributor in 
the UK, we have a vital role to play in the 
sustainability of our products and in the 
circular economy. The Board places 
great emphasis on this and other 
Environmental, Social and Governance 
(‘ESG’) matters, with ESG now a 
standing item on the Board agenda.  
I am pleased that in 2021 the Board 
approved	the	leasing	of	five	electric	
trucks as part of a wider rollout planned 
across	the	Group’s	distribution	fleet,	
demonstrating our commitment to 
reducing our carbon footprint. I would 
also highlight our target to reduce  
the carbon footprint of our CO2 per 
tonnage of sold items by 30% by 2030. 

Stuart R. Paterson 
Chairman

24 February 2022

Dear shareholder,

I am pleased to present the Group’s 
Corporate Governance Report for the 
year ended 31 December 2021. The 
business aims to apply and maintain 
the highest standards of Corporate 
Governance,	offering	a	strong	
framework that delivers and protects 
value for all our stakeholders. Further 
detail on how we engage with our 
stakeholders, as per s172 of the 
Companies Act 2006, can be found 
on pages 24 to 27. A recent example 
of this comes with our triennial  
review of remuneration policy,  
where we consulted with our largest 
shareholders. This will be submitted  
to shareholders for consideration at 
the Macfarlane AGM in 10 May 2022, 
with details found on pages 56 to 62.

Board effectiveness
The Board undertakes a performance 
evaluation each year to ensure that the 
Board and its underlying Committees 
are	operating	effectively.	Details	of	
this evaluation are covered within  
the Corporate Governance Report. 
The	findings	confirm	that	the	Board	
has the right balance of skills, 
experience, knowledge and 
independence, further reinforced  
by the appointment of Aleen 
Gulvanessian on 1 October 2021. 

Compliance with the UK  
Corporate Governance Code
The	Board	confirms	that,	during	
2021, the Group has complied with 
the provisions of the Corporate 
Governance Code (the ‘Code’). There 
is a culture of integrity on the Board, 
which underpins our transparent 
approach with our key stakeholders. 

41

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Board of Directors

Stuart Paterson
Chairman
Stuart joined the Board on 1 January 
2013 as a Non-executive Director, 
becoming Chairman on 29 September 
2017. He is a Chartered Accountant and 
was	Chief	Financial	Officer	at	Forth	
Ports Limited until he retired in January 
2018. He joined Forth Ports in March 
2011 when it was listed on the London 
Stock Exchange and the company  
was subsequently acquired by Arcus 
Infrastructure Partners in 2011. Prior  
to this role, Stuart was Chief Financial 
Officer	of	Johnston	Press	PLC	from	
2001 to 2010 and previously worked in 
senior	financial	management	roles	at	
Motorola Corporation, and as Group 
Finance Director and then Managing 
Director Europe for Aggreko PLC. 
Stuart joined Angel Trains Group 
Limited as a non-executive Director in 
September 2019 and chairs the Audit & 
Risk Committee. He is also a trustee of 
the Royal Yacht Britannia and a member 
of their Audit, Risk and Remuneration 
Committees. He also served as a 
non-executive Director with Devro PLC 
from 2006 to 2012, chairing the Audit 
Committee. He chairs the Nominations 
Committee and is a member of the 
Remuneration Committee.

Peter Atkinson
Chief Executive
Peter joined Macfarlane Group as Chief 
Executive in October 2003. He has a 
strong sales and marketing background 
through his career at Procter & Gamble 
and S.C. Johnson. Peter also has 
significant	general	management	
experience gained during his time at 
GKN PLC and its joint venture partners 
where he worked from 1988 to 2001 in a 
number of senior executive roles in their 
business-to-business operations. He 
has a successful track record of both 
business turnarounds and business 
development with extensive exposure 
to international business, having worked 
in the UK, Europe and the USA.

Ivor Gray
Finance Director 
Ivor is a member of The Institute of 
Chartered Accountants of Scotland  
and has been with the Group since  
1996. He was appointed as a Director on 
19 November 2020 and became Finance 
Director on 1 January 2021. Ivor has been 
on the Executive Committee since 2005 
and was the Group’s Company Secretary 
from 15 May 2020 to 31 December 2020. 
He was with KPMG LLP for six years 
before joining Macfarlane Group in 1996.

Bob McLellan
Non-executive Director and  
Senior Independent Director
Bob joined the Board on 5 March 2013. 
He was Chief Executive of DS Smith 
Packaging UK until 2011, latterly as 
Deputy CEO Packaging (UK and 
Continental Europe). Bob has spent many 
years working in the packaging sector 
and has held leading roles in both the  
UK and Continental Europe for industry 
employer associations. He is currently 
Chairman of the Logson Group and a 
non-executive director of Swanline Print 
Limited. Bob chaired the Remuneration 
Committee until 31 August 2018 when  
he was appointed as the Group’s Senior 
Independent Director. He is a member  
of the Nominations, Remuneration and 
Audit Committees.

James Baird
Non-executive Director
James joined the Board on 8 January 
2018. James previously led the Scotland 
and Northern Ireland business of Deloitte, 
before becoming Managing Partner of its 
Audit & Risk Advisory division and Chief 
Operating	Officer,	both	in	Switzerland.	 
An experienced auditor and advisor who 
has worked with companies in the UK  
and Europe across a range of industries, 
he is currently an Honorary Professor  
at Glasgow University’s Adam Smith 
Business School, a trustee of RS 
Macdonald Charitable Trust and a 
member of the Advisory Council of 
Rainforest Trust UK. James was appointed 
as chair of the Audit Committee on his 
appointment on 8 January 2018 and is a 
member of both the Remuneration and 
Nominations Committees.

Aleen Gulvanessian
Non-executive Director
Aleen joined the Board on 1 October 
2021. Aleen was a corporate partner at 
Eversheds Sutherland for 30 years before 
stepping down in May 2019 to become a 
Consultant on Boards and Governance 
matters. Aleen is an experienced 
corporate lawyer who has advised private 
and quoted UK companies (including 
cross border transactions) across a range 
of sectors. Her areas of focus have been 
mergers and acquisitions, joint ventures, 
corporate	finance	transactions	and	
reorganisations, as well as general 
boardroom and governance advice for 
quoted companies. Aleen is a member  
of the Governance Committee of the 
Institute of Chartered Accountants in 
England and Wales, to which she was 
appointed in June 2019.

James Macdonald
Company Secretary 
James joined Macfarlane Group in 
October 2020, becoming Company 
Secretary on 1 January 2021. He 
previously worked for The Weir  
Group PLC, after undertaking his 
accountancy training at PwC. He is a 
member of the Institute of Chartered 
Accountants of Scotland. 

42   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Stuart Paterson

Peter Atkinson

Ivor Gray

James Baird

Bob McLellan

Aleen Gulvanessian

James Macdonald

Corporate  
information 

Registration number 
No. SC 004221 
Registered in Scotland

Company Secretary
James Macdonald

Registered office
3 Park Gardens  
Glasgow G3 7YE  
Telephone: 0141 333 9666 
Email: info@macfarlanegroup.com

Principal bankers
Lloyds Banking Group PLC 
110 St. Vincent Street 
Glasgow G2 5ER

Solicitors
CMS Cameron McKenna  
Nabarro Olswang LLP 
1 West Regent Street 
Glasgow G2 1AP

Wright Johnston & Mackenzie LLP 
302 St. Vincent Street 
Glasgow G2 5RZ

Stockbrokers
Shore Capital Stockbrokers Limited 
Cassini House 
57-58 St James’s Street 
London SW1A 1LD

Independent auditor
Deloitte LLP 
110 Queen Street 
Glasgow G1 3BX

Registrars
Equiniti 
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex BN99 6DA

43

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Report of the Directors

The Directors present their annual 
report and the audited financial 
statements of the Group for the 
year ended 31 December 2021. 
Pages 4 to 72 inclusive comprise 
the Directors’ Report, which in 
turn includes the Chairman’s 
Statement and the Strategic 
Report on pages 4 to 40. These 
reports have been drawn up and 
presented in accordance with  
and in reliance upon applicable 
company law and any liability of 
the Directors in connection with 
these reports shall be subject to 
the limitations and restrictions 
provided by such laws. 

Corporate governance
The	information	that	fulfils	the	
requirement of the Corporate 
Governance Statement can be 
found in the Corporate Governance 
Report on pages 41 to 72 (and is 
incorporated into this report by 
reference) with the exception of  
the information referred to in the 
Financial Conduct Authority 
Disclosure and Transparency  
Rules 7.2.6, which is located  
within this report.

Report on greenhouse  
gas emissions
Details of the Group’s emissions 
and policies are contained within  
the Sustainability Report on pages 
31 to 35.

Cautionary statement
The Chairman’s Statement and  
the Strategic Report have been 
prepared to provide additional 
information to members of the 
Company to assess the Group’s 
strategy and the potential for the 
strategy to succeed. They should 
not be relied on by any other party 
or for any other purpose.

This	report	and	the	financial	
statements contain certain 
forward-looking statements  
relating to operations, performance 
and	financial	status.	By	their	nature,	
such statements involve risk and 
uncertainty because they relate  
to events and depend upon 
circumstances that will occur  

in the future. There are a number of 
factors, including both economic and 
business risk factors, which could 
cause actual results or developments 
to	differ	materially	from	those	
expressed or implied by these 
forward-looking statements.

These statements are made by the 
Directors in good faith based on the 
information available to them up to 
the time of their approval of this 
report. Nothing in this report and  
the	financial	statements	should	be	
considered	or	construed	as	a	profit	
forecast for the Group.

Results and dividends
The	Group’s	profit	before	tax	from	
continuing activities was £18,665,000 
(2020 Restated: £12,433,000). This 
resulted	in	a	profit	for	the	year	of	
£12,598,000 (2020: £10,171,000).

The Directors declared an interim 
dividend of 0.87p per share, which 
was paid on 14 October 2021 (2020: 
0.70p	per	share).	The	proposed	final	
dividend of 2.33p per share (2020: 
1.85p per share) is subject to approval 
by shareholders at the AGM in May 
2022 and has not been included as a 
liability	in	these	financial	statements.

Capital structure
The Group funds its operations from 
a number of sources of cash, namely 
operating	cash	flow,	bank	borrowings,	
lease borrowings and shareholders’ 
equity, comprising share capital, 
reserves and retained earnings.  
The Group’s objective is to achieve  
a capital structure that results in  
an appropriate cost of capital whilst 
providing	flexibility	in	immediate	 
and medium-term funding to 
accommodate any material 
investment requirements. All major 
investment	decisions	reflect	capital	
allocations which are designed to 
maintain the Group’s objective.

The Company has one class of 
ordinary share, which carries no  
right	to	fixed	income.	Each	ordinary	
share carries the right to one vote at 
general meetings of the Company. 
There are no restrictions on the size 
of shareholdings nor on the transfer 

of shares. Both are governed by the 
Articles of Association of the Company 
(‘the Articles’) and prevailing legislation. 
The Directors are not aware of any 
agreements between the Company’s 
shareholders that may result in 
restrictions on the transfer of 
securities or on voting rights.

No person has any special rights of 
control over the Company’s share 
capital and all issued shares are fully 
paid. There were no movements in 
the issued share capital during the 
year with details shown in note 19  
to	the	financial	statements.

The Company’s banking facilities 
may, at the discretion of the lender, 
be repayable on a change of control.

The Company is governed by  
the Articles, the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (July 2018) and the 
Companies Act 2006 with regard to 
the appointment and replacement  
of Directors. The Articles may be 
amended by special resolution of  
the shareholders. The powers of  
the Directors are detailed in the 
Corporate Governance report.

The Directors will propose an  
ordinary resolution at the 2022 AGM 
seeking authority to allot shares in 
the Company under section 551  
of the Companies Act 2006 up  
to an aggregate nominal amount  
of £13,151,000.

At the 2021 AGM, the Directors were 
given authority to allot further ordinary 
shares, disapplying any pre-emption 
rights, beyond those committed to the 
share option schemes or long-term 
incentive plans up to an aggregate 
nominal value of £3,945,300, which 
expires at the conclusion of the 2022 
AGM. Resolutions at the 2022 AGM will 
seek to renew for a further year the 
authority over the existing unissued 
and uncommitted ordinary share 
capital of £3,945,300.

The Company made no purchases  
of its own shares during the year and 
no shares were acquired by forfeiture 
or surrender or made subject to a lien 
or charge.

44   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Substantial holdings

Funds managed or advised by Rights & Issues Investment Trust plc
Funds managed by Canaccord Genuity Group Inc.
Funds managed or advised by Blackrock
Funds managed or advised by Charles Stanley
Almadon Limited
Funds managed or advised by Otus Capital Management
Funds managed or advised by BGF Investment Management

Employees and employee  
share schemes
The Company’s policies for employees 
and employee engagement are set out 
in the Sustainability Report on pages  
35 to 38. Option awards are detailed in 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
with those awards outstanding at  
31 December 2021 set out on page 51.

The Remuneration Committee 
supervises the award of long-term 
share	incentives	and	specifies	the	
performance conditions at the time 
of the award, having regard to the 
objectives of the Company and 
market practice at that time. Further 
details are given in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

Substantial holdings of  
shares in the Company
The Company has received 
notification	prior	to	24	February	 
2022 in accordance with Rule 5 of  
the Financial Conduct Authority’s 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules  
of the following voting rights as a 
shareholder of the Company as 
shown in the table above.

Directors
The	names	of	the	Directors	in	office	
at 31 December 2021 together with 
short biographical details, are set out 
on page 42. The Board considers its 
three Non-executive Directors to be 
independent.

All Directors retire by rotation at the 
AGM	in	May	2022	and	offer	themselves	
for re-election. P.D. Atkinson and  
I. Gray have service contracts dated  
6 October 2003 and 23 December 
2020 respectively, with notice periods 
of twelve months. S.R. Paterson  
has a letter of appointment dated  

29 September 2020 with a notice 
period of six months. R. McLellan, J.W.F. 
Baird and A. Gulvanessian each have 
letters of appointment dated 10 March 
2021, 8 January 2021 and 1 October 
2021 respectively for periods of three 
years, with notice periods of three 
months. J. Love served as an Executive 
Director until 31 March 2021 and  
A. Dunstan served as a Non-executive 
Director until 31 August 2021. 

No Director, either during or at the  
end	of	the	financial	year,	had	an	
interest in any contract relating to  
the business of the Company or any 
of its subsidiaries. The statement of 
Directors’ interests in the ordinary 
share capital of Macfarlane Group  
is contained in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on page 51.

There are no agreements between 
the Company and its Directors or 
employees that provide for 
compensation	for	loss	of	office	 
or employment that occurs in the 
event of change of control.

The Company has maintained 
Directors’	and	Officers’	liability	
insurance cover throughout the 
financial	year.	The	Company	has	
made qualifying third-party indemnity 
provisions	for	the	benefit	of	Directors	
which remain in force.

Political donations
It is the Group’s policy not to make 
donations for political purposes. 

Special business
A special resolution will be put to 
shareholders to renew for a further 
year the authority in relation to the 
disapplication of pre-emption rights 
over the existing unissued and 
uncommitted ordinary share capital. 

Number of
 shares held

Percentage

17,250,000
16,636,359
10,498,439
9,773,497
9,015,429
7,984,153
6,985,420

10.9%
10.5%
6.7%
6.2%
5.7%
5.1%
4.4%

This authority is limited to a 
maximum nominal amount of 
£3,945,300, representing 10%  
of the current share capital.

Disclosure of information to auditor
The	Directors	holding	office	at	the	
date of approval of this Directors’ 
report	confirm	that,	so	far	as	they	
are each aware, there is no relevant 
audit information of which the 
Company’s auditor is unaware.  
Each Director has taken all the steps 
that they ought to have taken as a 
Director to make themselves aware 
of any relevant audit information 
and to establish that the Company’s 
auditor is aware of that information. 
This	confirmation	is	given	and	
should be interpreted in accordance 
with the provisions of Section 418  
of the Companies Act 2006.

Independent auditor
A resolution to re-appoint Deloitte 
LLP as the Company’s auditor will 
be proposed at the AGM in 2022.

Company information
The Company is registered in 
Scotland (SC004221) and its 
registered	office	is	at	3	Park	
Gardens, Glasgow, G3 7YE.

Approval
The Strategic Report on pages 4  
to 40 and the Directors’ Report on 
pages 4 to 72 were both approved 
by the Board on 24 February 2022.

James Macdonald
Company Secretary

24 February 2022

45

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Remuneration report

Remuneration Committee Chair’s summary statement

Following my appointment as Chair 
of the Remuneration Committee  
in October 2021, I am pleased to 
present the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report for Macfarlane. 

I would like to thank Andrea Dunstan 
for her work as the previous 
Remuneration Committee Chair.

This Chair’s statement summarises 
the main areas of activity for the 
Remuneration Committee in the year 
and introduces the other sections of 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report, 
which this year comprises:

•  the Annual Report on 

Remuneration, which sets out  
the remuneration arrangements 
and incentive outcomes for the 
year under review and how the 
Remuneration Committee 
intends to implement our Policy  
in 2022; and

•  the Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
which we are seeking to amend 
and update at our 2022 AGM.

Remuneration in 2021 
Group results for 2021 are set out  
in our Strategic Review. We believe 
the	strong	financial	results	in	the	
year	are	appropriately	reflected	in	
the remuneration of our Executive 
Directors, as follows: 

•  Annual bonus outcomes for the 
CEO and CFO 2021 of 100% and 
100% of maximum amounts 
available respectively (being  
50% and 50% of base salary 
respectively).

•  Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’) 

awards were made in March 2021, 
subject to three year EPS growth 
targets, which the Committee 
regards as appropriately stretching. 

No bonus was payable in the period to 
J. Love, who retired on 31 March 2021. 
We have disclosed the performance 
measures for our 2021 annual bonus 
plan on pages 50 and 51.

In 2021 our Board maintained its focus 
on our obligations to our workforce 
and to other stakeholders, and we 
were pleased that Company-wide 
bonuses were at record levels in 2021, 
with 87% of employees receiving  
a bonus. Also, during 2021 we 
maintained full operations without 
the use of public funds – neither the 
government’s furlough scheme nor 
its lending support schemes. 

With regards to the incentive plan 
outcomes for our Executive Directors 
described above, the Remuneration 
Committee reviewed these against 
the backdrop of overall performance 
and the experience of investors and 
other stakeholders over the period 
and the Remuneration Committee is 
satisfied	that	the	total	remuneration	
received by Executive Directors in 
2021	is	a	fair	reflection	of	
performance over the period.

The Remuneration Committee 
exercised what it regards as normal 
commercial judgement in respect of 
Directors’ remuneration throughout 
the year (and in all cases in line with 
the approved remuneration policy) 
including in relation to: 

•  Setting performance metrics for 
normal course annual bonuses  
and LTIPs in the year; and 
•  Confirming	the	outcome	of	

performance metrics for annual 
bonuses and LTIPs in the year. 

TSR since 2003

1,100

There were no other exercises of 
judgement or discretion by the 
Remuneration Committee save  
as detailed in this report.

Remuneration in 2022 and renewal 
of our 3-year Directors’ 
remuneration policy
At Macfarlane we are proud of our 
overall historic approach to executive 
remuneration. As examples of this 
approach:

•  our CEO has been in post since 

October 2003, and for the last 16 
years of that period (starting in 2006), 
our CEO has not received an annual 
salary increase above the level of 
employee annual salary increases 
(2% p.a. in 13 years; 3% p.a. in one 
year and two years of nil increases).

•  the Company’s approach to 
incentive pay for Executive 
Directors has been measured:

	 – 	annual	bonus	maximums	are	50%	
of base salary, but in the past  
10 years before 2021, in no year 
was a bonus paid above 60% of 
maximum – equivalent to 30% of 
base salary (in 6 of those 10 years, 
bonuses have been between 40% 
and 60% of maximum levels); 
	 – 	the	Company	operates	a	shares	

based LTIP (annual award over 
shares worth 100% of base 
salary). Annual awards under this 
plan commenced only in 2019.

)
0
0
1
t
a
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
(
n
r
u
t
e
r
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
s

l

l

a
t
o
T

1,000

900

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

3
0
0
2

4
0
0
2

5
0
0
2

6
0
0
2

7
0
0
2

8
0
0
2

9
0
0
2

0
1
0
2

1
1
0
2

2
1
0
2

3
1
0
2

4
1
0
2

5
1
0
2

6
1
0
2

7
1
0
2

8
1
0
2

9
1
0
2

0
2
0
2

1
2
0
2

46   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
 
 
 
 
At the same time, the Company has 
experienced	significant	and	positive	
growth, both in terms of sales and 
profits	over	a	sustained	period	and	 
in the complexity and size of the 
organisation. As a wider context, the 
chart below shows Macfarlane’s TSR 
performance from October 2003, 
being the month in which our current 
CEO, Peter Atkinson, was appointed 
to the role.

Against this background, and as 2022 
is a year in which we must renew our 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy at our 
AGM, the Remuneration Committee 
considered that it is appropriate to 
review our current remuneration 
packages for Executive Directors and 
specifically	our	CEO	to	ensure	that	we	
protect shareholders’ best interests by:

•  paying our CEO appropriately to 
reflect	the	performance	being	
delivered at Macfarlane and to 
ensure his continued retention.
•  retaining	the	balance	between	fixed	
pay and incentive opportunities 
that has served the Company  
well to date and supported our 
long-term growth.

Also, as we explained above, with 
employee-level	salary	inflation	
increases being applied from 2006 
for our CEO, at no time in that period 
has the Company’s Remuneration 
Committee sought to recognise  
the performance and progression 
delivered under Peter Atkinson’s 
leadership	by	adjusting	his	fixed	pay.	
Overall, we believe there will be clear 
benefits	from	putting	in	place	a	future	
proofed reward policy that is fair, 
aligned to our strategy and culture  
and retains and rewards our Executive 
Directors for delivering superior 
performance for all our stakeholders. 

We have been careful in putting our 
proposals together that they are 
meaningful, but not excessive, and 
appropriately balanced. Having market 
rates of pay at Macfarlane will also 
make us more resilient as a business.

As explained in last year’s annual 
report, our CFO, Ivor Gray, replaced 
our long-standing former CFO John 
Love on John’s retirement, with Ivor 
taking on the CFO role on 1 January 
2021.	As	this	is	Ivor’s	first	CFO	role	 
in a PLC, we set Ivor’s package on 
appointment at a level that could 

allow for appropriate progression 
with	advancement	and	confirmed	
performance in the role. Some 
changes are proposed for Ivor in 
FY2022 on this basis (see below).

Two points in our approach that  
we would particularly wish to 
emphasise are that:

•  all increases to salaries will be 

phased. This will be over two years 
for the CEO and for the CFO the 
period will be determined based on 
continued progression in the role, 
and may be longer than two years.

•  we have consulted with leading 
independent shareholders in 
advance of preparing this new 
policy for approval at the 2022 
AGM and received positive 
support as to the appropriateness 
of the proposals.

The table below summarises  
the Remuneration Committee’s 
proposed revisions to our CEO’s  
and CFO’s packages which are 
reflected	both	in	the	updated	 
policy and in our proposed 
implementation of remuneration  
for 2022 and future years.

Element

Current

Proposed

Comments

Base salary –  
CEO

CEO –  
£369,000

CEO – £435,000

Phased over two years:

• FY2022	£405,000

• FY2023	£435,000

Base salary –  
CFO

CFO –  
£191,000

CFO – £200,550  
in FY2022

CEO – phased increase proposed: second element will  
be	confirmed	following	Remco	review	of	continued	
appropriateness.

Represents a ‘market level’ salary, but not above FTSE 
SmallCap expectations. Important for retention to pay  
the CEO a level of base salary that is consistent with the 
complexity and size of business that Macfarlane has grown  
to under his tenure.

This	is	the	first	re-positioning	of	the	CEO’s	salary	to	 
reflect	market	levels	in	16	years,	and	when	completed	 
the Company’s preference will be to return to having any 
salary	increases	for	our	CEO	at	the	rate	for	firm-wide	 
annual salary reviews.

CFO	–	proposed	increase	of	5%.	Reflects	progression	 
in role since appointment as CFO on 1 January 2021.  
Overall salary remains modest for a CFO at a business  
of Macfarlane’s size, and in future years (dependent on 
continued progression and performance) the Committee 
may seek to make further salary adjustments for the CFO 
which align his salary closer to market levels.

47

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report
(continued)

Element

Current

Proposed

Comments

Pensions

CEO – 25% base salary 
pension contribution 
(reduced to 22% for 
employers’ NICs on  
cash payments)

CFO – 8% from 
appointment

CEO – revised pension 
contributions as follows:

• FY2022	–	15%	

• FY2023	–	8%

CFO – no change

Benefits

Car allowance and private 
medical insurance

Annual  
Bonus

Policy allows for bonus 
maximum at up to 100% 
salary p.a.

In practice, bonuses for 
Executive Directors for 
2021 are at a maximum 
level of 50% of base salary.

Any outcomes earned  
are in cash (no deferral).

Metrics are PBT (40% of 
salary)	and	non-financial	
measures (10% of salary).

No	changes	in	benefits	
provision, although Car 
allowances have been 
reviewed and increased 
modestly	by	£3k	(first	review	
since CEO appointment)

Intending to increase the 
maximum opportunity for 
2022 bonuses for Executive 
Directors to the 100% of base 
salary policy level. This is 
viewed as appropriate and  
not excessive while seeking  
to further incentivise delivery  
of stretching annual 
performance levels.

25% of all bonus outcomes  
for any year will be deferred  
in shares for 2 years (subject  
to £10k value ‘de minimis’ 
threshold for amounts  
being deferred). 

Metrics for FY2022 annual 
bonus intended to be 75% on 
PBT	and	25%	on	non-financial	
measures	(with	non-financial	
measures to include at least 
one ESG metric).

The following disclosure was made in our  
2020 DRR:
“All newly appointed Executive Directors will  
have pension contribution rates consistent  
with other employees. Pension contributions  
for I. Gray, who was appointed Finance Director  
in January 2021, are in line with this new 
requirement. A commitment is also made to  
have P.D. Atkinson’s pension contribution rate 
brought in line with those for other employees  
by 1 January 2023.”

The	proposals	described	in	this	section	reflect	
those commitments.

Represents a ‘market level’ bonus opportunity, 
but not above FTSE SmallCap expectations.

Important that the CEO and CFO are 
incentivised appropriately for retention.

The Remuneration Committee will ensure  
that it maintains its past practice of setting 
challenging targets (across the period of 10 
years to FYE2020, there has never been a 
bonus outcome of greater than 60% of 
maximum opportunity at Macfarlane).

All bonus outcomes at Macfarlane will  
remain subject to an overview test by the 
Remuneration Committee to ensure that they 
are appropriate considering the interests of all 
stakeholders. To date Macfarlane has applied a 
strict ‘PBT threshold as gateway’ term within its 
annual bonus; we may be less formulaic in this 
regard in the future but (as at now) we cannot 
envisage	paying	bonuses	for	non-financial	
measures without also considering both 
financial	and	overall	performance.	

LTIP

Annual Award – 100% 
base salary (and annual 
award limit at 100% base 
salary). Exceptional award 
limit of 200% base salary.

No changes in annual or 
exceptional award limits.

Proposed to maintain 100% 
weighting to EPS metrics  
(but see below).

No changes.

3-year vesting period  
and 2-year post-vesting 
holding period.

2020 and 2021 metrics 
were weighted 100% to 
3-year EPS growth.

48   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Element

Current

Proposed

Comments

Maintains position set out already in 2020  
DRR and implemented since 2021.

Share 
Ownership 
Guidelines

In employment – 100% of 
base salary for Executive 
Directors.

No post-employment 
guideline within the 
policy, but details for  
a post-employment 
guideline	were	confirmed	
in the 2020 DRR.

CEO holding estimated at 
3 times base salary; CFO 
is below this having been 
appointed as a Director  
in November 2020 only.

In employment – no change.

Post-employment – guideline 
of 100% of salary to apply for 
all Executive Directors for a 
1-year period from leaving. 
This will reduce to a 50% of 
salary requirement in the 
second year. 

Applies to shares acquired via 
LTIP awards from 2021 onwards.

Other considerations – Introduction of ESG metrics to variable remuneration at Macfarlane: 

This is seen as particularly relevant for Macfarlane given its business as a packaging company. The Remuneration 
Committee is working with the full Board to identify appropriate metrics that support the business and the interests  
of shareholders for inclusion within annual bonus for 2022. We will continue to work on developing our ESG metrics for 
incentive pay further in coming years. 

We are happy to receive feedback 
from shareholders at any time in 
relation to our remuneration policies 
and hope to receive your support  
for the resolutions to approve this 
Directors’ Remuneration Report and 
the new Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy at the AGM in May 2022. I will 
be available at the AGM to answer  
any questions you may have.

Aleen Gulvanessian 
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

24 February 2022

Format of matters to be approved 
at the 2022 AGM
At the 2022 AGM, shareholders  
will be asked to approve three 
resolutions related to Directors’ 
remuneration matters.

These resolutions are:

•  to approve the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report;

•  to approve the updated Directors’ 

remuneration policy;

•  to approve a new Deferred Bonus 
Plan, related to the changes we  
are making to our policy.

The vote to approve the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report is the normal 
annual advisory vote on such matters. 
If approved by our shareholders, the 
Directors’ remuneration policy will 
apply for a maximum of three years 
from the 2022 AGM and will replace 
the Directors’ remuneration policy 
previously approved at the 2019 AGM.

49

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
 
Remuneration report
(continued)

Annual report on remuneration

The details set out on page 50 to 52 of this report have been audited by Deloitte LLP.

Single total figure of remuneration for each Director

2021

Chairman
S.R. Paterson*
Executive Directors
P.D. Atkinson
I. Gray
J. Love (retired 31 March 2021)
Non-executive Directors
R. McLellan*
J.W.F. Baird*
A.M. Dunstan (to 31 August 2021)
A. Gulvanessian (from 1 October 2021)

Total

2020

Chairman
S.R. Paterson
Executive Directors
P.D. Atkinson
J. Love
I. Gray (appointed 19 November 2020)
Non-executive Directors
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
A.M. Dunstan

Total

Salary 
and fees
£000

Taxable
 benefits
£000

Pension 
costs
£000

Fixed 
pay
£000

Bonus
£000

Variable
 pay
£000

Total 
pay
£000

70

369
191
45

35
35
23
9

777

–

16
8
2

–
–
–
–

–

80
15
11

–
–
–
–

70

465
214
58

35
35
23
9

–

184
96
-

–
–
–
–

–

184
96
-

–
–
–
–

70

649
310
58

35
35
23
9

26

106

909

280

280

1,189

Salary 
and fees
£000

Taxable
	benefits
£000

Pension 
costs
£000

Fixed 
pay
£000

Bonus
£000

Variable
 pay
£000

60

362
179
18

30
30
30

709

–

16
10
1

–
–
–

27

–

79
40
2

–
–
–

121

60

457
229
21

30
30
30

857

–

27
13
1

–
–
–

41

–

27
13
1

–
–
–

41

Total 
pay
£000

60

484
242
22

30
30
30

898

* The increase in Non-executive Directors’ fees reflect the agreed reduction in fees of 25% for six month period in 2020.

Taxable	benefits	relate	to	provision	of	a	Company	car	(or	equivalent	allowance)	and	private	medical	insurance.

Directors’ pension entitlements
P.D. Atkinson receives a cash allowance which equates to 25% of his base salary, but reduced for the related 
employer’s national insurance contributions. 

I.	Gray	is	a	member	of	one	of	the	Group’s	defined	contribution	pension	schemes,	with	an	employer	contribution	 
of 8% of salary, consistent with other employees in that scheme.

Annual bonus for the year ended 31 December 2021
The	2021	annual	bonus	plan	is	based	on	performance	against	financial	targets	and	personal	objectives	as	set	out	 
in	the	Remuneration	Policy	and	is	paid	in	cash	following	Board	approval	of	the	Group	Accounts.	Both	the	financial	
targets	and	personal	objectives	were	satisfied	in	full	and	as	a	result	an	annual	bonus	of	50%	of	salary	will	be	payable	 
to	both	Executive	Directors.	The	original	financial	targets	for	2021	are	shown	below:

Threshold
Target 
Maximum
Actual performance

25% of incentive
50% of incentive
100% of incentive

2021 profit before tax

£13.4m
£14.4m
£15.8m
£17.7m

50   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Actual performance includes both continuing and discontinued operations for 2021.

A bonus of up to 10% of base salary is also payable for achievement of personal performance objectives with nothing 
payable under the personal performance element unless the threshold level of PBT is achieved. As actual PBT 
performance	was	above	the	maximum	target	for	2021,	this	underpin	was	satisfied.

In the year we looked at the following personal objectives and consider them to be achieved:

Peter Atkinson

Ivor Gray

• 	Effective	execution	of	the	growth	by	acquisition	strategy	

• 	Effective	execution	of	the	growth	by	acquisition	strategy	

• 	Complete	and	execute	the	strategic	review	of	the	Labels	

• 	Successful	2021	financial	results	and	shareholder	 

division

feedback as new CFO

• 	Recovery	programme	for	Packaging	Design	&	Manufacture

• 	Improved	working	capital	performance

• 	Succession	planning	in	Packaging	Distribution

• 	Successful	induction	of	new	Group	Financial	Controller/

• 	Successful	induction	of	new	CFO

Company Secretary

The total bonus payable for 2021 to P.D. Atkinson was £184,439 (50% of salary), and I. Gray £95,500 (50% of salary).

Long term incentives for the year ended 31 December 2021
The Company operates a PSP under which shares are awarded which vest subject to performance over a three-year 
period. No outstanding awards were due to vest during 2021. Awards were granted on 26 March 2021 over shares 
worth 100% of salary to each of the Executive Directors (using the three day average market price of 104.42p to the 
last trading day prior to grant). PSP awards are granted in the form of conditional share awards and are subject to EPS 
performance conditions, as shown below.

Grant of PSP Award

Threshold (25%)

Maximum (100%)

Year end target date

2021
2020
2019

7.95p
6.53p
6.77p

9.43p
7.84p
8.12p

31 December 2023
31 December 2022
31 December 2021

Vesting of the awards above will also be subject to an underpin assessment by the Remuneration Committee that  
it	must	be	satisfied	regarding	overall	Group	performance	before	vesting	is	confirmed.	The	awards	are	subject	to	a	
two-year post-vesting holding period.

Awards held at  
1 January 2021

Awards granted 
during the year

Awards exercised 
during the year

Awards lapsed 
during the year

Awards held at  
31 December 2021

P.D. Atkinson
I. Gray

725,795
181,992

346,347
182,921

–
–

–
–

1,072,142
364,913

Payments to past Directors
No payments were made to former Directors in the year. J. Love retired on 31st March 2021, and was paid his normal 
monthly salary until this date. 

Shareholdings	and	share	interests	of	the	Directors	in	office	at	31	December	2021	were	as	set	out	below:

S.R. Paterson
P.D. Atkinson
I. Gray
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
A. Gulvanessian (from 1 October 2021)
J. Love (retired 31 March 2021)
A.M. Dunstan (to 31 August 2021)

2021

2020 (or date of 
appointment if later)

Beneficial

Options

Beneficial

Options

120,000
854,172
66,652
102,819
66,605
–
800,000
10,000

–
1,072,142
364,913
–
–
–
139,822
–

120,000
854,172
66,652
102,819
66,605
–
800,000
10,000

–
725,795
181,992
–
–
–
359,524
–

51

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report
(continued)

All	options	above	are	subject	to	performance	conditions	being	satisfied.	Executive	Directors	are	expected	to	build	up	a	
prescribed level of shareholding equivalent to 100% of base salary. P.D. Atkinson materially exceeds this requirement, 
with shares worth £1,110,424 at 31 December 2021. I. Gray is currently below this requirement given his recent 
appointment as a Director in November 2020, with £86,648.

Options held by P.D. Atkinson and I. Gray are in respect of the PSP awards made in 2019, 2020 and 2021. These are 
unvested and subject to the achievement of performance targets described earlier. 

J. Love, who retired on 31 March 2021, is considered a good leaver and therefore entitled to options pro-rated to his 
date of leaving and subject to performance conditions being achieved.

The share price ranged from 82.60p to 145.00p during 2021. The closing share price on 31 December 2021 was 
130.00p (2020: 87.50p).

The remainder of the Annual report on remuneration is not subject to audit.

Performance graph and table
The graph below shows Macfarlane Group’s performance, measured by Total Shareholder Return, compared with the 
performance of the FTSE All-Share Index for Support Services, and the FTSE All-Share Index for General Industrials, 
also measured by Total Shareholder Return for the period since 1 January 2012. Macfarlane Group is a constituent 
part of the General Industrial Index. The Index for Support Services has also been selected because it includes a 
range of distributor companies, which the Remuneration Committee considers to be the most appropriate 
comparison to Macfarlane Group for this purpose.

Total shareholder return index

1,000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0

Macfarlane Group

FTSE All Share 
General Industrials

FTSE All Share 
Support Services

Source: Thomson 
Reuters

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

CEO single figure

2021
2020
2019
2018
2017
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012

P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson

Fixed 
remuneration
£000

Variable 
remuneration
£000

Single	figure	of	total
 remuneration
£000

Annual variable
 element award vs.
 maximum opportunity

Long term incentive
 vesting against
 maximum opportunity

465
457
449
440
433
424
416
408
400
392

184
27
81
0
81
92
92
* 178
16
70

649
484
530
440
514
516
508
586
416
462

100%
15%
46%
 0%
48%
55%
56%
46%
10%
45%

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0%
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

* This includes £105k in respect of the exercise of options which vested in 2007.

52   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
Percentage change in remuneration of Directors and employees
The following table shows the percentage change in remuneration of the Directors and employees of the business 
between	the	2020	and	2021	financial	years.	

2020/21
Salary/fees
Benefits
Bonus
2019/20
Salary/fees
Benefits
Bonus

Employee
 average

2%
(12%)
296%

2%
(6%)
(30%)

Executive Directors

Non-executive Directors

P.D. Atkinson

I. Gray

S.R. Paterson

J.W.F. Baird

R. McLellan A. Gulvanessian

2%
0%

2%
27%
580% 7,188%**

2%
–
–

2%
–
–

2%
–
–

2%
1%
(67%)

2%
–
–

(11%)*
–
–

(11%)*
–
–

(11%)*
–
–

–
–
–

–
–
–

*	 Reduction	in	Non-executive	Directors’	fees	reflect	the	agreed	reduction	in	fees	of	25%	for	six	month	period	in	2020.

**  I. Gray became an Executive Director in November 2020, therefore the bonus payable in 2020 was for one month of service, capped at 7.5%.

The legal requirement is only to provide details of employees of the parent company, Macfarlane Group PLC. 
However we have decided to voluntarily disclose the comparison in respect of details for all Group employees. 

Relative importance of spend on pay
The change in remuneration for all employees compared to dividends to shareholders is shown below:

Total employee pay
Dividend

2021
£000 

38,985
4,293

2020
£000

30,124
1,105

Change

29%
289%* 

*  The decision to cancel the 2020 year-end dividend payable in June 2020 to preserve cash at the commencement of the Covid-19 pandemic is the principal reason for the major increase in 

dividends from 2020 to 2021.

CEO to employee pay ratio
The table below shows the ratio of total CEO remuneration to that of the lower quartile, median and upper quartile 
paid employee.

Financial year

Method

2021

2020

2019

Option B

Option B

Option B

25th percentile
 pay ratio

50th percentile 
pay ratio

75th percentile
 pay ratio

31.4:1

23.1:1

24.6:1

24.0:1

17.8 :1

18.9:1

17.5:1

14.9 :1

16.4:1

Notes to CEO to employee pay ratio
Option B, using the gender pay gap reporting data to identify the individuals who represent the three quartiles, was 
chosen as the methodology as this data was readily available on a Group-wide basis and is consistent with 2020.

Total remuneration for the CEO and for the individuals who represent the three quartiles was determined for the year 
to 31 December 2021. The three individuals are all full-time employees and are considered to be representative of the 
25th percentile, median and 75th percentile pay levels in the Group.

Median	pay	ratios	are	reflective	of	Macfarlane	Group’s	policy	of	not	paying	excessive	salaries	to	Executive	Directors.	
No PSP awards vested in either year, which resulted in a lower ratio than would otherwise have been the case. Total 
CEO remuneration was higher for 2021 compared to 2020 due to the CEO receiving an annual bonus for 2021 
whereas	for	2020	annual	bonus	for	all	staff	(including	the	CEO)	was	capped	at	7.5%	of	base	salary.

The	table	below	shows	the	total	pay	and	benefits	and	the	salary	component	of	total	pay	for	the	three	quartiles.

Financial year

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Salary	component	of	total	pay	and	benefits

Total	pay	and	benefits

2021

£19,464

£24,480

£33,441

£20,683

£27,063

£39,966

53

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report
(continued)

Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2022
As is more fully explained in the Remuneration Committee Chair’s summary statement introducing the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report, salaries for P.D. Atkinson and I. Gray at 1 January 2022 increased by 10% and 5% to £405,000 
and £200,550 respectively. 

P.D. Atkinson’s pension contribution will reduce from 25% to 15% in 2022, in line with a phased reduction to the level 
of other employees by 2023. 

Executive Directors will be eligible to receive an annual bonus of up to 100% of base salary (2021: 50%), with 75% of salary 
based on PBT targets and 25% of salary based on personal objectives. 25% of the bonus will also be deferred, payable 
in shares, subject to a de minimis of £10,000. If the PBT threshold target is not achieved, payment of any element of 
the annual bonus is only payable at the discretion of the committee. The precise PBT targets for 2022 are considered 
by the Board to be commercially sensitive. The nature of the targets includes continuing the business on its growth 
journey both organically and through targeted acquisition of quality protective packaging businesses. The main focus 
of	the	personal	objectives	are	business	growth;	leadership	development,	ESG	and	executing	effective	acquisitions.

Benefits	will	operate	in	an	unchanged	way	from	2021,	except	that	car	allowance	has	been	increased	by	£3,000	p.a.	 
for	P.	D.	Atkinson	(this	benefit	has	not	been	increased	since	2003).

The Remuneration Committee intends to make awards under the PSP based on the following principles:

•  An annual award over shares with a face value of up to 100% of salary (within the existing limit);
•  A	fixed	three-year	performance	period	(with	no	re-testing);
•  A two-year post-vesting holding period; and
•  A performance condition based on earnings per share performance with a 25% threshold level for vesting and 
subject	also	to	an	‘underpin’	assessment	by	the	Remuneration	Committee	that	it	must	be	satisfied	regarding	
overall	Group	performance	before	vesting	is	confirmed.

The precise targets will be set by the Committee at the time of the award and will be disclosed in next year’s Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

Details of the Remuneration Committee, advisers to the Committee and their fees
The Remuneration Committee currently comprises three independent Non-executive Directors and the Company 
Chairman. Details of the Directors who were members of the Committee during the year are disclosed on page 42. 
During the year under review, the Committee, where appropriate, sought advice and assistance from the Executive 
Directors in connection with carrying out its duties. The Company Secretary acts as the secretary to the Committee.

The Remuneration Committee used the services of FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP to advise on certain aspects 
of remuneration during 2021 and fees of £16,713 (2020: £11,000) were charged during the year for that advice. FIT’s 
fees	were	charged	on	the	basis	of	that	firm’s	standard	terms	of	business	for	advice	provided.	The	Directors	consider	
FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP to be independent of the Group and objective in their advice. FIT were appointed 
to advise the Committee in 2016 following a competitive tender process. FIT is a signatory to the Remuneration 
Consultants Group’s Code of Conduct.

Remuneration Committee’s reporting obligations
The Remuneration Committee considered its obligations under the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code and 
concluded that:

•  The Directors’ Remuneration Policy, to be approved by shareholders in May 2022, and our implementation of the 
Policy (including the use of PBT and personal performance measures for the annual bonus and EPS performance 
measures for the PSP) support the Company’s strategy.

•  The	use	of	PBT	and	EPS	measures	reflect	the	Company’s	focus	on	growing	profits	and	our	aims	of	motivating	 
the	Executive	Directors	to	achieve	a	level	of	profitability	that	supports	the	Company	paying	an	attractive	level	 
of	dividend,	balanced	against	the	need	to	retain	funds	in	the	business	to	finance	growth,	make	pension	scheme	
contributions, fund acquisitions and meet capital expenditure requirements.

•  Remuneration for the Executive Directors remains appropriate and consistent with our policy of not paying 
excessive salaries. The Remuneration Policy operated as intended, rewarding executives for an excellent 
performance in 2021. 

54   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

In addition, the Committee addressed the six factors outlined in Provision 40 of the 2018 Code when determining  
the Executive Directors’ remuneration.

•  Clarity – Our Remuneration Policy is well understood by the Executive Directors and by those of our major 

independent shareholders, with whom we engaged with regards to the proposed amendments to our policy in 2022.

•  Simplicity – The Remuneration Committee is conscious that overly complex remuneration structures are less 

impactful than simple structures and has strived to keep Executive Directors’ pay as simple as possible, whilst also 
offering	a	competitive	remuneration	package.

•  Risk – Our Policy has been designed to ensure that it does not promote excessive risk taking (for example, the annual 
bonus and PSP operate on sliding performance scales, rather than relying on binary performance targets) and 
prevents	‘payment	for	failure’	through	modest	fixed	remuneration	and	the	use	of	stretching	financial	performance	
targets. The PSP, which forms the majority of variable pay opportunity, is delivered in shares which vest after three 
years, with a further two-year holding period, ensuring a link to sustained, long-term performance. Malus and 
clawback apply to both the annual bonus and the PSP.

•  Predictability – Incentive plans for Executive Directors are subject to individual and overall caps, ensuring that the 
Remuneration Committee has control over levels of reward. The weighting of variable pay opportunity towards the 
PSP means that actual pay outcomes are highly aligned to the experience of shareholders.

•  Proportionality	–	All	pay	levels	are	appropriately	proportionate,	not	excessive	and	reflect	Macfarlane	Group’s	

outlook	and	culture.	Executive	Directors’	fixed	remuneration	is	set,	after	consideration	of	performance	external	
benchmarks,	at	a	level	that	is	competitive	but	affordable	for	the	Group,	with	variable	pay	linked	to	the	achievement	
of stretching performance targets.

•  Alignment to culture – The performance targets which are used to measure both the annual bonus and the PSP 
are stretching, consistent with Macfarlane Group’s performance-led culture. We do not believe that variable pay 
should be paid for poor performance and have a long track record of setting robust performance targets.

The	Remuneration	Committee	receives	a	report	on	pay	and	benefits	across	the	Company	which	it	considers	when	
setting remuneration for Executive Directors. While employees are not directly consulted when setting Executive 
Directors’ remuneration, Aleen Gulvanessian acts as designated Non-executive Director for employee engagement 
in addition to her role as Remuneration Committee Chair, and so the Remuneration Committee is fully updated on 
any views on remuneration which arise from the engagement process.

Whenever the Board has engaged with shareholders during the year, it has received generally positive feedback, 
including on remuneration matters.

Statement of voting at the Annual General Meeting on 11 May 2021
The Directors’ Remuneration Report received the following votes from shareholders.

For
Against

Total votes cast (for or against)

Votes withheld

Total

Total number
 of votes

% votes cast

68,018,921
40,674

99.94%
0.06%

68,059,595

100.00%

–

68,059,595

Votes received on 11 May 2021 (including votes withheld) amounted to 43.13% of the issued share capital.

Statement of voting at the Annual General Meeting on 14 May 2019
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy received the following votes from shareholders.

For
Against

Total votes cast (for or against)

Votes withheld

Total

Total number
 of votes

% votes cast

58,469,089
 5,101,010

91.98%
 8.02%

63,570,099

100.00%

 49,207

63,619,306

Votes received on 14 May 2019 (including votes withheld) amounted to 40.38% of the issued share capital.

55

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report
(continued)

Directors’ remuneration policy

This part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report sets out the proposed Directors’ remuneration policy for the 
Company. This Remuneration Policy will be put to a binding shareholder vote at the 2022 AGM on 10 May 2022 and 
will	take	formal	effect	from	that	date,	subject	to	shareholder	approval.	The	Remuneration	Policy	will	formally	apply	 
for three years beginning on the date of approval unless a new policy is presented to shareholders in the interim. 
Following approval, all payments to Directors will be consistent with the approved Remuneration Policy.

The Remuneration Policy will replace the prior policy approved by shareholders at the 2019 AGM held on 14 May 2019. 
The main changes from the prior policy are summarised below:

•  Pensions – all Executive Directors to move to an employee aligned 8% pension contribution rate by 1 January 2023.
•  Annual bonus
	 – 	maximum	opportunity	within	the	policy	period	unchanged	at	100%	of	salary	per	annum	maximum	bonus,	 

but this will now be the operational level of maximum bonus also (previously 50% of base salary)

	 – 	deferral	of	25%	of	bonus	outcomes	in	shares	for	2	years	(subject	to	£10,000	minimum	amount	for	deferral)

Salary (fixed pay) 

Link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

Pay a fair salary commensurate with the individual’s role, responsibilities and experience and  
size and complexity of the business, and having regard to market rates for similar roles in 
comparable companies.

The	Committee	reviews	base	salaries	annually	with	changes	effective	from	1	January.	 
This review takes into account practices elsewhere in the Group. Salary is pensionable.

There is no prescribed maximum salary or maximum rate of increase. The Committee takes  
into consideration the general increase for the broad employee population but on occasion may 
recognise	changes	in	responsibility,	development	in	the	role,	changes	in	the	business	or	specific	
retention issues.

Performance measures

No performance measures apply to payments of base salary, although performance is considered 
in the review processes for setting salary rates as described above.

Retirement benefits (fixed pay)

Link to strategy

Provide competitive pension arrangements to aid recruitment/retention of senior executives.

Operation

Opportunity

The Group pays a pension allowance or contributes to a pension scheme for Executive Directors. 
The	Group’s	legacy	defined	benefit	scheme	has	been	closed	to	new	members	since	2002	and	
the pensionable salary frozen in 2010. Pension contributions for new appointments will be kept 
under review in line with developing market practice.

Company contribution of up to 8% of base salary, consistent with other employees, or equivalent 
cash allowance in lieu with all Executive Directors to move to this level by 1 January 2023. In 2022, 
the CEO’s pension contribution will be 15% of base salary (reduced from 25% in 2021).

Performance measures

n/a

Other benefits (fixed pay)

Link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

Provide	cost	effective	benefits	to	aid	recruitment	and	retention	of	senior	executives	and	to	
support the wellbeing of employees.

Benefits	include	car	allowance	or	Company	car,	private	medical	insurance,	permanent	health	
insurance	and	any	other	such	benefits	as	the	Committee	considers	appropriate.

The	benefits	are	not	subject	to	a	specific	cap	but	represent	a	small	element	of	total	remuneration.	
Costs	to	provide	these	benefits	are	closely	monitored.

Performance measures

n/a

56   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Annual bonus (variable pay)

Link to strategy

Operation

Incentivise	performance	over	a	12	month	period	based	on	the	attainment	of	financial	targets	
and individual performance objectives agreed by the Remuneration Committee.

75%	of	the	bonus	is	paid	in	cash	based	on	the	audited	financial	results	and	the	Committee’s	
assessment of delivery against personal objectives, with the remaining 25% deferred and 
payable in shares as described below (provided that if value to be deferred is £10,000 or less,  
the whole outcome may be paid in cash).

Subject to approval by shareholders, deferral will take place under the Company’s Deferred Bonus 
Share Plan (‘DBSP’). Under the DBSP, awards of shares are made which vest 2 years after these are 
awarded; vesting shares will be forfeited in cases of resignation (other than for ill health, agreed 
retirements or similar cases determined by the Committee) or misconduct. Additional shares 
representing reinvested dividends may be released following the vesting of any DBSP award.

Bonus payments and DBSP awards are subject to malus and clawback provisions for two years 
following the determination of bonus outcomes.

Opportunity

Maximum bonus potential capped at 100% of base salary, with 100% in place for 2022. The annual 
bonus is not pensionable.

Performance measures

Performance	measures	may	be	financial	or	non-financial	and	corporate,	divisional	or	individual	
and in such proportions as the Committee considers appropriate. The annual bonus plan remains 
a discretionary arrangement and the Committee retains a standard power to apply judgement  
to adjust the outcome of the plan for any performance measure (from zero to any cap) should  
it consider that to be appropriate.

A graduated scale of targets is set for each measure, with no pay-out for performance below  
a threshold level of performance, and up to 25% available at threshold.

Long term incentives (variable pay)

Link to strategy

Incentivise delivery of strategic targets and sustained performance over the long-term.

Operation

Conditional awards over shares may be granted each year, which can be earned subject to delivery 
of	performance	goals.	The	performance	conditions	are	for	a	fixed	3	year	period	with	no	re-testing.

Shares acquired pursuant to the vesting of awards (net of shares sold to satisfy any tax liability) 
will be subject to a two-year holding period following the end of the 3-year performance period.

LTIP awards are subject to malus and clawback provisions for 3 years following vesting.

Opportunity

Awards are capped at a maximum of 100% of base salary in normal circumstances (200%  
in exceptional circumstances). 

Performance measures

Conditional	awards	will	vest	based	on	three-year	performance	against	challenging	financial	 
and other targets set and assessed by the Committee in its discretion. The Committee will  
set	such	performance	conditions	on	LTIP	awards	as	it	considers	appropriate	(whether	financial	 
or	non-financial	and	corporate,	divisional	or	individual).

The Committee also has a standard power to apply its judgement to adjust the formulaic outcome 
of any LTIP performance measures (from zero to any cap) should it consider that to be appropriate.

A maximum of 25% of any element vests for achieving the threshold performance target and 
100% for maximum performance.

57

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report
(continued)

Share ownership guidelines

Link to strategy

To further align the interests of Executive Directors with those of shareholders.

Operation

Executive Directors are expected to build up a prescribed level of shareholding.

Minimum shareholding of 100% of base salary for any Executive Director. The Committee reserves 
the power to amend, but not reduce, these levels in future years.

To the extent that the prescribed level has not been reached, Executive Directors will be expected to 
retain a proportion of the shares vesting under the Company’s share plans until the guideline is met. 
Any LTIP performance-vested shares subject to a holding period and any shares subject to DBSP 
awards will be credited for the purpose of the guidelines (discounted for anticipated tax liabilities).

In addition to the in-employment shareholding guideline, Executive Directors will be expected  
to retain the lower of actual shares held at cessation and shares equal to 100% of salary for the 
first	year	post-cessation,	reducing	to	50%	of	salary	for	the	second	year	post-cessation.

This guideline will apply in respect of any vested shares which vest from LTIP and DBSP awards 
granted after the 2021 AGM.

Opportunity

Performance measure

n/a

n/a

Clawback/malus in the annual bonus and long term incentives
As detailed above, provisions are in place for both annual bonus, DBSP awards and LTIP arrangements to operate 
malus and/or clawback in certain exceptional circumstances, including the material misstatement of the Company’s 
results (annual bonus and LTIP), if the assessment of performance on which vesting is based was based on an error 
(LTIP only) or circumstances which would warrant the summary dismissal of the individual, whether or not the 
Company has chosen to do so. The periods for the operation of malus and clawback are either prior to vesting for 
malus (annual bonus; awards under DBSP or LTIP) or for a period after vesting for clawback (2 years from bonus 
determinations for annual bonus; 3 years from vesting for LTIP).

Outstanding obligations
For the avoidance of doubt, in approving this Directors’ Remuneration Policy, authority is given to the Company  
to honour any commitments entered into with current or former Directors prior to the adoption of this Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy (including under a prior policy).

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
There is a periodic employee survey and the Board receives a regular presentation from the Director of Human 
Resources, which includes consideration of the Group’s remuneration policies. As a result, the Remuneration 
Committee	has	not	conducted	a	specific	employee	consultation	exercise	on	the	Directors’	remuneration	policy.

While appropriate benchmarks vary by role, the Company seeks to apply the philosophy behind this policy across the 
Group	as	a	whole.	Where	the	Company’s	pay	policy	for	Directors	differs	from	its	pay	policies	for	groups	of	employees,	
this	reflects	the	appropriate	market	rate	position	and/or	typical	practice	for	the	relevant	roles.	The	Committee	takes	
into account pay levels, bonus opportunity and share awards across the Group when setting the Remuneration Policy.

Consideration of shareholder views
The Committee considers shareholder feedback received as part of any dialogue with shareholders via the Chairman, 
executive management or the Company’s brokers. Where necessary the Remuneration Committee Chair will engage 
pro-actively with leading shareholders as has been done recently in advance of the adoption of the Remuneration 
Policy as proposed for approval at the 2022 AGM. 

Approach to recruitment remuneration
The	Remuneration	Policy	aims	to	facilitate	the	retention	and	recruitment	of	individuals	of	sufficient	calibre	to	lead	 
the	business,	to	execute	the	Group’s	strategy	effectively	and	to	promote	the	long-term	success	of	the	Group	for	the	
benefit	of	shareholders	and	other	stakeholders.	When	appointing	a	new	Executive	Director,	the	Committee	seeks	 
to ensure that arrangements are in the best interests of the Group and to pay at the appropriate level.

The Committee will take into consideration a number of relevant factors, which may include the calibre and experience 
of	the	individual,	the	candidate’s	existing	remuneration	package,	and	the	specific	circumstances	of	the	individual	
including the jurisdiction from which the candidate was recruited.

58   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

When hiring a new Executive Director, the Committee will typically align the remuneration package with the above 
policy. The Committee may include other elements of pay which it considers are appropriate; however, this discretion 
is capped and is subject to the principles and the limits referred to below.

•  New	Executive	Directors	will	be	offered	a	wage	consistent	with,	but	not	necessarily	the	same	as,	existing	appointees,	

reflecting	the	prudent	approach	taken	to	overall	Board	remuneration.	

•  For external and internal appointments, the Committee may agree that the Company will meet appropriate relocation 
and/or incidental expenses (including travel and subsistence) as appropriate and for a period of no more than two 
years following appointment.

•  Annual bonus awards, LTIP awards and pension contributions would not be in excess of the levels stated in the 

policy table above. 

•  Depending	on	the	timing	of	the	appointment,	the	Committee	may	deem	it	appropriate	to	set	different	annual	
bonus	performance	conditions	for	the	first	performance	year	of	appointment.	An	LTIP	award	can	be	made	
following an appointment (assuming the Company is not in a close period). 

•  Where	a	position	is	filled	internally,	any	ongoing	remuneration	obligations	or	outstanding	variable	pay	elements	shall	
be allowed to continue according to the original terms, adjusted as relevant to take into account the appointment.
•  In	addition,	the	Committee	may	offer	additional	cash	and/or	share-based	buyout	awards	when	it	considers	these	 
to be in the best interests of the Company (and therefore shareholders) to take account of remuneration given up 
at the individual’s former employer. This includes the use of buyout awards made under 9.4.2 of the Listing Rules. 
Such	awards	would	represent	a	reasonable	estimate	of	the	value	foregone	and	would	reflect,	as	far	as	possible,	the	
delivery mechanism, time horizons and whether performance requirements are attached to the remuneration 
elements considered in formulating the buyout. Shareholders will be informed of any such payments at the time of 
appointment and/or in the next published Annual Report. However, for the avoidance of doubt, the value of buy-out 
awards is not capped.

•  For the appointment of a new Chairman or Non-executive Director, the fee arrangements would be set in 

accordance with the approved Remuneration Policy.

Service contracts and letters of appointment
Executive service contracts have a standard notice period of 12 months. Executive Directors may accept 
appointments outside the Company provided the Board’s permission is obtained, however the Board may require  
the fees from these appointments to be accounted for to the Company. Neither P.D. Atkinson, nor I. Gray currently 
hold any external appointments.

Chairman and Non-executive Director appointments are made using letters of appointment for periods not 
exceeding three years subject to re-election at the AGM and contain notice periods of six months and three  
months respectively.

Non-executive Director remuneration policy
Chairman

Link to strategy

To	attract	and	retain	a	high-calibre	Chairman	by	offering	a	market	competitive	fee	level.

Operation

Opportunity

The Chairman is paid a single fee for all his responsibilities, which is reviewed periodically by  
the Committee with reference to other comparable companies.

The current fee is £70,310 and is subject to periodic change under this policy. There is no 
maximum fee level.

Non-executive Directors

Link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

To	attract	and	retain	high-calibre	Non-executive	Directors	by	offering	a	market	competitive	 
fee level.

Non-executive Directors are paid a basic fee. Committee Chairs may be paid a supplement  
to	reflect	additional	responsibilities.	Fee	levels	are	reviewed	periodically	by	the	Chairman	and	 
the Executive Directors with reference to other comparable companies.

The current fee is £35,155 and is subject to periodic change under this policy. There are currently 
no supplementary fees paid and there is no maximum fee level.

59

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report
(continued)

Payment for loss of office
The	principles	on	which	the	determination	of	payments	for	loss	of	office	will	be	approached	are	set	out	below:

Payment in lieu of notice

Annual bonus (including 
DBSP)

LTIP

Mitigation

Buy-out awards

Other payments

Policy

The	Company	may	terminate	the	contracts	of	Executive	Directors	with	immediate	effect	with	 
or	without	cause	by	making	a	payment	in	lieu	of	notice	of	salary	and	benefits,	including	pension	
contributions, private medical insurance and life assurance (or a payment equivalent to the cost 
of	such	benefits),	but	excluding	any	bonus.	If	a	payment	in	lieu	of	notice	is	paid	in	instalments,	
such payments will be subject to the principles of mitigation. There are no obligations to make 
payments beyond those disclosed elsewhere in this report.

Normally, no annual bonus will be paid to an Executive Director who has either left the Company 
or is under notice at the time of bonus payment. However, for a ‘good leaver’, some bonus may be 
payable at the discretion of the Committee on an individual basis dependent on a number of factors, 
including the circumstances of the individual’s departure and their contribution to the business 
during the annual bonus period in question. Any annual bonus award amounts paid will normally 
be prorated for time in service during the annual bonus period and will, subject to performance, 
be paid at the usual time (although the Committee retains discretion to pay the annual bonus 
award earlier in appropriate circumstances). Any bonus earned for the year of departure and,  
if relevant, for the prior year may be paid wholly in cash at the discretion of the Committee.

On a change of control, annual bonuses will either continue for the full year or a pro-rata bonus 
may be paid out to the time of completion.

DBSP awards will normally be retained and released at the end of the 2 year vesting period  
if the person is a ‘good leaver’. DBSP awards may also be released early to a good leaver if the 
Committee considers this appropriate. Leaving for reasons of misconduct or resignation (other 
than for ill health, agreed retirements or similar cases determined by the Committee) will 
normally result in forfeiture of DBSP awards.

On a change of control, DBSP awards will normally vest in full at the date of the relevant event, 
subject to rules of the DBSP.

The extent to which any unvested award will vest will be determined in accordance with the rules 
of the LTIP.

Any outstanding awards will ordinarily lapse, however in ‘good leaver’ cases the default treatment 
is that awards will vest subject to the original performance condition and time proration and the 
holding	period	will	normally	continue	to	apply.	For	added	flexibility,	the	LTIP	rules	allow	for	the	
Committee	to	decide	not	to	pro-rate	(or	pro-rate	to	a	different	extent)	if	it	decides	it	is	appropriate	
to do so, and to allow vesting to be triggered at the point of leaving by reference to performance to 
that date, rather than waiting until the end of the performance period if the Committee so decides.

On a change of control, any vesting of awards will be subject to assessment of performance 
against the performance conditions and will normally be pro-rated. 

The Remuneration Committee strongly endorses the principle of mitigating any loss on early 
termination and will seek to reduce the amount payable on termination where it is possible and 
appropriate to do so. The Committee will also take care to ensure that, while meeting its 
contractual obligations, poor performance is not rewarded.

Where a buy-out award is made then the leaver provisions would be determined at the time of  
the award.

The	Group	may	pay	outplacement	and	professional	legal	fees	incurred	by	Executives	in	finalising	
their termination arrangements, where considered appropriate, and may pay any statutory 
entitlements or settle compromise claims in connection with a termination of employment, 
where considered in the best interests of the Company. 

Where	the	Committee	retains	discretion	it	will	be	used	to	provide	flexibility	in	certain	situations,	taking	into	account	
the particular circumstances of the Director’s departure and performance.

60   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Committee discretions
Flexibility, discretion and judgement
The Remuneration Committee operates the annual bonus, DBSP and LTIP according to the rules of each respective 
plan which, consistent with market practice, include discretion in a number of respects in relation to the operation  
of each plan. Discretions include:

•  who participates in the plan, the quantum of an award and/or payment and the timing of awards and/or payments;
•  determining the extent of vesting;
•  treatment of awards and/or payments on a change of control or restructuring of the Group;
•  whether an Executive Director or a senior manager is a good/bad leaver for incentive plan purposes and whether 

the proportion of awards that vest do so at the time of leaving or at the normal vesting date(s); 

•  how and whether an award may be adjusted in certain circumstances (e.g. for a rights issue, a corporate 

restructuring or for special dividends);

•  what the weighting, measures and targets should be for the annual bonus plan and LTIP awards from year to year;
•  the Committee also retains the ability, within the Remuneration Policy, if events occur that cause it to determine that 
the conditions set in relation to an annual bonus plan or a granted LTIP award are no longer appropriate or unable to 
fulfil	their	original	intended	purpose,	to	adjust	targets	and/or	set	different	measures	or	weightings	for	the	applicable	
annual bonus plan and LTIP awards. Any such changes would be explained in the subsequent Directors’ Remuneration 
Report and, if appropriate, be the subject of consultation with the Company’s major shareholders; and

•  the ability to override formulaic outcomes in line with the Remuneration Policy.

All assessments of performance are ultimately subject to the Committee’s judgement. Any discretion exercised,  
and the rationale, will be disclosed in the annual remuneration report.

Illustration of the application of the remuneration policy

£1,600

£1,400

£1,200

£1,000

)
0
0
0
£
(
n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r
l

£800

£600

£400

£200

a
t
o

£0T

£1,497
14%

27%

£1,295
31%

Share price growth

Long term incentive

Annual bonus

Total fixed pay

£789
13%
26%

61%

£485
100%

31%

27%

38%

32%

£630

32%

36%
32%

36%

£731

13%
28%

31%
28%

31%

£228
100%

£379
13%
27%
60%

Minimum

Target

Maximum Maximum with 

Minimum

Target

Maximum

50% share 
price growth

Maximum with 
50% share 
price growth

Peter Atkinson

Ivor Gray

61

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
 
Remuneration report
(continued)

The charts on the previous page illustrate how the remuneration policy for the Executive Directors will apply in 2022 
based on the following assumptions:

Minimum

Consists	of	base	salary,	benefits	and	pension.

Base salary is the salary to be paid in 2022.

Benefits	are	an	estimate	of	benefits	to	be	paid	for	the	full	year	in	2022.

Pension is an estimate of the value of pension contributions or cash allowance to be paid in 2022.
£000

Base salary

Benefits

Pension

P. Atkinson

I. Gray

£405

£201

£19

£11

£61

£16

Target

Based on what the Director would receive if performance was ‘on-target’. This includes:

Total	fixed

£485

£228

• Fixed	pay	(as	above)
• A	target	bonus	payout	of	50%	of	salary	(50%	of	maximum)
• 	A	threshold	level	of	vesting	under	the	PSP	(25%	of	maximum,	i.e.	25%	of	salary)	excluding	share	price	

appreciation and dividends

Maximum

Based on what the Director would receive if performance was at ‘maximum’. This includes:

• Fixed	pay	(as	above)
• A	maximum	bonus	payout	of	100%	of	salary
• 	A	maximum	level	of	vesting	under	the	PSP	(100%	of	salary)	excluding	share	price	appreciation	and	dividends

An additional bar is shown, representing the maximum assumptions above and including the impact of 50% share price 
growth over the performance period for the PSP.

62   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Corporate governance

Macfarlane Group is committed  
to the principles of corporate 
governance set out in the Financial 
Reporting Council’s (‘FRC’) UK 
Corporate Governance Code issued 
in 2018 (‘the Code’). The Company’s 
compliance is set out in the narrative 
statement on pages 63 to 71 and 
for Directors’ remuneration in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report  
on pages 46 to 55.

Compliance
The Company fully complied with all 
the Code provisions during 2021. In 
addition to its wider remit under the 
Listing Rules, the Company’s auditor, 
Deloitte LLP, is required to review 
whether the above statement 
reflects	the	Company’s	compliance	
with the provisions of the Code 
specified	for	its	review	by	the	
Financial Conduct Authority’s  
Listing Rules and to report if it  
does	not	reflect	such	compliance.

The Board
The current Board structure is in 
compliance with the Code, requiring 
companies outside the FTSE 350  
to have at least two independent 
Non-executive Directors.

The Board currently comprises  
the Chairman, three independent 
Non-executive Directors and two 
Executive Directors. Directors’ 
names, and biographical details 
illustrating their range of experience 
and	the	benefit	that	each	Director’s	
appointment brings to Macfarlane 
Group, are set out on page 42.

The Directors believe that the Board 
has an appropriate independent 
Non-executive Director complement 
with recent and relevant experience, 
which brings strong, independent 
judgement to the Board’s 

deliberations. The Non-executive 
Directors contribute towards and 
challenge Group strategy as well as 
scrutinising performance in meeting 
agreed objectives and monitoring  
the reporting of performance. They 
satisfy themselves as to the integrity 
of	the	financial	information	and	that	
the	financial	controls,	systems	of	 
risk management and governance 
structure are robust and defensible.

Non-executive Directors have access 
to independent professional advice  
at the Group’s expense, subject to 
certain limits and procedures, when  
it is deemed necessary in order for 
them	to	effectively	fulfil	their	
responsibilities.

Details of Executive Directors’ 
service contracts are given in the 
Directors’ Report with all Executive 
Directors’ service contracts having 
notice periods of one year.

The Company has maintained 
Directors’	and	officers’	liability	
insurance cover throughout the 
financial	year.	The	Company	made	
qualifying third-party indemnity 
provisions	for	the	benefit	of	Directors	
in 2009, and these have remained in 
force throughout 2021 and to the 
time of this report.

The	Board	confirms	that	it	has	
considered and authorised any 
conflicts	or	potential	conflicts	of	
interest in accordance with the 
Group’s existing procedures.

The Chairman’s other commitments 
are shown in his biography on page 
42.	The	Board	is	satisfied	that	 
these do not interfere with the 
performance of Group duties,  
which is based on a commitment  
of approx. 45 days per annum.

The Board considers its  
Non-executive Directors, Bob 
McLellan, James Baird and Aleen 
Gulvanessian, to be independent 
both in character and judgement. 
None of these Directors:

•  Has been an employee of the 

Group	within	the	last	five	years;
•  Has, or has had within the last 

three years, a material business 
relationship with the Group;
•  Receives remuneration other 

than a Director’s fee;

•  Has close family ties with any of 
the Group’s advisers, Directors  
or senior employees;

•  Holds cross-directorships or  
has	significant	links	with	other	
Directors through other 
companies or bodies;
•  Represents	a	significant	

shareholder; or

•  Has served on the Board for  

more than nine years from the 
date	of	their	first	election.

The balance of the Board’s skills and 
experience is kept under regular 
review. The Board’s succession 
plans recognise the need to 
consider wider diversity within the 
Group and in Board composition  
in the medium-term. We are also 
committed to improving the 
sustainability both of our operations 
and	of	the	products	that	we	offer	
our customers. The Board 
recognises that both of these 
objectives	are	to	the	benefit	of	 
all stakeholders of the Group.

63

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate governance
(continued)

The roles of the Chairman  
and Chief Executive
The division of responsibilities 
between the Chairman and the Chief 
Executive	is	very	clearly	defined	and	
has been approved by the Board. The 
Chairman is responsible for running 
the Board, ensuring that all Directors 
receive	sufficient	and	relevant	
information	on	financial,	business	
and corporate issues prior to 
meetings to allow Directors to bring 
independent judgement to bear on 
all issues. The Chairman facilitates 
the	effective	contribution	of	 
Non-executive Directors and 
ensures	effective	communication	
channels with shareholders.

The Chief Executive’s 
responsibilities focus on managing 
the business and implementing  
the Group’s strategy.

Senior Independent Director
Bob McLellan is the Senior 
Independent Director. Shareholders 
may contact him directly if they  
feel their concerns are not being 
addressed and resolved through 
existing mechanisms for investor 
communication.

Re-election of Directors
At each AGM, all Directors fall due  
to	retire	and,	being	eligible,	offer	
themselves for election. Directors’ 
service contracts and letters of 
appointment will be available for 
shareholder review prior to the  
AGM on 10 May 2022.

Subject to the Company’s Articles of 
Association, the Companies Act and 
satisfactory performance evaluation, 
Non-executive Directors are appointed 
for an initial period of three years. 
Before the third and sixth anniversary 
of	the	Non-executive	Director’s	first	
appointment, the Chairman will 
discuss with the Director whether it  
is appropriate for a further three-year 
term to be served. 

Company Secretary
James Macdonald, the Company 
Secretary, is responsible for advising 
the Board through the Chairman on 
all matters relating to corporate 
governance. Under the direction of the 
Chairman, the Company Secretary’s 
responsibilities include ensuring good 
information	flows	within	the	Board	and	
its committees and between executive 
management and Non-executive 
Directors. The Company Secretary 
also facilitates induction and assists 
with professional development for 
the Board. All Directors have access 
to the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary.

The Articles of Association and the 
schedule of matters reserved for the 
Board provide that the appointment 
and removal of the Company Secretary 
is a matter for the Board as a whole.

Board procedures
The Group is controlled by the Board 
of Directors. The Board’s main roles 
are to set the Group’s strategic 
objectives, guide and support 
executive management in achieving 
these objectives, create value for  
and safeguard the interests of all 
shareholders within the appropriate 
legal and regulatory framework.  
The Board met seven (2020: nine) 
times during 2021 and individual 
attendance at those and the Board 
Committee meetings is set out in  
the table on the following page. 

Key members of the management 
team joined the meetings to further 
develop the Board’s understanding  
of the business. In the seven Board 
meetings the Group’s response to 
Covid-19 was reviewed including the 
measures in place to ensure, the 
health and well-being of employees, 
service to customers was being 
maintained	and	the	financial	position	
of the Company was secure.

The Board has a formal schedule  
of matters reserved for its approval. 
The	specific	matters	reserved	for	 
the Board include setting the Group’s 
strategy and approving an annual 
budget, reviewing management 
performance, approving acquisitions, 
divestments and major capital 
expenditure, monitoring returns on 
investment, reviewing the Group’s 
systems of internal control and risk 
management, setting and approving 
ESG objectives and monitoring 
progress and consideration of 
significant	financing	matters.	The	
Board has delegated to executive 
management responsibility for the 
development and recommendation 
of strategic plans, including ESG 
strategy, for consideration by the 
Board, the implementation of the 
strategy and policies of the Group as 
determined by the Board, the delivery 
of	the	operating	and	financial	plan,	
approval of capital expenditure below 
Board authority levels and the 
development and implementation  
of risk management systems.

64   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Board agendas are set by the 
Chairman, who consults with the  
Chief Executive and discusses  
the agendas with the Company 
Secretary. A programme of areas  
for discussion is maintained by the 
Company Secretary to ensure that all 
matters reserved for the Board and 
any other key issues are addressed  
at the appropriate time.

At each meeting, the Directors 
receive management information 
and reports from the Chief Executive 
and the Finance Director which, 
together with other papers, enables 
them to scrutinise the Group and 
management performance against 
agreed objectives. These and other 
regular reports and papers are 
circulated to the Directors in a timely 
manner in preparation for Board and 
Committee meetings and are 
supplemented by information 
specifically	requested	by	the	
Directors from time to time.

Accountability
The Board is responsible for 
presenting a fair, balanced and 
understandable assessment of the 
Group’s position and prospects and 
asks the Audit Committee to consider 
and advise the Board of its view.

The Board considers that the Annual 
Report provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Group’s performance, business 
model and strategy.

The Directors’ Responsibilities 
Statement is set out on page 72.

Going concern
Given	the	significant	disruption	and	
economic uncertainty caused by the 
Covid-19 pandemic, the Directors 
extended their consideration of 
going concern with the review of 
additional scenario analysis as set  
out in the Viability Statement on  
page 19. After making these enquiries, 
the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and 
the Group have adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence 
for at least the next twelve months 
from the date of this report. For this 
reason, they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing the 
financial	statements.

Board and Committee meetings
The number of regular Board and 
Committee meetings attended by 
each member during 2021 is shown  
in the table below.

Professional development
On appointment, all Directors 
complete an induction programme 
designed to give them a thorough 
understanding of the Group and its 
activities. They receive information 
about the Group, the matters 
reserved for the Board, the terms  
of reference and membership of  
the Board Committees, and the 
latest	financial	information.	This	 
is supplemented with visits to key 
locations and meetings with, and 
presentations from, senior 
management.

Board performance evaluation
The Board has established a formal 
process, led by the Chairman, for  
an annual performance evaluation 
of the Board, its Committees and 
individual Directors. All Directors are 
made aware that their performance 
will be subject to regular evaluation. 
The Board has completed a  
self-assessment questionnaire 
developed to take account of the 
areas	identified	in	the	FRC	‘Guidance 
on Board Effectiveness’. This 
includes	specific	reference	to	
strategic objectives and the 
performance and processes of the 
Board and all Board Committees.

Attendance by Directors at Board and Committee meetings during 2021

Board

Audit
 Committee

Remuneration
Committee

Nominations
Committee

Stuart Paterson
Chairman
Peter Atkinson
Chief Executive
Ivor Gray
Finance Director
John Love
Executive Director
Bob McLellan
Senior Independent Director
Non-executive Director
James Baird 
Aleen Gulvanessian Non-executive Director
Non-executive Director
Andrea Dunstan

7 (7)
7 (7)
6 (7)
2 (2)
7 (7)
7 (7)
2 (2)
5 (5)

4 (4)*
–
–
–
4 (4)
4 (4)
1 (1)
3 (3)

3 (3)
–
–
–
3 (3)
3 (3)
1 (1)
2 (2)

Figures in brackets indicate the maximum number of meetings in 2021 for which the individual was a Board or Committee member. Where a Director cannot attend a Board or Committee 
meeting, any comments the Director has on the papers being reviewed at that meeting are relayed in advance for consideration.

* The Chairman attends but is not a member of the Audit Committee.

6 (6)
–
–
–
6 (6)
6 (6)
2 (2)
4 (4)

65

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate governance
(continued)

Results are collated by the 
Company Secretary and reviewed 
to identify areas for improvement 
and	confirm	objectives	for	the	year	
ahead. The Chairman then holds 
individual meetings with each 
Director to review performance  
and set individual objectives.

The Chairman meets with the 
Non-executive Directors during  
the year without the Executive 
Directors present. The three 
Non-executive Directors conduct 
an annual performance evaluation 
of the Chairman.

Relationships with Shareholders
The Group maintains a corporate 
website (www.macfarlanegroup.com) 
containing a wide range of 
information of interest to 
institutional and private investors.

Detailed reviews of the  
performance	and	financial	position	
are included in the Strategic Report 
on pages 4 to 40 of this report.  
The Board uses this, together with 
the Chairman’s Statement on pages 
4 to 7 and the remainder of the 
Report of the Directors, to present 
its assessment of the Company’s 
position and prospects.

The Chairman seeks to maintain a 
regular dialogue with shareholders 
and gives feedback to the Board on 
issues raised. The Group has regular 
discussions with institutional 
shareholders, including meetings 
led by the Chief Executive and the 
Finance Director, following the 
announcement of the annual results 
in February and the interim results  
in August. Individual requests for 
discussions from shareholders  
are considered.

The Board receives feedback on 
shareholder meetings, including 
broker feedback, for the meetings 
scheduled around the results’ 
announcements. The Senior 
Independent Director is available  
to meet with shareholders if they 
have concerns with contact through 
the normal channels of Chairman, 
Chief Executive or Finance Director.

All Directors attend the AGM. All 
shareholders have an opportunity  
to raise questions with members of 
the Board on matters relating to the 
Group’s operations and performance 
during the meeting and to meet 
Directors after the formal 
proceedings have ended. Details of 
the resolutions to be proposed at the 
AGM can be found in the Notice of 
Meeting accompanying the Annual 
Report and Accounts. The Notice of 
Meeting is sent out more than 20 days 
in advance of the meeting. In line with 
the requirements of the Code, the 
results of proxy votes are disclosed  
at	the	AGM,	notified	to	the	Stock	
Exchange and made available on the 
Group website following the meeting.

Nominations  
Committee

The Nominations Committee 
during 2021 was as follows:

Stuart Paterson (Chair)
Aleen Gulvanessian  
(from 1 October 2021)
Andrea Dunstan 
(until 31 August 2021)
Bob McLellan
James Baird

The Committee met six times 
during 2021.

Its terms of reference are  
available on the Group website  
(www.macfarlanegroup.com).

The principal work undertaken by  
the Nominations Committee in 2021 
was to consider and recommend  
that the Company propose for 
re-election any Directors falling  
due for re-appointment at the  
AGM and to oversee the process  
to identify and appoint a new  
Non-executive Director.

The Committee’s ongoing 
responsibilities include reviewing the 
structure, size and composition of the 
Board and giving full consideration to 
succession planning for both Executive 
and Non-executive Directors and 
other senior executives. The 
Nominations Committee will 
continue to consider the mix of  
skills, experience and diversity that 
the Board requires and seek the 
appointment of Directors to meet  
its assessment of what is required  
to	ensure	that	the	Board	is	effective	
in discharging its responsibilities.

Following a Nominations Committee 
held in 2021 the Committee 
proposed that all Directors make 
themselves available for re-election  
at the AGM on 11 May 2021.

66   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

The work of the Remuneration 
Committee, including the new 
Remuneration Policy Statement  
for approval at the 2022 AGM,  
is described in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and 
Remuneration Policy on pages  
46 to 62.

After an extensive process which 
included a review of a number  
of candidates, and following a 
Nominations Committee on  
24 August 2021, the Committee 
approved the appointment of Aleen 
Gulvanessian as a Non-executive 
Director	with	effect	from	1	October	
2021. Aleen Gulvanessian replaces 
Andrea Dunstan, who retired on  
31 August 2021, as Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee.

No Director is involved in any 
decisions regarding their own 
appointment or re-appointment.

Remuneration 
Committee

The Remuneration Committee during 
2021 was as follows:

Aleen Gulvanessian (Chair) 
(from 1 October 2021)
Andrea Dunstan (Chair) 
(until 31 August 2021)
Bob McLellan
James Baird
Stuart Paterson

None of the members of the 
Remuneration Committee during 
2021	has	any	personal	financial	
interests, other than as a shareholder, 
in the matters to be decided,  
conflicts	of	interests	arising	from	
cross-directorships or any day-to-day 
involvement in running the business.

The Committee met three times 
during 2021. Its terms of reference 
are available on the Group website 
(www.macfarlanegroup.com).

The principal work undertaken by  
the Remuneration Committee in 
2021 was:

(a)   To review performance against 
2021	financial	and	personal	
objectives and to conclude on an 
appropriate performance related 
reward under the Annual bonus 
plan for senior executives 
including the Executive Directors;
(b)   To develop a new Remuneration 
Policy Statement, including 
proposed remuneration for 
Executive Directors, for approval 
at the AGM on 10 May 2022; 
(c)	 	To	approve	financial	and	personal	
objectives for 2022 in relation to 
the performance related Annual 
bonus plan;

(d)   To consider awards of share-based 
incentives and determining the 
performance conditions for these 
awards; and

(e)   To approve the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

67

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Corporate governance
(continued)

Audit Committee

During 2021 the Audit Committee 
comprised:

James Baird (Chair)
Bob McLellan
Aleen Gulvanessian 
(from 1 October 2021)
Andrea Dunstan 
(until 31 August 2021)

James Baird was appointed as Chair 
of the Committee on 8 January 
2018 given his relevant experience. 
The remaining Committee 
members, Bob McLellan and Aleen 
Gulvanessian, have a wide range  
of commercial experience as 
evidenced in their biographical 
details on page 42. The Committee 
Chairman will be available to answer 
questions on any aspect of the 
Committee’s work at the AGM.

The Company Chairman attends 
meetings	to	give	the	benefit	of	his	
relevant experience but is no longer  
a member of the Committee. 
Executive Directors, members  
of executive management and 
internal auditors attend certain 
meetings at the invitation of the 
Committee Chair.

The Committee’s terms of reference 
are displayed on the Group website, 
(www.macfarlanegroup.com) and 
its principal oversight responsibilities 
cover	the	following	five	areas:

•  Internal control and  
risk management 
The Committee reviews annually 
the Group’s system of risk 
management and internal control 
and processes for evaluating and 
monitoring the risks facing the 
Group. The overall responsibility for 
the systems of internal control and 
for	reviewing	their	effectiveness	
rests with the Board.

•  Internal audit 

The Committee monitors and 
reviews	the	effectiveness	of	the	
Group’s internal audit function and 
its terms of reference annually and 
recommends to the Board any 
changes required following its 
review. Reports from internal audit 
are considered at each meeting and 
the Committee actively engages  
in selecting and prioritising areas  
to be subject to audit.

•  Whistle-blowing 

The Committee monitors the 
Group’s	arrangements	by	which	staff	
may,	in	confidence,	raise	concerns	
about possible improprieties in 
matters	of	financial	reporting	and	
other areas including an external 
whistle-blowing service to take 
calls from employees.

•  External audit 

The Committee is responsible  
for	monitoring	the	effectiveness	 
of the external audit process and 
recommending to the Board the 
appointment, re-appointment  
and remuneration of the external 
auditor. It is responsible for 
ensuring that an appropriate 
relationship between the Group  
and the external auditor is 
maintained, including formal 
consideration of the independence 
of the external auditor. The 
Committee considers the 
framework for the supply of 
non-audit services by the external 
auditor and reviews any proposed 
non-audit services and fees.

•  Financial reporting 

The Committee monitors the 
integrity	of	the	Group’s	financial	
statements	and	the	significant	
judgements contained therein 
including assessing the fair, 
balanced and understandable 
presentation within the reporting. 
The Committee also considers  
any other formal announcements 
relating to the Group’s 
performance. Further details are  
set out on the following pages.

The Audit Committee met four  
times during 2021 and its agenda  
is linked to events in the Group’s 
financial	calendar.

The Committee meets privately  
with the external auditor at least  
once in each year. In 2021 the Audit 
Committee discharged its 
responsibilities by:

•  Reviewing its terms of reference;
•  Reviewing the Group’s draft 

financial	statements	and	interim	
results statement prior to Board 
approval and reviewing the external 
auditor’s	reports	on	the	final	results	
and	draft	financial	statements;

•  Agreeing the continuing 

appropriateness of the Group’s 
accounting policies;

•  Monitoring compliance with 

International Financial Reporting 
Standards; 

•  Challenging the output from  

the Group-wide process used to 
identify, evaluate and mitigate risks 
and associated mitigating controls;

•  Reviewing	the	effectiveness	of	 

the Group’s internal controls and 
disclosures made in the Annual 
Report;

•  Reviewing	the	effectiveness	of	the	
external auditor at the conclusion 
of the 2020 audit;

•  Agreeing the programme of work for 
the internal audit function taking 
into	account	identified	risks;

•  Discussing reports from the Head 
of Internal Audit on internal audit 
reports and management 
responses to proposals made in 
these reports, ensuring that the 
responses are actioned and 
completed on a timely basis;
•  Agreeing the external auditor’s  
plan for the audit of the Group 
financial	statements	which	 
includes	confirmations	of	auditor	
independence and approval of  
the engagement letter; and

•  Reviewing and approving external 
audit fees and keeping the level  
and nature of non-audit fees  
under review.

68   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

During 2021 the Audit Committee 
focused	specifically	on	a	number	 
of areas relating to management 
judgements and the ongoing 
response to the Covid-19 pandemic  
to ensure that:

•  There	was	sufficient	stress	testing	
of	the	Group’s	financial	position	
through a full range of possible 
scenarios to assess the Group’s 
viability;

•  There was a robust review of  

trade receivables and inventory 
provisioning to ensure it remained 
appropriate;

•  The internal control environment 
had been maintained, the risk  
of inappropriate management 
override of controls was being 
monitored and where necessary 
mitigating or additional controls 
were implemented; and

•  The increased cyber-security risk 
related to remote working had 
been considered and additional 
controls introduced to reduce  
or mitigate this risk.

Following each Audit Committee 
meeting, copies of the minutes of the 
meetings are circulated to all Board 
Directors and are made available to 
the external auditors by the Company 
Secretary, who acts as Secretary to 
the Committee.

2021 financial statements
Certain accounting policies require 
key accounting judgements or involve 
particularly complex or subjective 
estimates or assumptions which  
will	have	a	significant	effect	on	the	
amounts	recognised	in	the	financial	
statements. The Audit Committee 
receives a report from the Finance 
Director for each reported set of 
results, which summarises principal 
judgements taken by executive 
management. The Committee 
discusses and challenges these 
judgements and considers the report 
together with the results of the 
external audit. The Committee then 
makes a recommendation to the 
Board on the suitability of the policies 
and judgements supporting the 
reported results. 

For	the	2021	financial	statements,	
the Committee considers the key 
areas of judgement to be:

Valuation of trade receivables
Trade receivables recorded in the 
Group’s balance sheet comprise a 
large number of individual balances. 
The Group reviews all trade 
receivables and provides against 
potentially irrecoverable items 
throughout the year, applying an 
Expected Credit Loss model. The 
Group’s executive management then 
reviews local judgements. Whilst 
every attempt is made to ensure that 
the Expected Credit Loss allowance 
held against doubtful trade 
receivables is as accurate as possible, 
there remains a risk that the provision 
may not match the level of debt  
which ultimately proves uncollectible. 
At 31 December 2021, the Group 
retained a provision held against 
trade receivables of £731,000 (2020: 
£1,148,000) as set out in note 14.

The Audit Committee receives details 
of individual receivables > £25,000 
twice in each year. The Committee 
reviews the extent to which year-end 
balances have been settled in 2021  
to date, paying particular attention  
to receivables outwith terms and  
any	bad	debts	written	off,	comparing	
this with similar analyses produced  
at previous reporting dates. This is 
then considered against the level  
of provision held against trade 
receivables.

Based on this analysis, the Committee 
is	satisfied	that	it	has	challenged	
management’s assumptions 
appropriately and that the level  
of provision and the disclosures of 
items beyond terms is appropriate.

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)
A net asset/liability is recorded at 
each reporting date equivalent to  
the	surplus/deficit	on	the	Group’s	
defined	benefit	pension	scheme.	 
This asset/liability is determined in 
conjunction with advice from the 
pension scheme actuary and can 
fluctuate	significantly	based	on	a	
number of assumptions, some linked 
to market-related factors outwith the 

control of management. The main 
actuarial assumptions that impact 
the	deficit	are	set	out	in	note	24.	
Investments are valued at bid price.

The Audit Committee has debated 
the assumptions being used to 
determine the liabilities in 
accordance with guidance from a 
number	of	actuarial	firms	and	has	
satisfied	itself	that	the	assumptions	
used fall within an acceptable range 
reflecting	the	duration	of	liabilities	in	
Macfarlane	Group’s	defined	benefit	
pension scheme.

The pension scheme surplus 
calculated by the actuary and  
the related disclosures are based  
on these assumptions and the 
components of the movement from 
a	deficit	at	31	December	2020	to	
surplus in 2021 have been explained 
to the Committee’s satisfaction. The 
sensitivities of movements in the key 
underlying assumptions are clearly 
set out in note 24. The Committee 
is	also	satisfied	that	a	surplus	can	 
be recognised as an asset based  
on legal opinion provided details  
of which are set out in note 24.

Accordingly the Committee is 
satisfied	that	it	has	challenged	
management’s assumptions 
appropriately and is comfortable 
with the reporting of the pension 
scheme surplus.

Accounting treatment  
of acquisitions 
Acquired businesses are measured 
at the date of acquisition as the 
aggregate fair value of assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities. 
The excess of the cost of acquisition 
over	the	fair	value	of	the	identifiable	
net	assets	is	classified	as	goodwill.	
The Committee reviews this process 
for each acquisition undertaken and 
discusses the methodology and 
assumptions used with management 
and	concluded	that	it	was	satisfied	
with the basis of accounting in this 
area and the resulting measurements.

69

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate governance
(continued)

Audit Committee 
(continued)

Consideration of other matters 
The Committee debates a number 
of other areas for each reporting 
period but does not consider these 
matters	to	be	of	such	significance	
as those above. For the 2021 
financial	statements,	the	main	 
other areas included:

•  The Group’s Viability Statement 
includes ‘severe but plausible’ 
scenarios applied in arriving at the 
conclusions made. The Committee 
reviewed these scenarios as well as 
the reverse stress testing applied 
to the model used (as disclosed 
on	page	19)	and	was	satisfied	with	
the assumptions and judgements 
applied and the statement made;

•  The disposal of the Group’s 

Labels division on 31 December 
2021 has been accounted for  
and disclosed correctly in line  
with IFRS5;

•  Goodwill is allocated to cash 

generating units (‘CGUs’) expected 
to	benefit	from	the	synergies	of	
the business combination, for the 
purpose of impairment testing. 
Carrying values of goodwill for 
each CGU Grouping are reviewed 
at the half year and at the end of 
the	financial	year.	The	Committee	
reviews and discusses 
management’s approach to 
impairment testing including  
the related sensitivity analysis. 
	 – 	The	Committee	concluded	 

at the half year that, based on 
the assumptions made which 
reflected	a	combination	of	
deteriorating trading conditions 
in 2021 and an indicative price 
offered	for	Labels	by	The	Reflex	
Group Limited there was 
evidence of impairment of 
goodwill in the Labels CGU.  
An impairment charge was 
made in the 2021 interim results. 
The Labels CGU was sold on  
31	December	2021	and	classified	
as a Discontinued Operation.

	 – 	The	Committee	was	satisfied	 
with the assumptions and 
judgements applied, concluding 
that there was no evidence of 
impairment of goodwill under all 
reasonable sensitivity scenarios 
in the Continuing Operations of 
Distribution and Manufacturing.

•  The level and basis for property-

related provisions at 31 December 
2021	supported,	where	significant,	
by external opinions from the 
Group’s property advisers;

•  The level of and basis for inventory 
provisions at 31 December 2021; and

•  The review of the Alternative 

Performance Measure (‘APM’), being 
Operating	profit	before	amortisation,	
introduced in 2021 including the 
adequacy of supporting explanations 
and reconciliations to related 
statutory performance measures.

For all of these other matters the 
Audit	Committee	is	satisfied	with	 
the approach taken.

The Audit Committee has reviewed 
the contents of this year’s Annual 
Report and Accounts and has advised 
the Board that, in its view, the report is 
fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the 
Group’s performance, business 
model and strategy.

The Committee monitors the 
Group’s	arrangements	by	which	staff	
may,	in	confidence,	raise	concerns	
about possible improprieties in 
matters	of	financial	reporting	and	
other areas including an external 
whistle-blowing service to take  
calls from employees. Details of  
the arrangements are on the Group 
website (www.macfarlanegroup.com). 
All concerns are investigated at  
the earliest opportunity and the 
employee’s anonymity preserved 
wherever possible.

Relationship with external audit
The Audit Committee is responsible 
for the development, implementation 
and monitoring of the Group’s 
position on external audit. The 
Committee’s terms of reference 
assign oversight responsibility for 
monitoring the independence, 
objectivity and compliance of the 
external auditors with ethical and 
regulatory requirements to the  
Audit Committee, and day-to-day 
responsibility to the Finance Director. 
The Audit Committee ensures that 
the Board and external auditor have 
safeguards in place to prevent 
auditor’s independence and 
objectivity being compromised. The 
external auditor also reports to the 
Committee on the actions that it has 
taken to comply with professional 
and regulatory requirements and 
current best practice in order to 
maintain independence.

Each year the Audit Committee 
considers and agrees the scope of the 
audit proposed by the external auditor, 
including	coverage	of	identified	risk	
areas. In their review of the 2021 audit 
scope, the Committee requested that 
the external auditors report on the 
following additional areas:

a) 

b) 

c) 

d) 

 Compliance of receivables and 
inventories provisioning with the 
Group’s approved accounting 
policies;
 The adequacy of explanations  
and disclosures relating to the 
introduction in 2021 of an 
Alternative Performance 
Measure, being Operating  
profit	before	amortisation;
 The suitability of property-related 
provisions, including the results  
of independent discussions 
conducted by the external auditor 
to corroborate underlying 
assumptions; and
 The accounting treatment  
and disclosures relating to the 
disposal of the Labels businesses. 

70   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

•  Monthly	and	annual	financial	
control checklists submitted  
by each business unit;

•  Discussion by the Committee of 

the external auditor’s conclusions 
from its annual audit; and

•  A robust risk assessment process 

as set out below.

Each business’s risk register is kept 
under review during regular review 
meetings in each business. The 
Board	considers	in	detail	specific	
risks from the register at each Board 
meeting and annually carries out a 
review of the risks facing the Group 
and ensures that management has 
identified	and	implemented	
appropriate controls, which are 
acceptable to the Board, to address 
these risks. The risk register is taken 
into account in setting the internal 
audit plan each year.

The Audit Committee has received 
reports on cyber security matters to 
emphasise the importance of having 
robust cyber-security measures in 
place as part of the controls 
framework, but also to ensure that 
employees, customers and suppliers 
are protected from the impact of 
cyber security breaches.

During the course of its review of the 
system of internal control, the Board 
has	not	identified	nor	been	advised	
of any failings or weaknesses which 
it	has	determined	to	be	significant.	
No	significant	corrective	actions	 
are outstanding. 

The Directors have continued to 
review	the	effectiveness	of	the	
Group’s	system	of	financial	and	
non-financial	controls.

The external auditors reported to  
the Committee on all of these areas  
on conclusion of the 2021 audit.  
No adjustments were made to the 
2021	financial	statements	or	to	the	
Group’s internal controls as a result.

The Committee notes that there  
are no contractual obligations to 
restrict the choice of external auditor. 
In accordance with best practice,  
the audit partner from the external 
auditor	rotates	off	the	audit	
engagement	every	five	years.

The Audit Committee monitors 
non-audit services provided to  
the Group by the external auditor, 
recognising that there may be certain 
non-audit work which the external 
auditor is best placed to undertake. 
The Committee’s policy is to keep  
all services provided by the external 
auditor under review to ensure the 
independence and objectivity of the 
external auditor, taking account of 
relevant professional and regulatory 
requirements. Non-audit work to be 
undertaken by the external auditor  
is approved by the Audit Committee  
in advance of the work being 
undertaken. Amounts paid to 
Deloitte LLP during 2021 for audit 
and other services are set out in  
note	2	to	the	financial	statements.

On conclusion of each year’s audit, 
the Audit Committee considers the 
effectiveness	of	the	external	auditor,	
in particular assessing the level of 
professional scepticism demonstrated 
throughout the audit process and in 
the challenge of management’s 
assumptions. Through the Committee 
meeting privately with the external 
auditor and in discussions between the 
external auditor and the Committee 
Chair, the actual performance of the 
auditor is compared to the annual 
audit plan originally presented to and 
agreed by the Committee and against 
the service level commitments made 
by the external auditor in the 2020 
audit tender.

Risk management  
and internal control

The Board is responsible for the 
Group’s system of internal control 
and	for	reviewing	its	effectiveness.	 
It is management’s role to implement 
the Board’s policies on risk and 
control through the design and 
operation of appropriate internal 
control systems. Such systems are 
designed to manage rather than 
eliminate the risk of failure to achieve 
business objectives and by their 
nature can only provide reasonable 
and not absolute assurance against 
material mis-statement or loss.

The	Board	confirms	that	an	ongoing	
process for identifying, evaluating 
and	managing	the	significant	risks	
faced by the Group was in place in 
accordance with the principles of  
the Code and the related guidance. 
The process was in place throughout 
2021 and has continued to the date 
of approval of the Annual Report  
and	financial	statements.	

The Board regularly reviews the 
Group’s system of internal control. 
The Board’s monitoring covers all 
controls	including	financial,	
operational and compliance  
controls and risk management. 

The key elements of the internal 
control process are:

•  Formal Board reporting on a monthly 
basis by the Chief Executive and 
the Finance Director;

•  Formal Board approval of the 

annual budget;

•  Since 2009, Internal Audit has been 
staffed	in-house.	Certain	parts	 
of the internal audit plan may be 
outsourced	when	specific	expertise	
is required. The Committee 
challenges and agrees the annual 
internal audit plan, receives  
reports on internal audit issues 
raised, a six-monthly update and  
an annual report from the Head  
of Internal Audit;

71

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect  
of the Annual Report and the financial statements

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the Annual Report and 
the Group and parent Company 
financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors 
to prepare Group and parent 
Company	financial	statements	for	
each	financial	year.	Under	that	law	
the Directors are required to prepare 
the	Group	financial	statements	in	
accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards as 
adopted by the United Kingdom  
and have also chosen to prepare  
the	parent	Company	financial	
statements in accordance with 
Financial Reporting Standard 101 
‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’.

Under company law the Directors 
must	not	approve	the	financial	
statements	unless	they	are	satisfied	
that they give a true and fair view of 
the	state	of	affairs	of	the	Group	and	
parent	Company	and	of	their	profit	
or loss for that period. 

In preparing the parent Company 
financial	statements,	the	Directors	
are required to: 

•  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;
•  make judgements and accounting 
estimates that are reasonable  
and prudent;

•  state whether Financial Reporting 
Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure 
Framework’ has been followed, 
subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the 
financial	statements;	and

•  prepare	the	financial	statements	

on the going concern basis, 
unless it is inappropriate to 
presume that the Company  
will continue in business.

In	preparing	the	Group	financial	
statements, International Accounting 
Standard 1 requires that the Directors: 

•  properly select and apply 

accounting policies;

•  present information, including 

accounting policies, in a manner 
that provides relevant, reliable, 
comparable and understandable 
information;

•  provide additional disclosures  

when	compliance	with	the	specific	
requirements	in	IFRSs	are	insufficient	
to enable users to understand the 
impact of particular transactions, 
other events and conditions on  
the	entity’s	financial	position	 
and	financial	performance;	and

•  Make an assessment of the 

Company’s ability to continue  
as a going concern.

The Directors are responsible for 
keeping adequate accounting records 
that	are	sufficient	to	show	and	explain	
the Company’s transactions and 
disclose with reasonable accuracy at 
any	time	the	financial	position	of	the	
Company and enable them to ensure 
that	the	financial	statements	comply	
with the Companies Act 2006. They 
are also responsible for safeguarding 
the assets of the Company and hence 
for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud 
and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for  
the maintenance and integrity of the 
corporate	and	financial	information	
included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and 
dissemination	of	financial	statements	
may	differ	from	legislation	in	other	
jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the 
Directors in respect of the annual 
financial report
We	confirm	that	to	the	best	of	our	
knowledge:

•  The	financial	statements,	prepared	
in accordance with the relevant 
financial	reporting	framework,	give	 
a true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities,	financial	position	and	
profit	or	loss	of	the	Company	and	
the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole;

•  The Strategic Report, incorporated 
into the Directors’ Report, includes 
a fair review of the development 
and performance of the business 
and the position of the Company 
and the undertakings included in 
the consolidation taken as a whole, 
together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties 
that they face; and

•  the Annual Report and Accounts, 
taken as a whole, are fair, balanced 
and understandable and provide 
the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the 
Company’s position and 
performance, business model  
and strategy.

This responsibility statement was 
approved by the Board on 24 February 
2022 and signed on its behalf by:

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

24 February 2022 

24 February 2022

72   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC

Report on the audit of the financial statements

1. Opinion

In our opinion:

•  the financial statements of Macfarlane Group plc (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) 
give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 31 December 
2021 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom adopted 

international accounting standards;

•  the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure 
Framework’; and

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We	have	audited	the	financial	statements	which	comprise:

•  the consolidated income statement;
•  the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;
•  the consolidated and parent company balance sheets;
•  the consolidated and parent company statements of changes in equity;
•  the	consolidated	cash	flow	statement;	and
•  the related notes 1 to 42.

The	financial	reporting	framework	that	has	been	applied	in	the	preparation	of	the	Group	financial	statements	is	applicable	
law,	and	United	Kingdom	adopted	international	accounting	standards.	The	financial	reporting	framework	that	has	been	
applied	in	the	preparation	of	the	parent	company	financial	statements	is	applicable	law	and	United	Kingdom	Accounting	
Standards, including FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

2. Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. 
Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial	statements	section	of	our	report.	

We are independent of the Group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are 
relevant	to	our	audit	of	the	financial	statements	in	the	UK,	including	the	Financial	Reporting	Council’s	(the	‘FRC’s’)	
Ethical	Standard	as	applied	to	listed	public	interest	entities,	and	we	have	fulfilled	our	other	ethical	responsibilities	in	
accordance with these requirements. The non-audit services provided to the Group and parent company for the year 
are	disclosed	in	note	2	to	the	financial	statements.	We	confirm	that	we	have	not	provided	any	non-audit	services	
prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard to the Group or the parent company.

We	believe	that	the	audit	evidence	we	have	obtained	is	sufficient	and	appropriate	to	provide	a	basis	for	our	opinion.

3. Summary of our audit approach

Key audit matters

The	key	audit	matter	that	we	identified	in	the	current	year	was:

	• 	Business	combinations:	valuation	and	allocation	of	acquired	intangible	assets	and	valuation	 

of contingent consideration

Materiality

Scoping

The	materiality	that	we	used	for	the	Group	financial	statements	was	£865k	which	was	determined	
based	on	4.6%	of	profit	before	tax.

Our audit covered 91% of the Group’s revenue, 97% of the Group’s net assets and 90% of the 
Group’s	profit	before	tax.	

Significant changes  
in our approach

The valuation of trade receivables, focussed on balances greater than 60 days and the completeness 
of the expected credit loss model has been removed as a key audit matter in 2021. This is driven by 
the	improving	ageing	profile	and	the	lower	level	of	bad	debt	experienced	by	the	Group	in	the	year.

This	is	the	only	significant	change	in	our	approach	in	the	current	year.	

73

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC  
(continued)

4. Conclusions relating to going concern
In	auditing	the	financial	statements,	we	have	concluded	that	the	Directors’	use	of	the	going	concern	basis	of	
accounting	in	the	preparation	of	the	financial	statements	is	appropriate.

Our evaluation of the Directors’ assessment of the Group’s and parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the 
going concern basis of accounting included:

•  Comparing the underlying data and key assumptions to past performance on the assumptions applied;
•  Evaluating	the	financing	facilities	that	are	in	place	in	the	year	including	the	repayment	terms	and	covenants	that	 

are	in	place,	and	assessing	whether	these	have	been	appropriately	reflected	in	the	model;	

•  Assessing the sophistication of the model used to prepare the forecasts, testing the clerical accuracy of those 

forecasts and considering the historical accuracy of the forecasts prepared by management;

•  Determining the likelihood of the downside scenarios and sensitivities performed by management; and 
•  Assessing the adequacy of the going concern disclosures. 

Based	on	the	work	we	have	performed,	we	have	not	identified	any	material	uncertainties	relating	to	events	or	conditions	
that,	individually	or	collectively,	may	cast	significant	doubt	on	the	Group’s	and	parent	company’s	ability	to	continue	as	a	
going	concern	for	a	period	of	at	least	twelve	months	from	when	the	financial	statements	are	authorised	for	issue.

In relation to the reporting on how the Group has applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing 
material	to	add	or	draw	attention	to	in	relation	to	the	Directors’	statement	in	the	financial	statements	about	whether	
the Directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the 
relevant sections of this report.

5. Key audit matters
Key	audit	matters	are	those	matters	that,	in	our	professional	judgement,	were	of	most	significance	in	our	audit	of	the	
financial	statements	of	the	current	period	and	include	the	most	significant	assessed	risks	of	material	misstatement	
(whether	or	not	due	to	fraud)	that	we	identified.	These	matters	included	those	which	had	the	greatest	effect	on:	the	
overall	audit	strategy,	the	allocation	of	resources	in	the	audit;	and	directing	the	efforts	of	the	engagement	team.

These	matters	were	addressed	in	the	context	of	our	audit	of	the	financial	statements	as	a	whole,	and	in	forming	 
our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

5.1. Business combinations: valuation and allocation of acquired intangible assets and valuation of contingent 
consideration 

Key audit matter 
description

The Group completed two business combinations in the year, GWP Holdings Limited and Carters 
Packaging (Cornwall) Limited for total consideration of £22.7m (£18.1m and £4.6m respectively). 
Total consideration comprised cash of £16.1m and £6.6m of contingent consideration. Goodwill 
of £9.5m and other intangible assets of £9.5m were recognised on acquisition. 

Management performed a purchase price allocation exercise to allocate consideration in excess  
of the net assets to goodwill and other intangibles. 

Given the judgement involved in valuing acquired intangible assets and in forecasting post-acquisition 
performance,	we	have	identified	a	potential	for	fraud	in	relation	to	the	valuation	and	allocation	of	
acquired intangible assets, and of the valuation of contingent consideration.

Business	combinations	are	included	within	note	23	to	the	financial	statements.	The	Audit	
Committee’s consideration in respect of this risk is included on page 69.

74   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

How the scope of our 
audit responded to 
the key audit matter

The audit procedures we performed in respect of this matter included:

• 	Gaining	an	understanding	of	the	process	undertaken	by	management	to	perform	the	purchase	
price allocation and deferred consideration calculation, and gaining an understanding of the 
relevant controls;

• 	Reviewing	share	purchase	agreements	to	assess	whether	each	acquisition	has	been	accounted	

for	correctly	in	the	financial	statements;

• 	Engaging	with	our	valuation	specialists	to	understand	the	inputs	and	methodology	and	

evaluating the assumptions used by management;

• 	Challenging	management’s	assumptions	for	the	inputs	to	the	calculations	with	reference	 

to comparable company benchmarks;

• 	Assessing	the	accuracy	of	forecast	revenues	used	in	the	calculations;	
• 	Evaluating	management’s	assessment	of	the	presence	of	further	intangible	assets	not	

identified;	and

• 	Assessed	management’s	forecast	of	post-acquisition	performance	and	recalculated	the	

contingent consideration.

Key observations

We concluded that the assumptions made by management in determining the valuation  
and allocation of acquired intangible assets, and the valuation of contingent consideration  
are reasonable. 

6. Our application of materiality
6.1. Materiality
We	define	materiality	as	the	magnitude	of	misstatement	in	the	financial	statements	that	makes	it	probable	that	the	
economic	decisions	of	a	reasonably	knowledgeable	person	would	be	changed	or	influenced.	We	use	materiality	both	
in planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work.

Based	on	our	professional	judgement,	we	determined	materiality	for	the	financial	statements	as	a	whole	as	follows:

Group	financial	statements

Parent company  
financial	statements

Profit before tax  
£18,665k

Group materiality 
£865k

Materiality

£865k (2020: £643k)

£433k (2020: £322k)

Basis for 
determining 
materiality

4.6%	of	profit	before	
tax (2020: 4.9% of 
profit	before	tax).

Rationale for  
the benchmark 
applied

We	have	used	profit	
before tax as the 
benchmark for our 
determination of 
materiality as we 
consider this to be  
the key performance 
metric for the Group 
and one which is a key 
metric to analysts and 
investors given the 
prominence in the 
Annual Report.

0.6% of net assets (2020: 
0.5% of net assets), which is 
capped at 50% (2020: 50%)  
of Group materiality.

The parent company holds  
the investments in the Group 
subsidiaries, the value of which 
is the key metric for the users 
of	the	financial	statements.	 
As statutory materiality would 
have been higher than the 
component materiality, we 
have capped materiality to  
be 50% of Group materiality 
being £433k. 50% is deemed 
appropriate based on the 
Company only contribution  
to the Group.

Profit before tax

Group materiality

Component 
materiality range 
£433k to £797k

Audit Committee 
reporting 
threshold £43k

75

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC  
(continued)

6.2. Performance materiality
We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, 
uncorrected	and	undetected	misstatements	exceed	the	materiality	for	the	financial	statements	as	a	whole.

Group	financial	statements

Parent	company	financial	statements

Performance materiality

70% (2020: 70%) of Group materiality

70% (2020: 70%) of parent company materiality 

Basis and rationale for 
determining performance 
materiality

In determining performance materiality, we considered the following factors: 

• 	Our	risk	assessment,	including	the	quality	of	the	control	environment,	and	that	we	
considered it appropriate to rely on controls over certain business processes; and 

• 	Our	past	assessment	of	the	audit,	including	consideration	of	the	number	and	level	 

of	corrected	and	uncorrected	misstatements	identified	in	prior	period.

6.3. Error reporting threshold
We	agreed	with	the	Audit	Committee	that	we	would	report	to	the	Committee	all	audit	differences	in	excess	of	£43k	
(2020:	£32k),	as	well	as	differences	below	that	threshold	that,	in	our	view,	warranted	reporting	on	qualitative	grounds.	 
We	also	report	to	the	Audit	Committee	on	disclosure	matters	that	we	identified	when	assessing	the	overall	presentation	
of	the	financial	statements.

7. An overview of the scope of our audit
7.1. Identification and scoping of components
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its environment through discussion with 
IT,	internal	audit,	and	the	Group	and	component	finance	teams	and	by	performing	walkthroughs	of	processes	across	
each of these areas, including Group-wide controls, and assessing the risk of material misstatement at a Group level. 

For	components	deemed	significant	to	the	Group,	full	scope	audit	procedures	were	performed	to	materiality	levels	
applicable to each entity, which was lower than the Group materiality level and ranged from £433k to £797k (2020: 
£322k	to	£579k).	Components	deemed	significant	are	as	follows:

•  Macfarlane Group UK Limited
•  Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited
•  GWP Holdings Limited

Macfarlane Labels Limited and Macfarlane Group Ireland (Labels & Packaging) Limited were disposed of during the 
year	and	the	results	are	included	within	discontinued	operations.	As	such	we	no	longer	assessed	these	as	significant	
components.	GWP	Holdings	Limited	was	acquired	during	the	year	and	has	been	classified	as	a	significant	component.	

This provided audit coverage of over 91% (2020: 93%) of the Group’s revenue, 97% (2020: 95%) of the Group’s net 
assets	and	90%	(2020:	87%)	of	the	Group’s	profit	before	tax.	

Revenue

9%

Profit before tax

Net assets

10%

3%

Full audit scope

Review at Group level

91%

90%

97%

The	remaining	non-significant	components	were	subject	to	analytical	reviews.	Our	audit	work	on	these	components	
was executed at Group materiality. 

At the Group level, we also tested the consolidation process. 

All	work	on	the	significant	components	and	consolidation	process	was	performed	by	the	Group	engagement	team.	

7.2. Our consideration of the control environment
With the involvement of our IT specialist we obtained an understanding of the relevant IT environment, by performing 
walkthroughs of key processes and in some instances performed testing on the relevant general IT controls and 
business cycles. We took a controls reliant approach on the relevant controls for certain components within the 
revenue, trade receivables, expenditure and trade payables business process cycles. 

76   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
8. Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report (including the Chairman’s statement, 
Macfarlane Group Business Model and Strategy, Chief Executive’s review, Report of the Directors, Remuneration Report, 
Corporate	Governance	Report	and	Statement	of	Directors’	Responsibilities),	other	than	the	financial	statements	and	our	
auditor’s report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report. 

Our	opinion	on	the	financial	statements	does	not	cover	the	other	information	and,	except	to	the	extent	otherwise	
explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially 
inconsistent	with	the	financial	statements	or	our	knowledge	obtained	in	the	course	of	the	audit,	or	otherwise	appears	
to be materially misstated.

If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this 
gives	rise	to	a	material	misstatement	in	the	financial	statements	themselves.	If,	based	on	the	work	we	have	performed,	
we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

9. Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities statement, the Directors are responsible for the preparation 
of	the	financial	statements	and	for	being	satisfied	that	they	give	a	true	and	fair	view,	and	for	such	internal	control	as	
the	Directors	determine	is	necessary	to	enable	the	preparation	of	financial	statements	that	are	free	from	material	
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In	preparing	the	financial	statements,	the	Directors	are	responsible	for	assessing	the	Group’s	and	the	parent	company’s	
ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going 
concern basis of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent company or to 
cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

10. Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our	objectives	are	to	obtain	reasonable	assurance	about	whether	the	financial	statements	as	a	whole	are	free	from	
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with 
ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and 
are	considered	material	if,	individually	or	in	the	aggregate,	they	could	reasonably	be	expected	to	influence	the	
economic	decisions	of	users	taken	on	the	basis	of	these	financial	statements.

A	further	description	of	our	responsibilities	for	the	audit	of	the	financial	statements	is	located	on	the	FRC’s	
website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.

11. Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in 
line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including 
fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below. 

11.1. Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud and  
non-compliance with laws and regulations, we considered the following:

•  the nature of the industry and sector, control environment and business performance including the design of the 
Group’s remuneration policies, key drivers for Directors’ remuneration, bonus levels and performance targets;
•  results	of	our	enquiries	of	management,	internal	audit,	and	the	audit	committee	about	their	own	identification	 

and assessment of the risks of irregularities; 

•  any	matters	we	identified	having	obtained	and	reviewed	the	Group’s	documentation	of	their	policies	and	

procedures relating to:

	 – 	identifying,	evaluating	and	complying	with	laws	and	regulations	and	whether	they	were	aware	of	any	instances	

of non-compliance;

	 – 	detecting	and	responding	to	the	risks	of	fraud	and	whether	they	have	knowledge	of	any	actual,	suspected	or	

alleged fraud;

	 – 	the	internal	controls	established	to	mitigate	risks	of	fraud	or	non-compliance	with	laws	and	regulations;

77

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC  
(continued)

•  the matters discussed among the audit engagement team and relevant internal specialists, including valuations, 

pensions,	and	IT	specialists	regarding	how	and	where	fraud	might	occur	in	the	financial	statements	and	any	
potential indicators of fraud.

As a result of these procedures, we considered the opportunities and incentives that may exist within the organisation 
for	fraud	and	identified	the	greatest	potential	for	fraud	in	the	following	areas:	business	combinations	–	valuation	and	
allocation of acquired intangible assets and valuation of contingent consideration. In common with all audits under 
ISAs	(UK),	we	are	also	required	to	perform	specific	procedures	to	respond	to	the	risk	of	management	override.

We also obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework that the Group operates in, focusing  
on	provisions	of	those	laws	and	regulations	that	had	a	direct	effect	on	the	determination	of	material	amounts	and	
disclosures	in	the	financial	statements.	The	key	laws	and	regulations	we	considered	in	this	context	included	the	UK	
Companies Act, Listing Rules, pensions legislation, and Tax Law.

In	addition,	we	considered	provisions	of	other	laws	and	regulations	that	do	not	have	a	direct	effect	on	the	financial	
statements but compliance with which may be fundamental to the Group’s ability to operate or to avoid a material 
penalty. These included UK Employment and Labour Laws.

11.2. Audit response to risks identified
As	a	result	of	performing	the	above,	we	identified	business	combinations:	valuation	and	allocation	of	acquired	
intangible assets and valuation of deferred consideration as a key audit matter related to the potential risk of fraud  
or non-compliance with laws and regulations. The key audit matters section of our report explains the matter in more 
detail	and	also	describes	the	specific	procedures	we	performed	in	response	to	that	key	audit	matter.	

In	addition	to	the	above,	our	procedures	to	respond	to	risks	identified	included	the	following:

•  reviewing	the	financial	statement	disclosures	and	testing	to	supporting	documentation	to	assess	compliance	 
with	provisions	of	relevant	laws	and	regulations	described	as	having	a	direct	effect	on	the	financial	statements;

•  enquiring of management, the audit committee and external legal counsel concerning actual and potential 

litigation and claims;

•  performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks  

of material misstatement due to fraud;

•  reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit reports and reviewing 

correspondence with HMRC; and

•  in addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, testing the appropriateness of journal 
entries and other adjustments; assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates are 
indicative	of	a	potential	bias;	and	evaluating	the	business	rationale	of	any	significant	transactions	that	are	unusual	 
or outside the normal course of business.

We	also	communicated	relevant	identified	laws	and	regulations	and	potential	fraud	risks	to	all	engagement	team	
members including internal specialists, and remained alert to any indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws 
and regulations throughout the audit.

78   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Report on other legal and regulatory requirements

12. Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared  
in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the information given in the strategic report and the Directors’ report for the financial year for which  

the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and

•  the strategic report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal 

requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the parent company and their environment 
obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified any material misstatements in the strategic report 
or the Directors’ report.

13. Corporate Governance Statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the Directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability  
and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Group’s compliance with the provisions of  
the	UK	Corporate	Governance	Code	specified	for	our	review.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements  
of the Corporate Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements and our 
knowledge obtained during the audit: 

•  the Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of 

accounting and any material uncertainties identified set out on page 65;

•  the Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the Group’s prospects, the period this assessment covers 

and why the period is appropriate set out on page 19;

•  the Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 72;
•  the Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set 

out on page 20;

•  the section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal 

control systems set out on page 68; and

•  the section describing the work of the audit committee set out on page 68.

14. Matters on which we are required to report by exception
14.1. Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have 

not been received from branches not visited by us; or

•  the	parent	company	financial	statements	are	not	in	agreement	with	the	accounting	records	and	returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

14.2. Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of Directors’ 
remuneration have not been made or the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited is not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

79

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC  
(continued)

15. Other matters which we are required to address
15.1. Auditor tenure
Following the recommendation of the audit committee, we were appointed by the Board of Directors on 12 July 2019 
to	audit	the	financial	statements	for	the	year	ending	31	December	2019	and	subsequent	financial	periods.	The	period	
of	total	uninterrupted	engagement	including	previous	renewals	and	reappointments	of	the	firm	is	3	years,	covering	
the years ending 31 December 2019 to 31 December 2021.

15.2. Consistency of the audit report with the additional report to the audit committee
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the audit committee we are required to provide in accordance 
with ISAs (UK).

16. Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members  
those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s 
members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

As required by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule (DTR) 4.1.14R, 
these	financial	statements	form	part	of	the	European	Single	Electronic	Format	(ESEF)	prepared	Annual	Financial	
Report	filed	on	the	National	Storage	Mechanism	of	the	UK	FCA	in	accordance	with	the	ESEF	Regulatory	Technical	
Standard	((‘ESEF	RTS’).	This	auditor’s	report	provides	no	assurance	over	whether	the	annual	financial	report	has	been	
prepared	using	the	single	electronic	format	specified	in	the	ESEF	RTS.	

David Sweeney CA
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Statutory Auditor 
Glasgow, United Kingdom

24 February 2022

80   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
Consolidated income statement
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

Continuing operations
Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses

Operating profit
Finance costs

Profit before tax
Tax

Note

2021
£000

Restated*
2020
£000

1

2
4

5

264,465
174,998

210,227
140,400

89,467
8,651
60,761

20,055
1,390

18,665
4,917

69,827
7,162
49,006

13,659
1,226

12,433
2,696

Profit for the year from continuing operations

20

13,748

9,737

Discontinued operations
(Loss)/Profit for the year from discontinued operations

Profit for the year

Earnings per share from continuing operations

Basic

Diluted

Earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations

Basic

Diluted

6

8

8

(1,150)

434

12,598

10,171

8.71p

8.62p

6.17p

6.14p

7.98p

7.90p

6.45p

6.42p

*	In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

81

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Foreign	currency	translation	differences
Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax recognised in other comprehensive income
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax
Profit	for	the	year

Total comprehensive income for the year

Note

20

24

18

2021
£000

2020
£000

(120)

60

8,212

2,112

(2,054)
88

(401)
129

6,126
12,598

1,900
10,171

18,724

12,071

82   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Consolidated statement of changes in equity
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

Share
capital
£000

Share
premium
£000

Revaluation
reserve
£000

Translation
reserve
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
£000

Note

At 1 January 2020

39,453

13,148

70

231

15,835

68,737

Comprehensive income
Profit	for	the	year
Foreign	currency	translation	differences
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

At	31 December 2020

Comprehensive income
Profit	for	the	year
Foreign	currency	translation	differences
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

20
24
18
18

7
25

20
24
18
18

7
25

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
60
–
–
–

60

–
–

–

10,171
–
2,112
(401)
129

10,171
60
2,112
(401)
129

12,011

12,071

(1,105)
75

(1,030)

(1,105)
75

(1,030)

39,453

13,148

70

291

26,816

79,778

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
(120)
–
–
–

(120)

12,598
–
8,212
(2,054)
88

12,598
(120)
8,212
(2,054)
88

18,844

18,724

–
–

–

(4,293)
685

(4,293)
685

(3,608)

(3,608)

At 31 December 2021

39,453

13,148

70

171

42,052

94,894

83

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Consolidated balance sheet
At	31 December 2021

Non-current assets
Goodwill and other intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Trade and other receivables
Deferred tax assets
Retirement	benefit	surplus

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Current tax liabilities
Lease liabilities
Bank borrowings

Total current liabilities

Net current assets

Non-current liabilities
Retirement	benefit	obligations
Deferred tax liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Revaluation reserve
Translation reserve
Retained earnings

Total equity

The	financial	statements	of	Macfarlane	Group	PLC,	Company	registration	number	SC004221,	 
were approved by the Board of Directors on 24 February 2022 and signed on its behalf by

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

84   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Note

2021 
£000

2020
£000

10
11
12
14
18
24

13
14
15

74,902
6,101
34,718
35
19
8,267

124,042

21,269
58,541
12,315

92,125

60,598
8,640
28,584
35
396
–

98,253

15,858
51,371
7,228

74,457

1

216,167

172,710

16
21

17
15

24
18
16
21
17

1

1

19
20
20
20
20

60,975
1,730
771
6,364
9,840

79,680

47,755
1,834
1,731
5,784
7,766

64,870

12,445

9,587

–
7,472
3,695
1,848
28,578

1,471
3,072
19
592
22,908

41,593

28,062

121,273

92,932

94,894

79,778

39,453
13,148
70
171
42,052

94,894

39,453
13,148
70
291
26,816

79,778

 
 
 
 
Consolidated cash flow statement
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

Profit/(loss) before tax from:
Continuing operations
Discontinued operations

Total operations
Adjustments for:
Amortisation of intangible assets
Impairment of goodwill in discontinued operations
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Loss on disposal of subsidiaries
Share-based payment expense
Finance costs

Operating cash flows before movements in working capital
(Increase)/decrease in inventories
(Increase)/decrease in receivables
Increase in payables
Increase in provisions
Pension scheme contributions (less current service cost) 

Cash generated from operations
Income taxes paid
Interest paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

Investing activities
Acquisitions
Proceeds from sale of subsidiaries
Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Cash outflow from investing activities

Financing activities
Dividends paid
Drawdown/(Repayment) of bank borrowing facility
Repayment of lease obligations

Cash outflow from financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Note

2021 
£000

Restated*
2020
£000

18,665
(938)

17,727

3,311
987
1,989
7,282
43
232
685
1,390

33,646
(4,848)
(7,892)
8,905
1,884
(1,533)

30,162
(4,975)
(1,383)

23,804

(12,238)
5,212
199
(2,132)

(8,959)

(4,293)
3,889
(7,539)

(7,943)

6,902
5,221

12,123

12,433
569

13,002

2,520
–
1,719
6,740
30
–
75
1,342

25,428
161
955
965
1,766
(2,981)

26,294
(1,728)
(1,243)

23,323

(2,661)
–
102
(804)

(3,363)

(1,105)
(10,225)
(6,719)

(18,049)

1,911
3,310

5,221

23
6

7

*	In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

There	is	no	material	impact	of	foreign	exchange	rate	differences	on	the	cash	and	cash	equivalents	balance	at	the	end	of	the	
current	or	preceding	financial	year.

Reconciliation to consolidated cash flow statement
Cash and cash equivalents per the consolidated balance sheet
Bank overdraft

Balances per consolidated cash flow statement

2021 
£000

2020
£000

12,315
(192)

12,123

7,228
(2,007)

5,221

Bank overdrafts are included in cash and cash equivalents because they form an integral part of the Group’s cash management.

85

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Accounting policies
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

Basis of preparation
Macfarlane Group PLC is a public company listed on the London Stock Exchange (’the Company’), incorporated and domiciled 
in	the	United	Kingdom	and	registered	in	Scotland.	The	Company’s	registered	office	is	3	Park	Gardens,	Glasgow,	G3	7YE.

Basis of accounting
The principal activities of the Company and its subsidiaries (’the Group’) and the nature of the Group’s operations are set out 
in	the	strategic	report	on	pages	4	to	40.	The	2021	financial	statements	have	been	prepared	in	accordance	with	International	
Financial	Reporting	Standards	(IFRSs)	as	adopted	by	the	United	Kingdom.	These	consolidated	financial	statements	are	
presented in Sterling, which is the Company’s functional currency. All amounts have been rounded to the nearest thousand, 
unless otherwise indicated.

The	financial	statements	have	been	prepared	on	the	historical	cost	basis.	The	revaluation	reserve	relates	to	a	period	before	
transition to IFRS.

Going concern
The	Directors,	in	their	consideration	of	going	concern,	have	reviewed	the	Group’s	future	cash	flow	forecasts	and	profit	
projections, which they believe are based on an appropriate assessment of the market and past experience. The Group’s 
business	activities,	together	with	the	factors	likely	to	affect	its	future	development,	performance	and	financial	position	are	
set out in the Strategic Report on pages 4 to 40.

The	Group’s	principal	financial	risks	in	the	medium	term	relate	to	liquidity	and	credit	risk.	Liquidity	risk	is	managed	by	ensuring	
that the Group’s day-to-day working capital requirements are met by having access to banking facilities with suitable terms 
and conditions to accommodate the requirements of the Group’s operations. The Group has a committed borrowing facility 
of £30m with Lloyds Banking Group PLC in place until December 2025. The facility bears interest at normal commercial rates 
and	carries	standard	financial	covenants	in	relation	to	interest	cover	and	levels	of	headroom	over	trade	receivables.	Credit	risk	
is mitigated by applying considerable rigour in managing the Group’s trade receivables. The Directors believe that the Group 
is	adequately	placed	to	manage	its	financial	risks	effectively,	despite	any	economic	uncertainty.

The	Directors	are	of	the	opinion	that	the	Group’s	cash	flow	forecasts	and	profit	projections,	which	they	believe	are	based	on	a	
prudent assessment of the market and past experience taking account of reasonably possible changes in trading performance 
given current market and economic conditions, show that the Group should be able to operate within the current facility and 
comply with its banking covenants. The Directors have modelled a range of scenarios, including a central case, a downside 
scenario, a severe but plausible downside and a reverse stress test, over a three-year horizon. Details are set out in the 
Viability statement review on page 19.

After making enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company and the Group have adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for a period extending at least the next twelve months from the date of approval of these 
financial	statements.	For	this	reason,	they	continue	to	adopt	the	going	concern	basis	in	preparing	the	financial	statements.

Critical judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
The	preparation	of	financial	statements	requires	management	to	make	estimates	and	assumptions	that	affect	the	amounts	
reported for assets and liabilities as at the balance sheet date and the amounts reported for revenues and expenses during 
the	year.	Due	to	the	nature	of	estimation,	the	actual	outcomes	may	well	differ	from	these	estimates.

Critical judgements
No	significant	critical	judgements	have	been	made	in	the	current	or	prior	year.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The	key	sources	of	estimation	uncertainty	that	have	a	significant	effect	on	the	carrying	amounts	of	assets	and	liabilities	 
are discussed below:

Retirement benefit obligations 
The	determination	of	any	defined	benefit	pension	scheme	asset	or	liability	is	based	on	assumptions	determined	with	
independent	actuarial	advice.	The	key	assumptions	used	include	discount	rate,	inflation	rate	and	mortality	assumptions,	 
for which a sensitivity analysis is provided in note 24. The Directors consider that those sensitivities represent reasonable 
sensitivities	which	could	occur	in	the	next	financial	year.

Valuation of trade receivables 
The provision held against trade receivables is based on applying an expected credit loss model and related estimates of 
recoverable amounts, as detailed in note 14. Whilst every attempt is made to ensure that the provision held against doubtful 
trade receivables is as accurate as possible, there remains a risk that the provision may not match the level of debt, which 
ultimately proves uncollectable. For illustration only, an increase in the average default rate of overdue trade receivables  
from 1.37% to 2.43% above the historic loss rates observed would lead to an increase of £560,000 in the provision required.

86   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Alternative performance measures 
In	measuring	the	financial	performance	and	position,	the	financial	measures	used	in	certain	limited	cases	include	those	which	
have been derived from the reported results in order to eliminate factors which due to their unusual nature and size distort 
year-on-year comparisons to a material extent and/or provide useful information to stakeholders. Where such items arise,  
the Directors will classify such items as separately disclosed non-recurring items and provide details of these items to enable 
users	of	the	accounts	to	understand	the	impact	on	the	financial	statements.

To the extent that a measurement under Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (’GAAP’) is adjusted for a separately 
disclosed	non-recurring	item,	this	is	referred	to	as	an	Alternative	Performance	Measure	(’APM’).	We	believe	that	the	APM	defined	
below,	and	the	comparable	GAAP	measurement,	provides	a	useful	basis	for	measuring	the	financial	performance	and	position.	

In	addition	to	the	various	performance	measures	defined	under	IFRS	the	Group	reports	operating	profit	before	amortisation	
as a measure to assist in understanding the underlying performance of the Group and its businesses when compared to similar 
companies.	Operating	profit	before	amortisation	is	not	defined	under	IFRS	and,	as	a	result,	does	not	comply	with	Generally	
Accepted Accounting Practice (’GAAP’) and is therefore known as an alternative performance measure. Accordingly, this 
measure, which is not designed to be a substitute for any of the IFRS measures of performance, may not be directly comparable 
with	other	companies’	alternative	performance	measures.	Operating	profit	before	amortisation	is	defined	as	operating	profit	
before customer relationships and brand values amortisation reconciled in the table below.

Continuing operations

Operating profit before amortisation
Customer relationships/brand values amortisation

Operating profit

Year to 31
December
2021
£000

23,366
(3,311)

20,055

Restated*
Year to 31
December
2020
£000

16,179
(2,520)

13,659

*	In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

Net	bank	funds/(debt)	also	represents	an	Alternative	Performance	Measure	as	defined	and	reconciled	to	the	statutory	
measure in note 22.

Changes in accounting policies in 2021
There	are	no	new	accounting	policies	applied	in	2021	which	have	had	a	material	effect	on	these	accounts.	In	addition,	the	
Directors do not consider that the adoption of new and revised standards and interpretations issued by the IASB in 2021  
has	had	any	material	impact	on	the	financial	statements	of	the	Group.

New accounting standards and interpretations
The Group is currently assessing the potential impact of new and revised standards and interpretations issued by the IASB 
that	will	be	effective	from	1	January	2022.	None	of	these	have	been	adopted	early.

•  Amendments to IFRS3 (reference to the conceptual framework)
•  Amendments to IAS16 (proceeds before intended use)
•  Amendments	to	IAS37	(cost	of	fulfilling	a	contract) 

The	Directors	do	not	expect	that	the	adoption	of	the	Standards	listed	above	will	have	a	material	impact	on	the	financial	
statements of the Group in future periods.

Summary of significant accounting policies
The following accounting policies have been applied consistently for items which are considered to be material in relation  
to	the	financial	statements.

The	consolidated	financial	statements	include	the	financial	statements	of	the	parent	company	and	its	subsidiaries,	all	of	 
which	are	wholly-owned,	to	the	end	of	the	financial	year.	The	Group	does	not	have	any	associates	or	other	joint	arrangements	 
as	defined	by	IFRS	10	’Consolidated Financial Statements’.

87

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Accounting policies (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

(a) Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. Control exists when the Group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns 
from	its	involvement	with	the	entity	and	has	the	ability	to	affect	those	returns	through	its	power	over	the	entity.	In	assessing	
control, the Group takes into consideration potential voting rights. The acquisition date is the date on which control is 
transferred to the acquirer.

The	financial	statements	of	subsidiaries	are	included	in	the	consolidated	financial	statements	from	the	date	that	control	
commences until the date that control ceases. Losses applicable to the non-controlling interests in a subsidiary are allocated 
to	the	non-controlling	interests	even	if	doing	so	causes	the	non-controlling	interests	to	have	a	deficit	balance.

Business combinations
The acquisition of subsidiaries is accounted for under the acquisition method. The acquired business is measured at the 
effective	date	of	acquisition,	defined	as	the	date	control	is	acquired,	as	the	aggregate	fair	value	of	assets,	liabilities	and	
contingent liabilities as required under IFRS 3 ’Business Combinations’. Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the fair  
value	of	the	separately	identifiable	net	assets	of	the	acquired	business	is	represented	as	goodwill.	Contingent	consideration	
classified	as	a	liability	will	be	subsequently	re-measured	through	the	consolidated	income	statement.

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the period are included in the consolidated income statement  
from	the	effective	date	of	acquisition	or	up	to	the	effective	date	of	disposal.	The	consolidated	gain	or	loss	on	disposal	of	a	
subsidiary	is	the	difference	between	the	net	proceeds	of	sale	and	the	Group's	share	of	the	subsidiary's	net	assets	together	
with	the	carrying	value	of	any	related	goodwill	at	the	effective	date	of	disposal.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation
Intra-Group balances and transactions, and any unrealised income and expenses arising from intra-Group transactions,  
are eliminated on consolidation.

Discontinued operations
A	disposal	group	qualifies	as	discontinued	operation	if	it	is	a	component	of	an	entity	that	either	has	been	disposed	of,	or	is	
classified	as	held	for	sale,	and:	

•  represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations; or 
• 
• 

is part of a single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations; or 
is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale. 

Discontinued operations are excluded from the results of continuing operations and are presented as a single amount as 
profit	or	loss	after	tax	from	discontinued	operations	in	the	income	statement.

(b) Goodwill and other intangible assets
Goodwill
Goodwill arising on a business combination is recognised as an asset and represents the excess of the cost of acquisition over 
the	net	fair	values	of	the	separately	identifiable	assets	and	liabilities	of	the	acquired	business	or	subsidiary	at	the	effective	
date of acquisition. Where the cost of an acquisition includes contingent consideration, this is based on our best assessment 
of the likely level of deferred consideration payable based on the conditions and information available at the time of approving 
the	financial	statements.

Goodwill	is	allocated	to	cash	generating	units	(’CGUs’)	expected	to	benefit	from	the	synergies	of	the	combination,	for	the	
purpose of impairment testing. The carrying value of goodwill for each CGU is not amortised but is considered annually and 
also reviewed where management has reason to believe that a change in circumstances may give rise to any impairment or 
more frequently when there is an indication that the unit may be impaired. If the recoverable amount of the cash-generating 
unit	is	less	than	the	carrying	amount	of	the	unit,	the	impairment	loss	is	allocated	first	to	reduce	the	carrying	amount	of	any	
goodwill allocated to the unit and then to the other assets of the unit pro-rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each 
asset in the unit. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed in a subsequent period.

Other intangible assets
Other	intangible	assets	comprise	separately	identifiable	intangible	assets	recognised	on	the	acquisitions	of	businesses	or	
subsidiary companies. They are recorded at fair value on acquisition less any amortisation and subsequent impairment. These 
are primarily Brand values, which are calculated on the Relief from Royalty method, and Customer relationship values, which 
are calculated on the Excess Earnings method based on the net anticipated earnings stream. Brand values are amortised on  
a	straight-line	basis	of	up	to	five	years	and	Customer	relationships	are	amortised	on	a	straight-line	basis	over	ten	years.

88   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Impairment
The carrying values of the Group’s assets are reviewed annually to determine if there is any indication of impairment. If any 
such	indication	exists,	the	assets’	recoverable	values	are	calculated	as	the	present	value	of	the	estimated	future	cash	flows,	
discounted at appropriate pre-tax discount rates. Impairment losses are recognised when the carrying value of an asset or 
CGU exceeds recoverable value. Impairment losses are recognised in the consolidated income statement.

(c) Revenue recognition
The Group is engaged in the delivery of packaging materials, packing machinery, labels and labels machinery to customers. 
Revenue	is	not	recognised	if	there	is	significant	uncertainty	regarding	the	recovery	of	the	revenue	consideration.	Revenue	
represents amounts receivable for goods provided to third parties in the normal course of business, net of discounts, 
customer rebates, VAT and other sales related taxes.
IFRS 15 ’Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ requires the Group to apportion revenues from customer contracts to 
separate	performance	obligations	and	recognise	revenues	as	each	performance	obligation	is	satisfied.	The	Group’s	revenue	 
is generated from the delivery of the goods to customers and that this represents a single performance obligation. The 
Group does not enter into any repurchase agreements. It is therefore appropriate to recognise revenue at the point of 
transfer of goods to the customer, consistent with the revenue recognition framework in IFRS 15.

(d) Leasing
The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability for all lease arrangements in which it is the 
lessee,	except	for	short-term	leases	(defined	as	leases	with	a	lease	term	of	12	months	or	less)	and	leases	of	low	value	assets	
below £4,000. For these short-term or low value leases, the Group recognises the lease payments as an operating expense 
disclosed in administrative expenses on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of lease payments that are not paid at the commencement date, 
discounted using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate cannot be readily determined, the Group uses appropriate 
incremental borrowing rates.

Lease liabilities are presented on two separate lines in the balance sheet for amounts due within one year and amounts due 
beyond	one	year.	The	lease	liability	is	subsequently	measured	by	increasing	the	carrying	amount	to	reflect	interest	on	the	
lease	liability	(using	the	effective	interest	method)	and	by	reducing	the	liability	by	payments	made.	The	Company	remeasures	
the lease liability (and adjusts the related right-of-use asset) whenever the lease term has changed or a lease contract is 
modified	and	the	modification	is	not	accounted	for	as	a	separate	lease.

Right-of-use (’ROU’) assets comprise the initial measurement of the corresponding lease liability and are subsequently 
measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. ROU assets are depreciated over the shorter period 
of lease term and useful life of the underlying asset. If a lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset or the cost of the 
ROU	asset	reflects	that	the	Company	expects	to	exercise	a	purchase	option,	the	related	ROU	asset	is	depreciated	over	the	
useful life of the asset. Depreciation starts on the commencement date of the lease.

As a practical expedient, IFRS 16 permits a lessee not to separate non-lease components, and instead account for any lease 
and associated non-lease components as a single arrangement. The Company has not used this practical expedient and has 
separated out the non-lease components for its leases. These non-lease components, typically servicing and maintenance 
costs, have been recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis and disclosed in administrative expenses in the 
consolidated income statement.

The Group’s incremental borrowing rates applied to lease liabilities in 2021 ranged between 2.75% and 4.34%, with the average 
rate applied across all leases being 3.19%.

ROU assets will be tested for impairment in accordance with IAS 36 Impairment of Assets.

Movements in ROU assets and lease liabilities are set out in note 12 and note 17 respectively.

(e) Foreign currencies
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated to the respective functional currencies of Group entities at the foreign 
exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the 
balance sheet date are retranslated to the functional currency at the exchange rate ruling at that date. Foreign exchange 
differences	arising	on	translation	are	recognised	in	the	consolidated	income	statement.	Non-monetary	assets	and	liabilities,	
measured at historical cost in a foreign currency, are translated using the exchange rates at the date of the transaction. 
Non-monetary assets and liabilities, stated at fair value in a foreign currency, are retranslated to the functional currency  
at the exchange rates ruling at the dates the fair value was determined.

89

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Accounting policies (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

(e) Foreign currencies (continued)
Assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on consolidation, are translated 
to the Group’s presentational currency, Sterling, at the exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. Revenues and expenses 
of foreign operations are translated at an average rate for the year where this rate approximates to the exchange rates ruling at 
the	dates	of	the	transactions.	Exchange	differences	arising	from	the	translation	of	foreign	operations	are	reported	as	an	item	
of other comprehensive income and accumulated in the translation reserve.

(f) Retirement benefits
Defined contribution schemes
A	defined	contribution	scheme	is	a	post-employment	benefit	scheme	under	which	the	Company	pays	fixed	contributions	 
into a separate entity and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions  
to	defined	contribution	pension	schemes	are	recognised	as	an	expense	in	the	consolidated	income	statement	in	the	periods	
during which services are rendered by employees.

Defined benefit schemes
A	defined	benefit	scheme	is	a	post-employment	benefit	scheme	other	than	a	defined	contribution	scheme.	The	Group’s	 
net	retirement	benefit	obligation	in	respect	of	its	defined	benefit	pension	scheme	is	calculated	by	estimating	the	amount	of	
future	benefits	that	employees	have	earned	in	return	for	their	service	in	current	and	prior	periods.	These	benefits	are	then	
discounted to determine the present value, and the fair values of any scheme investments, at bid price, are deducted. The net 
interest	on	the	net	retirement	benefit	obligation	for	the	year	is	calculated	by	applying	the	discount	rate	used	to	measure	the	
defined	benefit	obligation	at	the	beginning	of	the	year.

The discount rate is the yield at the reporting date on bonds that have a credit rating of at least AA that have maturity dates 
approximating	to	the	average	duration	of	the	Group’s	retirement	benefit	obligations	and	that	are	denominated	in	the	
currency	in	which	the	benefits	are	expected	to	be	paid.

Remeasurements	arising	from	defined	benefit	plans	comprise	actuarial	gains	and	losses,	returns	on	plan	assets	(excluding	
interest)	and	the	effect	of	the	asset	ceiling	(if	any,	excluding	interest).	Remeasurements	are	recognised	in	the	statement	 
of	other	comprehensive	income	and	all	other	expenses	related	to	defined	benefit	schemes	charged	in	staff	costs	in	the	
consolidated income statement.

When	the	benefits	of	a	scheme	are	changed,	or	when	a	scheme	is	curtailed,	the	portion	of	the	changed	benefit	related	to	past	
service by employees, or the gain or loss on curtailment, is recognised immediately in the consolidated income statement 
when the scheme amendment or curtailment occurs.

The	calculation	of	the	retirement	benefit	obligations	is	performed	by	a	qualified	actuary	using	the	projected	unit	credit	method.	
When	the	calculation	results	in	a	benefit	to	the	Group,	the	recognised	asset	is	limited	to	the	present	value	of	benefits	available	
in	the	form	of	any	future	refunds	from	the	plan	or	reductions	in	future	contributions	and	takes	into	account	the	adverse	effect	
of the present value of any minimum funding requirements.

The	Group’s	defined	benefit	pension	scheme	covers	the	Group	companies	at	December	2002.	The	net	defined	benefit	cost	
of the scheme is apportioned to these participating entities based on the employment history of scheme members, who are 
allocated to the relevant subsidiary, with any remaining members allocated to the parent company.

(g) Taxation
The tax expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax.

Current	tax	is	payable	based	on	the	taxable	profit	for	the	year.	Taxable	profit	differs	from	profit	before	tax	as	reported	in	the	
consolidated income statement because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years 
and excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The current tax liability is calculated using tax rates that have been 
enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and any adjustments in respect of prior years.

Deferred	tax	balances	represent	the	tax	expected	to	be	payable	or	recoverable	on	differences	between	the	carrying	amounts	
of	assets	and	liabilities	in	the	financial	statements	and	the	corresponding	tax	bases	used	in	the	computation	of	taxable	profit	
and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not discounted.

The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable	that	sufficient	taxable	profits	will	be	available	to	allow	all	or	part	of	the	asset	to	be	recovered.

Deferred	tax	liabilities	are	generally	recognised	for	all	taxable	temporary	differences.

90   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is 
realised based on tax laws and rates that have been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged 
or credited in the consolidated income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited in other comprehensive 
income, in which case the deferred tax is also recorded in the consolidated statement of other comprehensive income.

(h) Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost, with assets revalued before the date of transition to IFRS recorded at 
deemed cost.

No	depreciation	is	provided	on	land.	Depreciation	is	recognised	so	as	to	write	off	the	cost	of	the	property,	plant	and	
equipment, less their estimated residual values, by equal annual instalments over their estimated useful lives. The rates of 
depreciation use the straight-line method and vary between 2% and 5% per annum on buildings and 7% and 33% per annum 
on plant and equipment. Rates of depreciation are reviewed annually to ensure they remain relevant and residual values are 
reviewed to ensure they remain appropriate once in each calendar year.

(i) Inventories
Inventories are consistently stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost represents purchase price. In the case  
of	work	in	progress	and	finished	goods,	cost	comprises	direct	materials,	direct	labour	costs	and	attributable	overheads	that	
have been incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition. Net realisable value is based on the 
estimated selling price, less any further costs expected to be incurred to completion and disposal. Inventories are stated less 
provisions required for slow-moving and obsolete items, where appropriate.

(j) Financial instruments
Financial	assets	and	financial	liabilities	are	recognised	in	the	Group’s	balance	sheet	when	the	Group	becomes	a	party	to	the	
contractual provisions of the instrument.

Financial assets categorised as investments, comprise investments in debt and equity securities and are initially recognised 
at fair value with any subsequent gains or losses recognised in the consolidated income statement.

Other	financial	assets	comprise	trade	and	other	receivables	that	have	fixed	or	determinable	recoveries.	The	classification	
takes	account	of	the	nature	and	purpose	of	the	financial	assets	and	is	determined	on	initial	recognition.	Trade	and	other	
receivables are measured at amortised cost less impairment under the Expected Credit Loss (’ECL’) model.

Indicators	are	assessed	for	the	impairment	of	financial	assets	at	each	balance	sheet	date.	Financial	assets	are	impaired	when	
there	is	objective	evidence	that	as	a	result	of	one	or	more	events	that	occurred	after	the	initial	recognition	of	the	financial	
asset,	the	estimated	future	cash	flows	have	been	impacted.	For	trade	receivables	the	amount	of	the	impairment	is	the	
difference	between	the	asset’s	carrying	amount	and	the	present	value	of	estimated	future	cash	flows.

The	carrying	amount	of	the	financial	asset	is	reduced	by	the	impairment	loss	directly	for	all	financial	assets	with	the	exception	
of trade receivables where the carrying amount is measured on an expected credit loss model at inception rather than an 
incurred	loss	model.	When	a	trade	receivable	is	uncollectible,	it	is	written	off	against	the	provision	made	on	inception	or	at	a	
previous	reporting	period	end.	Subsequent	recoveries	of	amounts	previously	written	off	are	credited	against	the	provision.	 
In accordance with IFRS 9 ’Financial Instruments’ changes in the carrying value of the provision are recognised in the 
consolidated income statement.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and on demand deposits, readily convertible to a known amount of cash 
and	are	subject	to	insignificant	risk	of	changes	in	value.

Financial liabilities and equity instruments	are	classified	as	either	financial	liabilities	or	as	equity	in	accordance	with	the	
substance of the contractual arrangements.

Financial	liabilities	comprise	solely	other	financial	liabilities	under	the	terms	of	IFRS	7.	Financial	liabilities,	including	borrowings,	
are	initially	measured	at	fair	value,	net	of	transaction	costs.	Other	financial	liabilities	are	subsequently	measured	at	amortised	
cost,	with	interest	expense	measured	on	an	effective	yield	basis.

Equity instruments are any contracts evidencing a residual interest in the assets of the Company after deducting all of its 
liabilities. Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

Derivative	financial	instruments	were	not	used	in	the	current	or	preceding	financial	year.

91

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Accounting policies (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

(k) Provisions
Property provisions
The Group has a number of property leases. Under IAS 37 an entity must recognise a provision if a present obligation has 
arisen as a result of a past event, payment is probable and the amount can be estimated reliably. Where it is probable at the 
balance sheet date that there is a liability in respect of restoring the property to its original condition a provision is made for 
management’s	best	estimate	of	the	cost	of	fulfilling	any	residual	repairing	obligation	for	that	property	lease.

The Group may make the determination to exit a property lease before the expiry date, when it does not have a commercial 
rationale to continue to occupy the property. In this case the Group could have surplus properties and it would seek to attract 
a new tenant to obtain rental income from a sub-lease to cover its ongoing liabilities under the remaining period of the head 
lease. If there is likely to be a rental void for a period of time, then a provision is made at each balance sheet date to cover 
management’s best estimate of the future cost of the likely void period.

(l) Share-based payments
The grant date fair value of share-based payments awards granted to employees is recognised as an employee expense, with  
a corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the awards.  
The fair value of the awards granted is measured using an option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions 
upon	which	the	awards	were	granted.	The	amount	recognised	as	an	expense	is	adjusted	to	reflect	the	actual	number	of	awards	
for which the related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately 
recognised as an expense is based on the number of awards that do meet the related service and non-market performance 
conditions at the vesting date. For share-based payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the grant date fair value of the 
share-based	payment	is	measured	to	reflect	such	conditions	and	there	is	no	true-up	for	differences	between	expected	and	
actual outcomes.

Details of the determination of the fair value of equity-settled share-based transactions are set out in note 25.

92   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the financial statements
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

1. Business and geographical segments
(a) Business segments
The segmental information reported below and on the next page does not include any amounts from discontinued 
operations which are described in more detail in note 6.

The Group’s principal business segment is Packaging Distribution, comprising the distribution of packaging materials and 
supply of storage and warehousing services in the UK, Ireland and Europe. This segment accounts for over 85% of Group 
revenue	and	profit.	

The Manufacturing Operations segment comprises the design, manufacture and assembly of timber, corrugated and 
foam-based packaging materials in the UK. 

External revenues from major products and services

Packaging Distribution
Design, manufacture and assembly of timber, corrugated and foam-based packaging materials 

External revenues from Continuing operations

2021
£000

239,508
24,957

264,465

Restated*
2020
£000

201,739
8,488

210,227

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

2021
Total
£000

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Restated*
Manufacturing
Operations
£000

Restated*
2020
Total
£000

(b) Segmental information

Revenue
Total revenue
Inter-segment revenue

External revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Net operating expenses

Operating profit/(loss) before  
 amortisation
Amortisation

Operating profit/(loss)

Net	finance	costs

Profit before tax
Tax

Profit for the year

Capital additions

Depreciation/amortisation

Segment assets
Segment liabilities

Net assets

239,508
–

239,508
161,896

77,612
57,915

19,697
2,642

17,055

28,527
3,570

24,957
13,102

11,855
8,186

3,669
669

3,000

268,035
3,570

264,465
174,998

89,467
66,101

23,366
3,311

20,055

1,390

18,665
4,917

13,748
(1,150)

12,598

29,615

11,685

201,739
–

201,739
136,177

65,562
49,054

16,508
2,520

13,988

2,312

9,913

Profit for the year from continuing operations
(Loss)/profit for the year from discontinued operations

14,031

10,095

15,584

1,590

185,111
(110,212)

31,056
(11,061)

216,167
(121,273)

152,272
(80,476)

74,899

19,995

94,894

71,796

*	In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

Inter-segment revenues are charged at prevailing market prices.

11,237
2,749

8,488
4,223

4,265
4,594

(329)
–

(329)

47

234

5,482
(3,100)

2,382

212,976
2,749

210,227
140,400

69,827
53,648

16,179
2,520

13,659

1,226

12,433
2,696

9,737
434

10,171

2,359

10,147

157,754
(83,576)

74,178

93

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

1. Business and geographical segments (continued)
(c) Geographical segments
The Group’s operations are primarily located in the UK and Europe.

Packaging Distribution activities are primarily in the UK, with some smaller activity in Europe,

Manufacturing Operations are primarily in the UK.

Continuing operations
Europe
£000

UK
£000

2021 
Total
£000

Restated*
Continuing operations

UK
£000

Europe
£000

External revenue

Operating profit

Non-current assets

Capital additions

259,265

19,870

124,038

29,615

5,200

264,465

206,736

185

5

–

20,055

124,043

29,615

13,418

91,057

2,359

3,491

241

12

–

Restated*
2020
Total
£000

210,227

13,659

91,069

2,359

(d) Information about major customers
No single customer accounts for more than 10% of the Group’s external revenues. Customer dependencies are regularly 
monitored.

2. Operating profit

Operating profit from continuing operations has been arrived at after charging:

Cost of inventories recognised as an expense in the consolidated income statement
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 10)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Acquisition related costs
Staff	costs

The detailed analysis of auditor’s remuneration is provided below:

Audit services
Fees	payable	to	the	auditor	for	the	audit	of	these	financial	statements
Fees payable to auditor for the audit of the Company’s subsidiaries

Total audit fees

Non-audit services
Other assurance services for the audit of the Company pension scheme

Total non-audit fees

Total fees paid to auditor

2021
£000

183,507
3,311
1,475
6,899
217
40,201

Restated*
2020
£000

138,582
2,520
1,293
6,335
19
30,366

57
207

264

11

11

275

44
140

184

11

11

195

The Audit Committee reviews and approves non-audit work which the auditor performs, including the fees paid for such work, 
to ensure that the auditor’s objectivity and independence is not compromised.

*	In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

94   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

3. Staff costs

The average monthly number of employees (including Directors) was:

Production
Sales and distribution
Administration

The costs incurred in respect of these employees were:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs
 Contributions	to	defined	contribution	schemes
 Contributions	to	defined	benefit	schemes
Share-based payments (note 25)

2021
No.

245
512
281

1,038

2021
£000

38,985
3,840

1,828
130
685

2020
No.

179
485
246

910

2020
£000

30,124
2,928

1,670
230
75

45,468

35,027

In	accordance	with	section	411	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	the	above	noted	staff	numbers	and	staff	costs	combine	continuing	and	
discontinued	operations.	The	staff	costs	from	continuing	operations	are	£40,201,000	(2020:	£30,366,000)	as	set	out	in	note	2.	

4. Finance costs

Interest on bank borrowings
Interest on leases
Finance	cost	relating	to	defined	benefit	scheme	(note	24)

Finance costs from continuing operations

*	In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

5. Tax

Current tax 
United Kingdom corporation tax 
Foreign tax
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Current tax charge

Deferred tax
Current year
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Change in corporation tax rate

Deferred tax charge (note 18)

Total tax charge

2021
£000

414
969
7

Restated*
2020
£000

455
681
90

1,390

1,226

2021
£000

2020
£000

3,672
245
72

3,989

(76)
(61)
1,277

1,140

2,343
121
(90)

2,374

37
53
367

457

5,129

2,831

The standard rate of tax, based on the UK average rate of corporation tax is 19%. Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated 
at the rates prevailing in these jurisdictions.

The actual tax charge varies from the standard rate of tax on the results in the consolidated income statement for the reasons 
set out below.

95

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

5. Tax (continued)

Profit before tax from continuing operations
(Loss)/profit before tax from discontinued operations

Profit before tax from total operations

Tax on profit at 19% (2020: 19%)

Factors affecting tax charge for the year:
Change in rate for deferred tax from 19% to 25%
Non-deductible expenses
Difference	on	overseas	tax	rates
Utilisation of tax losses not previously recognised
Changes in estimates related to prior years

Tax charge for the year

Tax charge attributable to continuing operations
Tax charge attributable to discontinued operations

Tax charge for the year

2021
£000

18,665
(938)

17,727

2020
£000

12,433
569

13,002

3,368

2,470

1,277
413
(37)
–
108

5,129

4,917
212

5,129

367
107
(18)
(58)
(37)

2,831

2,696
135

2,831

Weighted average effective tax rate for the year

28.9%

21.8%

Macfarlane	Group’s	corporate	tax	structure	is	such	that	the	effective	corporation	tax	rate	should	be	relatively	close	to	the	
prevailing tax rate with non-deductible expenses usually the principal reason for any variation.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December 2021 have been calculated based on a long-term corporation tax rate of 
25%,	which	had	been	substantively	enacted	at	the	balance	sheet	date.	This	changed	from	19%	effective	from	24	May	2021.

6. Discontinued operations
On 31 December 2021, the Group entered into a sale agreement to dispose of Macfarlane Labels Limited and its subsidiaries 
Macfarlane Group Ireland (Labels & Packaging) Limited and Macfarlane Group Sweden AB (collectively ’Macfarlane Labels’). 
Macfarlane Labels designs and prints high quality self-adhesive and resealable labels, principally for FMCG companies. The 
proceeds from the sale will be strategically invested in the continuing growth of the Group’s protective packaging businesses.

The	results	of	the	discontinued	operations,	which	have	been	included	as	a	single	item	of	(loss)/profit	from	discontinued	
operations for the year, were as follows:

Revenue
Expenses

(Loss)/profit	before	tax
Attributable tax expense

(Loss)/profit for the year from discontinued operations

2021
£000

21,220
22,158

(938)
212

(1,150)

2020
£000

19,802
19,233

569
135

434

During	the	year	Macfarlane	Labels	consumed	£3,000	(2020:	contributed	£84,000)	of	the	Group’s	net	operating	cash	flows,	 
paid £512,000 (2020: £193,000) in respect of investing activities and received £40,000 (2020: £953,000) in respect of 
financing	activities.

The loss for the year of £1,150,000 is after charging goodwill impairment of £987,000 and costs of disposal of £283,000. 

£6,085,000	of	the	estimated	total	gross	proceeds	of	£6,338,000	was	received	on	31	December	2021.	The	final	total	gross	
proceeds	are	subject	to	adjustment	following	finalisation	and	agreement	of	the	net	asset	value	of	Macfarlane	Labels	at	the	
completion date.

96   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Details	of	the	disposal	proceeds	in	the	cash	flow	statement	on	page	85	are	set	out	below:

Estimated total consideration
Estimated deferred consideration

Consideration received
Cash retained by acquirer
Costs of disposal

Proceeds from disposal

Goodwill
Tangible assets (inc. ROU assets)
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Current tax liabilities
Lease liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities

Net assets disposed

Estimated total consideration
Net assets disposed
Costs of disposal

Loss on disposal

7. Dividends

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:
Final dividend for 2020 of 1.85p per share (2019: Nil p per share)
Interim dividend for 2021 of 0.87p per share (2020: 0.70p per share)

£000

6,338
(253)

6,085
(590)
(283)

5,212

372
5,158
1,402
4,291
590
(2,825)
(732)
(234)
(1,363)
(372)

6,287

6,338
(6,287)
(283)

(232)

2021
£000

2020
£000

2,920
1,373

4,293

–
1,105

1,105

As	part	of	the	steps	taken	by	the	Company	to	preserve	cash	at	the	outbreak	of	the	Covid-19	pandemic	in	the	first	half	of	2020,	
the	Directors	cancelled	the	2019	final	dividend	of	1.76p	per	share	due	for	payment	in	June	2020.

A	proposed	final	dividend	of	2.33p	per	share	will	be	paid	on	1	June	2022	to	shareholders	on	the	register	at	13	May	2022.	This	is	
subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 10 May 2022 and therefore is not included as a liability in 
these	financial	statements.

97

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

8. Earnings per share

Earnings for the purposes of calculating earnings per share
Profit	for	the	year	from	continuing	operations

(Loss)/profit	for	the	year	from	discontinued	operations

Profit	for	the	year	from	continuing	and	discontinued	operations

Number of shares in issue

Weighted average number of ordinary shares to calculate basic earnings per share
Dilutive	effect	of	Long-Term	Incentive	Plan	awards	in	issue

Weighted average number of ordinary shares to calculate diluted earnings per share

Basic earnings per share from continuing operations

Diluted earnings per share from continuing operations

Basic earnings per share from discontinued operations

Diluted earnings per share from discontinued operations

Basic earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations

Diluted earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations

*	In	accordance	with	IFRS5	2020	has	been	restated	to	reflect	the	result	of	the	Labels	division,	sold	on	31	December	2021,	as	a	discontinued	operation.

2021
£000

Restated*
2020
£000

13,748

(1,150)

12,598

2021
Number of
shares
‘000

157,812
1,627

159,439

8.71p

8.62p

(0.73)p

(0.72)p

7.98p

7.90p

9,737

434

10,171

2020
Number of
shares
‘000

157,812
703

158,515

6.17p

6.14p

0.28p

0.27p

6.45p

6.42p

9. Subsidiary companies
Subsidiary	companies,	with	names,	countries	of	incorporation	and	registered	offices,	are	shown	on	page	132.

The Group has agreed to exempt the four companies, Harrison’s Packaging Limited (Company number 06999588), Leyland 
Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited (Company number 03775077), Carters Packaging (Cornwall) Limited (Company number 
12994605) and Carters Packaging Limited (Company number 04691446) from the provisions of the Companies Act relating  
to the audit of individual accounts by virtue of section 479A.

The trade and assets of Harrison’s Packaging Limited (Company number 06999588) and Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) 
Limited (Company number 03775077) were hived up into the major trading company Macfarlane Group UK Limited (’MGUK’) 
during 2021.

98   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

10. Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill
Other intangible assets

Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill

Fair value on acquisition
At 1 January 
Additions (note 23)
Impairment (note 6)
Disposals (note 6)

At 31 December

Accumulated impairment losses
At 1 January
At 31 December

Carrying value
At 31 December 2021

At 31 December 2020

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

46,107
14,466

60,573

7,493
6,836

14,329

2021
Total
£000

53,600
21,302

74,902

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

2021
Total
£000

44,108
1,999
–
–

46,107

1,359
7,493
(987)
(372)

7,493

45,467
9,492
(987)
(372)

53,600

2020
Total
£000

45,467
15,131

60,598

2020
Total
£000

45,303
164
–
–

45,467

–
–

–
–

–
–

–
–

46,107

7,493

53,600

44,108

1,359

45,467

On 26 February 2021, Macfarlane Group UK Limited (’MGUK’) acquired 100% of GWP Holdings Limited (’GWP’). Goodwill 
arising on the GWP acquisition was added to the Manufacturing Operations CGU.

On 31 March 2021, MGUK acquired 100% of Carters Packaging (Cornwall) Limited (’Carters Packaging’). Goodwill arising  
on the Carters Packaging acquisition was added to the Packaging Distribution CGU. 

On 31 December 2021 Macfarlane Group PLC sold 100% of Macfarlane Labels Limited and its subsidiaries Macfarlane  
Group Ireland (Labels & Packaging) Limited and Macfarlane Group Sweden AB (collectively ‘Labels’). At the 30 June 2021 an 
impairment review was carried out on the Labels CGU, contained within the Manufacturing Operations CGU, comparing the 
value	in	use	and	the	indicative	offer	made	by	the	ultimate	acquirer	of	Labels	to	the	consolidated	carrying	value	of	Labels	at	
that date. As a result of this review an impairment charge was taken of £987,000 at the 30 June 2021.

Goodwill related to those businesses included with Manufacturing Operations has been disposed of in 2021. 

At 31 December 2021, the Group had two CGU Groupings to which goodwill had been ascribed namely:

(i)  Packaging Distribution, comprising goodwill arising on all acquisitions in this segment since 2001; and 
(ii)  Manufacturing Operations, comprising goodwill arising on the acquisition of GWP. 

The recoverable amount of each CGU Grouping is determined using ’value in use’ calculations with key assumptions relating 
to discount rates, sales growth rates, projected gross margin and overhead costs. A post-tax discount rate of 12.2% (2020: 
9.0%)	is	used	for	both	CGU's	reflecting	the	Group's	weighted	average	cost	of	capital	adjusted	for	appropriate	market	risk,	
which	is	considered	to	be	the	most	definitive	basis	for	arriving	at	a	discount	rate.	The	Group	believes	the	risk	profiles	across	
the	markets	in	which	it	operates	are	not	significantly	different	and	has	therefore	deemed	it	appropriate	to	apply	the	same	
discount rate to both CGUs. The pre-tax discount rate is 15.1% (2020: 11.1%) for each CGU Grouping and the Group’s 
effective	tax	rate	is	then	applied	to	give	the	post-tax	discount	rate.

Sales growth rates of 1%, changes in gross margin and overhead costs are based on our expectation of future performance  
in the markets in which we operate. These are consistent with our budgets for 2022 and strategic plans for future years.  
The	assumptions	are	used	to	extrapolate	cash	flows	for	five	years	after	which	a	terminal	value	is	calculated	assuming	no	
inherent growth.

99

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

10. Goodwill and other intangible assets (continued)
The Directors believe the assumptions used are appropriate. In addition they have conducted a sensitivity analysis to 
determine the changes in assumptions that would result in an impairment of the carrying amount of goodwill. Based on this 
analysis the Directors believe that any reasonable changes in the key assumptions would maintain a value for each CGU 
Grouping that exceeds its carrying amount. Therefore at 31 December 2021 no impairment charge is required against the 
carrying amount of goodwill.

Other intangible assets

Fair value on acquisition
At 1 January 
Additions (note 23)

At 31 December

Amortisation
At 1 January 
Charge for year

At 31 December

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2021

At 31 December 2020

Brand
values
£000

Customer
relationships
£000

2021
Total
£000

891
179

1,070

823
121

944

27,053
9,303

36,356

11,990
3,190

15,180

27,944
9,482

37,426

12,813
3,311

16,124

2020
Total
£000

27,653
291

27,944

10,293
2,520

12,813

126

21,176

21,302

68

15,063

15,131

Other	intangible	assets	comprise	separately	identifiable	intangible	assets	recognised	on	the	acquisitions	of	businesses	and	
subsidiary companies between 2014 and 2021. They are recorded at fair value on acquisition less subsequent amortisation.

These are primarily Brand values, which are calculated on the Relief from Royalty method and a valuation of Customer 
relationships, which is calculated on the Excess Earnings method, based on the net anticipated earnings stream. Brand values are 
calculated on royalty rates of 0.5%, consistent with an assessment of what would be charged in a typical franchise agreement. 
The valuation of Customer relationships is calculated using our best estimates of customer attrition rates, and returns, based 
on assessments of performance levels in the markets in which we operate. Brand values and Customer relationship valuations 
are	amortised	on	a	straight-line	basis	over	periods	up	to	five	years	and	over	a	ten	year	period	respectively.

At 31 December 2021, the Group retained values in respect of:

Year of 
acquisition

Company/business acquired

Brand

Customer
relationships

2014
2014
2015
2016
2016
2016
2017
2018
2018
2019
2019
2020
2021
2021

Packaging business of Lane Packaging Limited
Network Packaging Limited
One Packaging Limited
Packaging business of Colton Packaging Teesside
Packaging business of Edward McNeil Limited
Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited
Packaging business of Greenwoods Stock Boxes Limited and Nottingham Recycling Limited
Tyler Packaging (Leicester) Limited
Harrisons Packaging Limited
Ecopac (U.K.) Limited
Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited
Packaging business of Armagrip
GWP Group Limited
Carters Packaging Limited

ü

ü
ü

ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü

100   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

11. Property, plant and equipment

Cost
At 1 January 2020
Additions
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2020
Acquisitions
Additions
Transfer from Right of Use Assets
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2021

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2020
Charge for year
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2020
Acquisitions
Charge for year
Transfer from Right of Use Assets
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2021

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2021

At 31 December 2020

At 1 January 2020

Note

Property
£000

23

23

8,029
145
–
(60)

8,114
589
499
–
–
(1,797)

7,405

4,181
421
–
(60)

4,542
476
445
–
–
(1,000)

4,463

2,942

3,572

3,848

Plant,
 machinery
& vehicles
£000

28,875
659
182
(2,917)

26,799
3,070
1,633
602
(229)
(10,605)

Total
£000

36,904
804
182
(2,977)

34,913
3,659
2,132
602
(229)
(12,402)

21,270

28,675

23,102
1,298
116
(2,785)

21,731
2,319
1,544
56
(152)
(7,387)

27,283
1,719
116
(2,845)

26,273
2,795
1,989
56
(152)
(8,387)

18,111

22,574

3,159

5,068

5,773

6,101

8,640

9,621

The main components of property, plant and equipment are:

(i) 

(ii)	

 Three properties owned in our Manufacturing Operations and tenant’s improvements at a number of short and medium-term 
leases in Packaging Distribution, categorised as Property.
	A	significant	investment	in	plant	and	machinery	in	Manufacturing	Operations,	typically	corrugated	case-making	machinery,	
as well as investments in our IT hardware systems throughout the Group, which are all categorised under the combined 
heading of Plant, machinery and vehicles.

Property at net book value comprises:
Freeholds
Long leaseholds
Short leaseholds

2021
£000

2020
£000

1,001
1,820
121

2,942

1,779
1,506
287

3,572

Contractual commitments for capital expenditure for which no provision has been made in these accounts amount to 
£1,778,000 (2020: £919,000).

101

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

12. Right of use assets 

Cost
At 1 January 2020
Additions
Exchange movements
Lease	modifications
Disposals

At 31 December 2020
Acquisitions
Additions
Exchange movements
Lease	modifications
Transfer to property, plant & equipment
Disposals

At 31 December 2021

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2020
Charge for year
Exchange movements
Lease	modifications
Disposals

At 31 December 2020
Acquisitions
Charge for year
Exchange movements
Lease	modifications
Transfer to property, plant & equipment
Disposals

At 31 December 2021

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2021

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2020

Note

Property
£000

Plant,
 machinery
& vehicles
£000

23

23

25,618
625
136
5,713
(38)

32,054
2,978
7,738
(174)
1,167
–
(2,507)

41,256

4,707
5,107
20
(1,482)
(38)

8,314
–
5,564
(50)
(1,480)
–
(1,233)

11,115

6,460
1,243
–
220
(470)

7,453
876
1,365
(2)
(16)
(602)
(684)

8,390

1,516
1,633
–
(70)
(470)

2,609
160
1,718
(1)
(44)
(56)
(573)

3,813

Total
£000

32,078
1,868
136
5,933
(508)

39,507
3,854
9,103
(176)
1,151
(602)
(3,191)

49,646

6,223
6,740
20
(1,552)
(508)

10,923
160
7,282
(51)
(1,524)
(56)
(1,806)

14,928

30,141

4,577

34,718

23,740

4,844

28,584

The	property	portfolio	comprises	a	number	of	property	leases	for	periods	from	one	to	fifteen	years,	which	are	subject	to	rent	
reviews. The Group also leases the majority of its commercial vehicles, motor vehicles and forklift trucks on leases, with the 
leases running for periods of up to seven years.

102   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
13. Inventories

Raw materials and consumables
Work in progress
Finished goods and goods for resale

2021
£000

988
148
20,133

21,269

2020
£000

1,112
520
14,226

15,858

Inventories	represent	raw	materials,	work	in	progress	and	finished	goods	held	at	the	year-end	in	our	businesses	to	respond	 
to customers’ requirements. These comprise large numbers of comparatively small balances.

Local teams review inventory levels, older and obsolete inventories and provide against exposures throughout the year. The 
Group’s	executive	management	then	reviews	these	local	judgements	to	ensure	they	properly	reflect	movements	in	absolute	
inventory levels, ageing of holdings and known obsolescence.

Movement in the provisions for slow-moving and obsolete inventories

At 1 January
Acquisitions
Disposals
Additional provisions recognised in the consolidated income statement
Inventories	written	off	during	the	year

At 31 December

14. Trade and other receivables

Current
Trade receivables 
Loss allowance

Other receivables
Prepayments

Non-current
Other receivables

2021
£000

1,289
20
(184)
571
(378)

1,318

2020
£000

713
–
–
1,172
(596)

1,289

2021
£000

2020
£000

53,267
(731)

52,536
4,423
1,582

58,541

47,171
(1,148)

46,023
2,656
2,692

51,371

35

35

Trade receivables represent amounts owed by customers in respect of revenues for goods or services provided prior to the 
year end. The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to trade receivables. The average credit period taken at the reporting 
date is 54 days (2020: 54 days). No interest is charged on overdue receivables.

The Group uses external credit scoring systems to assess new customers’ credit quality and set credit limits for each customer. 
The Group has a substantial customer base covering a wide range of business segments. No individual customer represents 
more than 5% of total trade receivables. Receivables balances greater than £25,000 are reviewed by the Board twice in each year.

Since	the	inception	of	IFRS	9	‘Financial	Instruments’,	the	Group	has	applied	a	simplified	approach	to	measuring	the	ECL	 
level. This uses a provision matrix which takes into account historical credit loss experience based on the past-due status of 
receivables,	adjusted	to	reflect	current	conditions	and	management’s	estimates	of	future	economic	conditions	and	known	
recoverability issues as a means of measuring the loss allowance.

The	Group	writes	off	trade	receivables	when	there	is	no	realistic	prospect	of	recovery	with	the	amount	written	off	against	the	
loss	allowance	held.	The	credit	risk	profile	of	these	receivables	is	presented	based	on	their	past	due	status	and	the	calculated	
loss	ratios	applied	to	the	profiled	receivables	to	give	the	ECL.

103

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

14. Trade and other receivables (continued)

Risk profile category (ageing)

Current
Overdue
0 –30 days
30-60 days
60-90 days
Over 90 days

2021
£000

ECL rate

2021 ECL
 allowance
£000

39,352

0.84%

11,308
1,772
493
342

53,267

1.56%
2.43%
8.32%
41.50%

329

176
43
41
142

731

2020
£000

ECL rate

35,569

 1.59%

7,107
3,658
659
178

47,171

 3.10%
 4.71%
13.90%
53.84%

2020 ECL
allowance
£000

567

221
172
92
96

1,148

The	ECL	allowance	reflects	the	Group’s	prior	experience	and	assessment	of	the	current	economic	environment.	In	determining	
the recoverability of trade receivables and the level of loss allowance, known changes in credit quality or expected credit loss 
from the date credit was originally granted are taken into account.

ECL allowance
At 1 January
Acquisitions
Disposals
Change in loss allowance for new trade receivables in 2021
Amounts	written	off	as	uncollectible	(net	of	recoveries)

At 31 December

2021
£000

2020
£000

1,148
5
(108)
(32)
(282)

731

310
–
–
1,296
(458)

1,148

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximate to their fair value.

15. Financial instruments
The	Group	funds	its	operations	from	a	number	of	sources	of	finance,	namely	operating	cash	flows,	bank	borrowings,	finance	
leases and shareholders’ equity, which comprises share capital, reserves and retained earnings. The objective is to achieve  
a	capital	structure	with	an	appropriate	cost	of	capital,	whilst	providing	flexibility	in	immediate	and	medium-term	funding	to	
accommodate any material investment requirements.

The	Group's	principal	financial	instruments	comprise	borrowings,	cash	and	short-term	deposits,	and	other	items,	such	as	
trade	receivables	and	trade	payables	that	arise	directly	from	its	operations.	The	main	purpose	of	these	financial	instruments	
is	to	provide	finance	for	the	Group’s	operations.	Throughout	the	period	under	review,	the	Group's	policy	is	that	no	trading	in	
financial	instruments	is	undertaken	for	speculative	purposes.

There	has	been	no	significant	change	to	the	Group’s	exposure	to	market	risks	during	2021.	Principal	risks	arising	are	liquidity	
risk and credit risk, with secondary risks being interest rate risk and currency risk. The Board reviews and agrees policies for 
managing each of these risks, which are summarised below and have remained unchanged since the beginning of 2022.

Liquidity risk
The Group’s liquidity requirements are met by ensuring adequate access to funds by maintaining appropriate levels of 
committed bank facilities, which are reviewed regularly. The Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC of  
£30m was extended in the year and is available until December 2025. The facility bears interest at normal commercial rates 
and	carries	standard	financial	covenants	in	relation	to	interest	cover	and	levels	of	headroom	over	certain	trade	receivables’	
balances.	The	maturity	profile	is	set	out	in	this	note.

Credit risk
The	Group’s	exposure	to	credit	risk	is	managed	by	dealing	only	with	banks	and	financial	institutions	with	good	credit	ratings	
and by applying considerable rigour in managing trade receivables. The Group’s principal credit risk is primarily attributable  
to its trade receivables. Amounts presented in the balance sheet are shown net of an ECL allowance, as estimated by the 
Group’s management with details set out in note 14.

Interest rate risk
The	Group	borrows	in	the	desired	currencies	at	floating	rates	of	interest.	It	was	not	considered	necessary	to	cover	interest	
rate	exposures	by	the	use	of	financial	instruments	during	2021.

104   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

A sensitivity analysis has been prepared based on bank interest rate exposures at the year-end date and the stipulated change 
taking	place	at	the	beginning	of	the	financial	year	and	held	constant	throughout	the	year.	If	interest	rates	had	been	50	basis	points	
higher	and	all	other	variables	held	constant,	the	Group’s	profit	before	tax	would	have	decreased	by	£66,000	(2020:	£48,000).

Currency risk
The Group had four overseas subsidiaries in 2021, two operating in Ireland, one operating in Holland and one operating in 
Sweden. One of the operating subsidiaries in Ireland and the one in Sweden were sold on 31 December 2021. Revenues and 
expenses are denominated exclusively in Euros and Swedish Krone respectively. Movements in the Euro to sterling exchange 
rates	could	affect	the	Group’s	sterling	balance	sheet.	Following	the	sale	of	the	Labels	division	on	31	December	2021	the	
Group no longer has balance sheet exposure to Swedish Krone. The Group’s policy during 2021 has been to review the need 
to hedge currency exposures on a regular basis and it was not considered necessary to cover existing currency exposures  
by	the	use	of	financial	instruments.	The	Group	continues	to	review	the	need	to	hedge	exposures	on	a	regular	basis.

The Sterling value of foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities at the year-end is as follows:

Euros
Swedish Krone

Assets
2021
£000

2,326
–

2,326

Assets
2020
£000

6,368
1,745

8,113

814
–

814

Liabilities
2021
£000

Liabilities
2020
£000

The	Sterling	value	of	the	Group’s	foreign	currency	denominated	profit	before	tax	from	continuing	operations	is	as	follows:

Euros
Swedish Krone

2021
£000

185
–

185

5,273
1,294

6,567

2020
£000

482
504

986

The following table details the sensitivity to a 5% reduction in Sterling against the respective foreign currencies. The sensitivity 
of the Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk is determined based on the exposure at the year-end and on the change taking 
place	at	the	beginning	of	the	financial	year	and	held	constant	throughout	the	year.

Result
2021
£000

Result
2020
£000

Other equity
2021
£000

Other equity
2020
£000

Euros
Swedish Krone

Cash and cash equivalents

Currency
Sterling
Euros
US Dollars
Swedish Krone

Cash and cash equivalents

Bank borrowings
Currency – Sterling

Bank borrowings

Net bank (funds)/debt

9
–

9

24
25

49

76
–

76

2021
£000

11,777
519
19
–

12,315

9,840

9,840

55
23

78

2020
£000

5,728
975
5
520

7,228

7,766

7,766

(2,475)

538

105

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

15. Financial instruments (continued)
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and other short-term highly liquid investments with an original maturity  
of three months or less.

The Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC (’Lloyds’) of £30m is available until December 2025. Under 
the facility, trade receivables of the Group’s largest trading subsidiary, Macfarlane Group UK Limited are assigned to Lloyds 
who then fund the Group in advance of the collection of these transferred receivables. The Invoice Discounting facility bears 
interest	at	normal	commercial	rates	and	carries	standard	financial	covenants	in	relation	to	interest	cover	and	levels	of	
headroom over trade receivables’ balances.

The Group has been in compliance with all conditions in relation to its borrowing facility throughout 2021 and has remained  
in compliance in 2022 to date.

Interest rates
Bank	borrowings	are	held	at	floating	rates	of	interest.	The	average	effective	interest	rate	on	these	borrowings	approximates	
to 2.70% per annum (2020: 2.39%).

Fair value of financial instruments
Current	assets	and	liabilities	are	all	held	at	floating	rates.	The	fair	values	of	cash	and	cash	equivalents	and	bank	borrowings	 
at 31 December 2021 all materially equate to book values.

Borrowing facilities
The Group’s committed borrowing facilities, for which all conditions precedent had been met, are as follows:

Drawn down
Undrawn

Committed borrowing facilities

The Group’s borrowing profile is as follows:

At amortised cost
Bank borrowings – secured
Lease liabilities

Current borrowings
Non-current – lease liabilities

Total borrowings

Equity

Gearing (net debt to equity) ratio

2021
£000

9,840
20,160

30,000

2020
£000

7,766
22,234

30,000

2021
£000

2020
£000

9,840
6,364

16,204
28,578

44,782

7,766
5,784

13,550
22,908

36,458

94,894

79,778

47%

46%

Financial instruments carried at fair value
IFRS	7	requires	that	all	financial	instruments	carried	at	fair	value	be	analysed	under	certain	levels.	The	table	below	analyses	
financial	instruments,	into	a	fair	value	hierarchy	based	on	the	valuation	technique	used	to	determine	fair	value.

•  Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.
•  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly 

(i.e., as prices) or indirectly (i.e., derived from prices).

•  Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

106   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
The	fair	values	of	all	financial	assets	and	financial	liabilities	by	class	together	with	their	carrying	amounts	shown	in	the	balance	
sheet are as follows:

Financial instruments which are designated  
 at fair value through profit or loss

Trade receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade payables
Accruals and deferred income
Bank borrowings
Contingent consideration

Trade receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade payables
Accruals and deferred income
Bank borrowings
Contingent consideration

Carrying
amount
2021
£000

52,536
12,315
(42,147)
(11,703)
(9,840)
(6,625)

Carrying
amount
2020
£000

46,023
7,228
(35,622)
(6,977)
(7,766)
–

Fair value
2021
£000

52,536
12,315
(42,147)
(11,703)
(9,840)
(6,625)

Fair value
2020
£000

46,023
7,228
(35,622)
(6,977)
(7,766)
–

Level 1
2021
£000

52,536
12,315
(42,147)
–
–
–

Level 1
2020
£000

46,023
7,228
(35,622)
–
–
–

Level 2
2021
£000

–
–
–
–
–
–

Level 2
2020
£000

–
–
–
–
–
–

Level 3
2021
£000

–
–
–
–
–
(6,625)

Level 3
2020
£000

–
–
–
–
–
–

The	following	table	shows	the	valuation	techniques	used	for	Level	3	fair	values,	and	significant	unobservable	inputs	used	 
for Level 3 items. 

Financial instruments measured at fair value

Valuation technique

Significant	unobservable	inputs	(Level	3	only)

Contingent consideration

The	expected	payment	reflects	calculated	
cash	outflows	under	possible	earn-out	
scenarios and is not discounted 

Trading performance of acquired 
subsidiary companies in a period  
of 12 months following acquisition

The	following	are	the	contractual	maturities	of	financial	liabilities,	including	estimated	interest	payments	and	excluding	the	
effect	of	netting	agreements.

Non-derivative financial instruments

Secured bank borrowings
Lease liabilities
Trade payables
Accruals and deferred income
Contingent consideration

Non-derivative financial instruments

Secured bank borrowings
Lease liabilities
Trade payables
Accruals and deferred income

2021 Contractual cash flows

Due within
one year 
£000

Due from
 1-5 years
£000

9,840
6,364
42,147
11,703
2,930

72,984

–
16,331
–
–
3,695

20,026

2020	Contractual	cash	flows

Due within
one year
£000

7,766
5,784
35,622
6,977

56,149

Due from
1-5 years
£000

–
16,643
19
–

16,662

Due after
five years
£000

–
12,247
–
–
–

12,247

Due after
five	years
£000

–
6,265
–
–

6,265

Total
£000

9,840
34,942
42,147
11,703
6,625

105,257

Total
£000

7,766
28,692
35,641
6,977

79,076

107

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

16. Trade and other payables

Due within one year
Trade payables
Other taxation and social security
Contingent consideration
Other payables
Accruals and deferred income

Due after more than one year
Contingent consideration
Other payables

2021
£000

2020
£000

42,147
3,905
2,930
290
11,703

60,975

3,695
–
3,695

35,622
4,009
–
1,147
6,977

47,755

–
19
19

Trade and other payables principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases and ongoing costs in all the Group’s 
businesses. No interest is charged on overdue trade payables.

The Directors consider that the carrying amounts for trade and other payables approximate to their fair value.

17. Lease liabilities

Amounts payable under leases
Within one year
Between	one	and	five	years
After	more	than	five	years

Present value of lease liabilities
Due for settlement within 12 months (current liabilities)

Due for settlement after more than 12 months (non-current liabilities)

At 1 January
New leases
Acquisitions (note 23)
Disposals
Lease	modifications
Exchange movements
Interest
Repayments under leases

At 31 December

2021
£000

2020
£000

6,364
16,331
12,247

34,942
(6,364)

28,578

2021
£000

28,692
9,103
3,500
(1,363)
2,675
(126)
1,034
(8,573)

34,942

5,784
16,643
6,265

28,692
(5,784)

22,908

2020
£000

25,967
1,868
–
–
7,485
91
761
(7,480)

28,692

The Directors consider that the carrying amounts for lease liabilities approximate to their fair value. Repayment of lease obligations 
in	the	cash	flow	statement	of	£7,539,000	consists	of	repayments	under	leases	of	£8,573,000	less	interest	of	£1,034,000.

108   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

18. Deferred tax

At 1 January 2020
Acquisition (note 23)
(Charged)/credited in income statement
Credited in other comprehensive income
 Deferred	tax	on	remeasurement	of	pension	scheme	liability
 Corporation	tax	rate	change	on	deferred	tax	

At 31 December 2020
Acquisition (note 23)
Disposal
Transferred to corporation tax
(Charged)/credited in income statement
Credited in other comprehensive income
 Deferred	tax	on	remeasurement	of	pension	scheme	liability
 Corporation	tax	rate	change	on	deferred	tax

At 31 December 2021

2021 deferred tax assets
 Due	outwith	one	year
2021 deferred tax liabilities
 Due	outwith	one	year

2020 deferred tax assets
 Due	outwith	one	year
2020 deferred tax liabilities
 Due	outwith	one	year

Tax losses/
 accelerated
 capital
 allowances
£000

Other
 intangible
 assets
£000

Retirement
	benefit
 obligations
£000

(40)
–
(39)

–
–

(79)
(73)
372
(168)
(371)

–
–

(2,951)
(55)
130

–
–

(2,876)
(1,802)
-
-
(387)

–
–

(319)

(5,065)

1,099
–
(548)

(401)
129

279
-
-
-
(382)

(2,054)
88

(2,069)

Total
£000

(1,892)
(55)
(457)

(401)
129

(2,676)
(1,875)
372
(168)
(1,140)

(2,054)
88

(7,453)

19

(338)

(319)

117

(196)

(79)

–

–

19

(5,065)

(5,065)

(2,069)

(2,069)

(7,472)

(7,453)

–

(2,876)

(2,876)

279

–

279

396

(3,072)

(2,676)

Deferred	tax	balances	represent	tax	expected	to	be	payable	or	recoverable	on	differences	between	the	carrying	amounts	of	
assets	and	liabilities	in	the	financial	statements	and	the	corresponding	tax	bases	used	in	the	computation	of	taxable	profit	and	
is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December 2021 have been 
calculated based on a corporation tax rate of 25% where it is not anticipated to reverse by 1 April 2023 when the 25% rate 
comes	into	effect.

19. Share capital

Allotted, issued and fully paid:
At 1 January

At 31 December

Number of 
25p shares

2021
£000

2020
£000

157,812,000

157,812,000

39,453

39,453

39,453

39,453

The	Company	has	one	class	of	ordinary	shares,	which	carry	no	right	to	fixed	income.

Each ordinary share carries one vote in any General Meeting of the Company.

109

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

20. Reserves

Share
premium
£000

Revaluation
reserve
£000

Translation
reserve
£000

Balance at 1 January 2020
Profit	for	the	year
Dividends paid (see note 7)
Foreign	currency	translation	differences	–	foreign	operations
Share-based payments
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability taken direct to equity
Deferred tax taken direct to equity

Balance at 31 December 2020
Profit	for	the	year
Dividends paid (see note 7)
Foreign	currency	translation	differences	–	foreign	operations
Share-based payments
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability taken direct to equity
Deferred tax taken direct to equity

Balance at 31 December 2021

13,148
–
–
–
–
–
–

13,148
–
–
–
–
–
–

13,148

70
–
–
–
–
–
–

70
–
–
–
–
–
–

70

231
–
–
60
–
–
–

291
–
–
(120)
–
–
–

171

Exchange	differences	arising	in	the	consolidated	accounts	on	the	retranslation	at	closing	rates	of	the	Group's	net	
investments in foreign subsidiary companies are recorded as movements on the translation reserve.

21. Provisions

At 1 January 2020
Additions in the year
Payments

At 31 December 2020
Additions in the year
Acquisitions
Releases
Disposals
Payments

At 31 December 2021

2021 – Due within one year
2021 – Due after more than one year

At 31 December 2021

2020 – Due within one year
2020 – Due after more than one year

At 31 December 2020

Note

Property
£000

23

467
1,225
(125)

1,567
1,775
597
(187)
–
(174)

3,578

1,730
1,848

3,578

975
592

1,567

Other
£000

660
199
–

859
–
–
(127)
(732)
–

–

–
–

–

859
–

859

Property provisions relate to sums due in respect of dilapidations. 

Other provisions related to sums due to customers in respect of backdated duty including interest.

Retained
earnings
£000

15,835
10,171
(1,105)
–
75
2,112
(272)

26,816
12,598
(4,293)
–
685
8,212
(1,966)

42,052

Total
£000

1,127
1,424
(125)

2,426
1,775
597
(314)
(732)
(174)

3,578

1,730
1,848

3,578

1,834
592

2,426

110   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

22. Analysis of changes in net debt 

At 1 January 2020
Non-cash movements
 New	leases
 Exchange	movements
 Lease	modifications
Cash movements

At 31 December 2020
Non-cash movements
 New	leases
 Acquisitions
 Disposals
 Lease	modifications
 Exchange	movements
Cash movements

At 31 December 2021

Net bank funds 2021

Net bank debt 2020

Cash
and cash
 equivalents
£000

Bank
borrowing
£000

Lease
liabilities
£000

Total
debt
£000

5,579

(18,253)

(25,967)

(38,641)

–
–
–
1,649

7,228

–
–
–
–
–
5,087

12,315

Cash
and cash
 equivalents
£000

–
–
–
10,487

(1,868)
(91)
(7,485)
6,719

(1,868)
(91)
(7,485)
18,855

(7,766)

(28,692)

(29,230)

–
–
–
–
–
(2,074)

(9,840)

(9,103)
(3,500)
1,363
(2,675)
126
7,539

(9,103)
(3,500)
1,363
(2,675)
126
10,552

(34,942)

(32,467)

Bank
borrowing
£000

Net bank
funds/(debt)
£000

12,315

7,228

(9,840)

(7,766)

2,475

(538)

Cash and cash equivalents (presented as a single class of asset on the face of the balance sheet) comprise cash at bank  
and other short-term highly liquid investments with maturity of three months or less. 

The	movement	in	net	bank	debt	is	inclusive	of	the	net	cash	outflow	in	respect	of	acquisitions	set	out	in	note	23.	

23. Acquisitions
On 26 February 2021, Macfarlane Group UK Limited (’MGUK’) acquired 100% of GWP Holdings Limited (’GWP’), for a maximum 
consideration, excluding cash and bank balances acquired, of £15.1m. £10.0m was paid in cash on acquisition, in addition to the 
cash	and	bank	balances	retained	by	MGUK,	and	the	deferred	consideration	of	£5.1m	is	payable	in	the	first	quarters	of	2022	and	
2023, subject to certain trading targets being met in the two twelve-month periods ending on 28 February 2022 and 2023 
respectively. On 31 March 2021, MGUK acquired 100% of Carters Packaging (Cornwall) Limited (’Carters Packaging’), for a 
maximum consideration of £4.5m, excluding cash and bank balances acquired. £3.0m was paid in cash on acquisition, in 
addition to the cash and bank balances retained by MGUK, and the deferred consideration of £1.5m is payable in the second 
quarters of 2022 and 2023, subject to certain trading targets being met in the two twelve-month periods ending on 31 March 
2022 and 2023 respectively. On 6 January 2020, the Group’s subsidiary, MGUK acquired the business, trade and assets of 
Armagrip, a packaging distributor in Durham, for a consideration of approximately £0.9m, paid in cash on acquisition.

Contingent considerations are recognised as a liability in trade and other payables and are remeasured to fair value of £6.6m  
at the balance sheet date based on a range of outcomes between £Nil and £6.6m. Trading in the post-acquisition period 
supports the remeasured value of £6.6m.

The	impact	of	the	acquisition	of	GWP	on	2021	results	was	revenue	for	the	year	of	£15.1m	and	profit	of	£2.1m.	If	the	GWP	
acquisition	had	been	completed	on	the	first	day	of	2021,	revenues	for	the	year	would	have	been	£18.1m	and	profit	would	have	
been	£2.5m.	The	impact	of	the	acquisition	of	Carters	on	2021	results	was	revenue	for	the	year	of	£5.1m	and	profit	of	£0.4m.	If	
the	Carters	acquisition	had	been	completed	on	the	first	day	of	2021,	revenues	for	the	year	would	have	been	£6.8m	and	profit	
would have been £0.5m.

111

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

23. Acquisitions (continued)
Carters Packaging and Armagrip are packaging distributors, accounted for in the Packaging Distribution segment. Goodwill 
arising	is	attributable	to	the	anticipated	future	profitability	of	the	distribution	of	the	Group’s	product	ranges	in	the	UK	and	
anticipated operating synergies from future combinations of activities with the existing Packaging Distribution network.  
GWP is a packaging manufacturer, accounted for in the Manufacturing Operations segment. Goodwill arising is attributable  
to	the	anticipated	future	profitability	of	the	manufacture	of	the	Group’s	product	ranges	in	the	UK	and	anticipated	operating	
synergies from future combinations of activities within the existing Manufacturing Operations. For the purposes of the Group 
financial	statements,	GWP	and	Carters	converted	from	FRS	102	to	IFRS,	with	the	only	change	being	the	impact	of	IFRS	16	
‘Leases’ on ROU assets and lease liabilities as incorporated into the fair values noted below. Fair values assigned to net assets 
acquired and consideration paid and payable are set out below:

Net assets acquired
Other intangible assets (note 10)
Tangible assets (inc. ROU assets)
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and bank balances
Trade and other payables 
Current tax liabilities
Lease liabilities 
Deferred tax liabilities (note 18)

Net assets acquired
Goodwill arising on acquisition (note 10)

Total consideration
Contingent consideration on acquisitions
 Current	year
 Prior	years

Total cash consideration

Net cash outflow arising on acquisitions
Cash consideration
Cash and bank balances acquired

Net cash outflow – acquisitions

GWP
£000

Carters
Packaging
£000

2021
Total
£000

7,505
3,560
1,125
2,319
3,751
(3,252)
(302)
(2,562)
(1,492)

10,652
7,493

18,145

(5,125)
–

13,020

1,977
998
840
997
126
(896)
(125)
(938)
(383)

2,596
1,999

4,595

(1,500)
–

3,095

9,482
4,558
1,965
3,316
3,877
(4,148)
(427)
(3,500)
(1,875)

13,248
9,492

22,740

(6,625)
–

16,115

(13,020)
3,751

(9,269)

(3,095)
126

(2,969)

(16,115)
3,877

(12,238)

2020
Total
£000

291
–
206
282
–
–
–
–
(55)

724
164

888

–
1,773

2,661

(2,661)
-

(2,661)

24. Retirement benefit obligations
Introduction
Macfarlane	Group	PLC	sponsors	a	defined	benefit	pension	scheme	for	certain	active	and	former	UK	employees	–	the	
Macfarlane Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance Scheme (1974) (’the Scheme’). One of the trading subsidiaries, Macfarlane 
Group UK Limited is also a sponsoring employer of the Scheme. Macfarlane Labels Limited was a sponsoring employer  
until 31 December 2021 when the company was sold and ceased to be a sponsoring member. The Group is working with  
the trustees on a Flexible Apportionment Arrangement in relation to Macfarlane Labels Limited’s cessation as a sponsoring 
employer. The Scheme is currently in surplus and disclosure of the respective proportions of the Group surplus are included 
and	disclosed	in	the	financial	statements	of	each	of	the	three	participating	employers.

The Scheme is an HMRC registered pension scheme, administered by a Board of Trustees composed of employer-nominated 
representatives and member-nominated Trustees which is legally separate from the Group. The Scheme’s investments are 
held separately from those of the Group in managed funds under the supervision of the Trustees. The Trustees are required 
by	law	to	act	in	the	interest	of	all	classes	of	beneficiary	in	the	Scheme	and	are	responsible	for	investment	policy	and	the	
administration	of	benefits.	Macfarlane	Group	PLC,	based	on	legal	opinion	provided,	has	an	unconditional	right	to	a	refund	 
of surplus assets assuming the full settlement of plan liabilities in the event of a wind up of the Scheme. Furthermore, in  
the ordinary course of business the trustees have no rights to unilaterally wind up the Scheme, or otherwise augment  
the	benefits	due	to	members	of	the	Scheme.	Based	on	these	rights,	any	net	surplus	in	the	Scheme	is	recognised	in	full.

112   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

The Scheme provides qualifying employees with an annual pension of 1/60 of pensionable salary for each completed years’ 
service on attainment of a normal retirement age of 65. Pensionable salaries were frozen for the remaining active members at 
the	levels	current	at	30	April	2009	with	the	change	taking	effect	from	30	April	2010.	As	a	result	no	further	salary	inflation	applies	
for	active	members	who	elected	to	remain	in	the	Scheme.	Active	members’	benefits	also	include	life	assurance	cover,	with	the	
payment	of	these	benefits	at	the	discretion	of	the	Trustees	of	the	Scheme.	The	Scheme	was	closed	to	new	entrants	during	2002.

On leaving active service a deferred member’s pension is revalued from the time of withdrawal until the pension is drawn. 
Revaluation in deferment is statutory and since 2010 has been revalued on the Consumer Price Index (’CPI’) measure of 
inflation.	Revaluation	of	pensions	in	payment	is	a	blend	of	fixed	increases	and	inflationary	increases	depending	on	the	relevant	
periods	of	accrual	of	benefit.	For	pensions	in	payment,	the	inflationary	increase	is	currently	based	on	the	Retail	Price	Index	
(’RPI’)	measure	of	inflation	or	based	on	Limited	Price	Indexation	(’LPI’)	for	certain	defined	periods	of	service.

During	2012,	Macfarlane	Group	PLC	agreed	with	the	Board	of	Trustees	to	amend	benefits	for	pensioner,	deferred	and	active	
members	in	the	Scheme	by	offering	a	Pension	Increase	Exchange	(’PIE’)	option	to	pensioner	members	and	a	PIE	option	to	all	
other members at retirement after 1 May 2012.

Balance sheet disclosures at 31 December 2021
The	Scheme’s	qualified	actuary	from	Aon	carries	out	triennial	valuations	using	the	Projected	Unit	Credit	Method	to	determine	
the	level	of	deficit/surplus.	For	the	most	recent	triennial	valuation	at	1	May	2020,	the	results	of	this	valuation	showed	that	the	
market value of the relevant investments of the Scheme was £94,100,000 and represented 91% of the actuarial value of 
benefits	that	had	accrued	to	members.

The	investment	classes	held	by	the	Scheme	and	the	Scheme	deficit,	based	on	the	results	of	the	actuarial	valuation	as	at	1	May	
2020, updated to the year-end are as shown below:

Investment class

Equities
UK equity funds
Overseas equity funds
Multi-asset	diversified	growth	funds

Bonds
Liability-driven investment funds

Other
European loan fund
Secured property income fund
Cash
Fair value of scheme investments

Valuation
2021
£000

Asset
allocation

Valuation
2020
£000

Asset
 allocation

9,392
17,010
29,113

9.4%
16.9%
29.0%

8,351
14,585
31,559

8.4%
14.7%
31.7%

Valuation
2019
£000

8,913
13,226
25,382

Asset
allocation

10.1%
15.0%
28.8%

30,531

30.4%

31,463

31.7%

27,688

31.5%

6,778
6,995
604

6.7%
7.0%
0.6%

6,493
6,254
725

6.5%
6.3%
0.7%

6,379
6,192
281

7.3%
7.0%
0.3%

100,423

100.0%

99,430

100.0%

88,061

100.0%

Present value of scheme liabilities

(92,156)

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

8,267

(100,901)

(1,471)

(94,526)

(6,465)

The Trustees review the scheme’s investments on a regular basis and consult with the Company regarding any proposed 
changes	to	the	investment	profile.	During	2021	the	Trustees	maintained	the	overall	allocations	in	line	with	the	strategic	asset	
allocation in the Trustees’ Statement of Investment Principles.

Liability-Driven	Investment	Funds	provide	a	match	of	100%	against	the	impact	of	inflation	movements	on	pension	liabilities	
and of approximately 85% against the impact of movements in interest rates on pension liabilities.

The ability to realise the Scheme’s investments at, or close to, fair value was considered when setting the investment strategy. 
86% (2020: 87%) of the Scheme’s investments can be realised at fair value on a daily or weekly basis. The remaining investments 
have	monthly	or	quarterly	liquidity,	however,	whilst	the	income	from	these	helps	to	meet	the	Scheme’s	cash	flow	needs,	they	
are	not	expected	to	be	realised	at	short	notice.	The	present	value	of	the	Scheme	liabilities	is	derived	from	cash	flow	projections	
over a long period and is thus inherently uncertain.

113

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

24. Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
Assumptions
The Scheme’s liabilities at 31 December 2021 were calculated on the following bases as required under IAS 19:

Discount rate
Rate of increase in salaries
Rate of increase in pensions in payment

Spouse’s pension assumption
Pensioner/active and deferred members
PIE take up rate
Inflation	assumption	(RPI)
Inflation	assumption	(CPI)
Life expectancy beyond normal retirement age of 65
Scheme members aged 55
 Male
 Female
Scheme members aged 65
 Male
 Female
Average uplift for GMP service

2021

2020

2019

1.90%
0.00%
3% or 5%
for fixed increases 
or 3.30% for LPI.
2.27% post 
5 April 2006

1.35%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for	fixed	increases 
or 2.95% for LPI. 
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

2.00%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for	fixed	increases	 
or 2.95% for LPI. 
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

75%/75%
65%
3.40%
2.90%

22.8 years
24.4 years

22.3 years
23.6 years
0.40%

75%/75%
65%
3.00%
2.50%

22.8 years
24.3 years

22.2 years
23.5 years
0.40%

70%/80%
45%
3.00%
2.10%

22.6 years
24.7 years

22.0 years
24.0 years
0.40%

Sensitivity to significant assumptions
The	Pension	scheme	exposes	the	Group	to	actuarial	risks,	such	as	interest	rate	risk,	inflation	risk,	longevity	risk	and	investment	
risk.	The	significant	assumptions	used	for	IAS	19	are	discount	rate,	inflation	and	mortality.	If	different	assumptions	were	used,	
then	this	could	have	a	material	effect	on	the	deficit.	Assuming	all	other	assumptions	are	held	static	then	a	movement	in	the	
following	key	assumptions	would	affect	the	level	of	the	Pension	scheme	surplus/deficit	as	shown	below:

Assumptions
Discount rate movement of +0.6%
Inflation	rate	movement	of	+0.1%
Mortality movement of +0.1 year in age rating

2021
£000

8,845
(470)
277

2020
£000

9,684
(515)
303

2019
£000

9,072
(482)
284

Positive	figures	reflect	a	reduction	in	scheme	liabilities	and	therefore	a	reduction	in	the	deficit	or	increase	in	the	surplus.	The	
sensitivity information has been prepared using the same method as adopted when updating the results of the most recent 
actuarial valuation to the balance sheet date and is consistent with the approach adopted in previous years.

The	level	of	sensitivities	shown	reflect	average	movements	in	the	assumptions	in	the	last	three	years.

The sensitivity information assumes that the average duration of the scheme’s liabilities is seventeen years.

GMP equalisation
In	2018,	the	Directors	made	the	judgement	that	the	estimated	effect	of	GMP	equalisation	on	the	Group’s	pension	liabilities	
was	a	past	service	cost.	The	average	uplift	for	GMP	service	for	impacted	members	was	reflected	through	the	consolidated	
income statement in 2018, with any subsequent changes in the estimate to be recognised in other comprehensive income.

Right to surplus
UK pension legislation requires that pension schemes are funded prudently. Following the conclusion of the 2021 actuarial 
valuation,	the	scheme’s	trustees	agreed	with	the	Company	to	a	deficit	recovery	period	of	4	years.	As	part	of	this	agreement,	
the	Group	reconfirmed	its	effective	unconditional	right	to	a	refund	of	any	surplus,	based	on	and	in	accordance	with	the	terms	
and	conditions	of	the	defined	benefit	scheme	and	minimum	funding	requirements.	Accordingly	IFRIC	14	does	not	require	an	
adjustment to the net pension surplus.

114   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Macfarlane Group PLC paid contributions of £1,992,000 per annum, which along with investment returns from return-seeking 
assets is expected to make good the actuarial shortfall by April 2024. The estimated contributions in 2022 will be £1,301,000.

The employer contribution rate for active members from 1 May 2020 is 37.4% of pensionable salary and the employee 
contribution rate is 7.0% of pensionable salary.

Movement in the scheme surplus/(deficit) during the year

At 1 January
Current service costs
Contributions from sponsoring employers
Past service cost (curtailed due to disposal of business)
GMP on transfer values
Net	finance	cost	(note	4)
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability in the year

At 31 December

Analysis of amounts charged to profit before tax
Current service cost
GMP on transfer values
Past service cost (curtailed due to disposal of business)
Net	finance	cost

Pension expense charged to profit before tax

Analysis of the remeasurement of the pension scheme liability recognised  
 in the statement of other comprehensive income
Return on scheme investments excluding amount shown in interest income
Changes due to scheme experience
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of scheme liabilities

Remeasurement of the pension scheme liability recognised in the statement  
 of other comprehensive income

Movement in the fair value of scheme investments
At 1 January
Interest income
Return on scheme investments (excluding amount shown in interest income)
Contributions from sponsoring employers
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits	paid

At 31 December

Movement in the present value of scheme liabilities
At 1 January
Current service cost
GMP on transfer values
Past service cost (curtailed due to disposal of business)
Interest cost
Contributions from scheme members
Changes due to scheme experience
Changes in assumptions underlying the scheme liabilities
Benefits	paid

At 31 December

2021
£000

(1,471)
(126)
1,992
(333)
–
(7)
8,212

8,267

(126)
–
(333)
(7)

(466)

2020
£000

(6,465)
(143)
3,211
–
(87)
(99)
2,112

(1,471)

(143)
(87)
–
(99)

(329)

1,273
850
6,089

10,655
2,364
(10,907)

8,212

2,112

99,430
1,332
1,273
1,992
23
(3,627)

100,423

(100,901)
(126)
–
(333)
(1,339)
(23)
850
6,089
3,627

88,061
1,751
10,655
3,211
34
(4,282)

99,430

(94,526)
(143)
(87)
–
(1,850)
(34)
2,364
(10,907)
4,282

(92,156)

(100,901)

115

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

24. Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
The cumulative amount of actuarial losses recognised in other comprehensive income since the date of transition to IAS 19 
on 1 January 2004 is £11,042,000 (2020: £19,254,000).

The history of experience adjustments and actual returns on scheme assets and scheme liabilities is as follows:

2021
£000

2020
£000

2019
£000

2018
£000

2017
£000

Present	value	of	defined	benefit	obligations
Fair value of scheme investments

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

(92,156)
100,423

(100,901)
99,430

8,267

(1,471)

(94,526)
88,061

(6,465)

(85,592)
75,827

(9,765)

(92,783)
80,960

(11,823)

Actual return on scheme investments
Amount

Percentage of scheme investments

Experience adjustment on scheme liabilities
Amount

Percentage of scheme liabilities

Experience adjustment on scheme investments
Amount

Percentage of scheme investments

2,605

2.6%

6,939

7.5%

1,273

1.3%

12,406

12.5%

13,263

15.1%

(8,543)

(8.5%)

(10,617)

(11.2%)

10,655

10.7%

11,154

12.7%

(2,156)

(2.8%)

4,111

4.8%

(4,143)

(5.5%)

5,795

7.2%

(3,953)

(4.3%)

3,730

4.6%

Defined contribution schemes
The	Group	also	operates	a	number	of	defined	contribution	pension	arrangements,	set	up	as	the	Macfarlane	Group	Personal	
Pension Plan, including an Auto-enrolment scheme. The assets of these plans are held separately from those of the Group in 
independently administered funds. The pension cost charge represents contributions paid by the Group to these plans and 
amounted to £1,828,000 (2020: £1,670,000). Contributions amounting to £219,000 (2020: £168,000) were payable to the 
plans and are included in trade and other payables at 31 December.

25. Share-based payments
Equity-settled long-term incentive plans 
Movements in PSP awards during the year

Outstanding at 1 January
Awarded during the year
Lapsed during the year

Outstanding at 31 December

Number of
 shares
2021

Number of
 shares
2020

1,267,311
579,547
(219,702)

604,270
716,397
(53,356)

1,627,156

1,267,311

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in March 2021 based on 100% 
of salary. The performance condition requires EPS in 2023 to be between 7.95p and 9.54p for between 25%-100% of this part 
of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis.

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in September 2020 based on 
100% of salary. The performance condition requires EPS in 2022 to be between 6.53p and 7.84p for between 25%-100% of 
this part of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis.

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in May 2019 based on 100% 
of salary. The performance condition requires EPS in 2021 to be between 6.77p and 8.12p for between 25%-100% of this part 
of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis.

All awards are subject to an underpin based on the Remuneration Committee’s view of overall performance in the three-year 
periods to 31 December 2021, 2022 and 2023 respectively. No re-setting of either award is allowed. Vesting periods are three 
years and awards vesting then have a holding period of two years after vesting.

The Group recognised an expense of £685,000 (2020: £75,000) in 2021 relating to equity-settled long-term incentive plan 
awards on the basis that the 2019 awards had an estimated probability of vesting of 100% (2020: 30%), the 2020 awards had 
an estimated probability of vesting of 100% (2020: 75%) and the 2021 awards had an estimated probability of vesting of 100%.

116   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

26. Post balance sheet event
There are no post balance sheet events to be disclosed.

27. Related party transactions
The Group has related party relationships with:

its subsidiaries, listed on page 132, 
its Directors who comprise the Group Board; and 

(i) 
(ii) 
(iii)  the Macfarlane Group PLC sponsored pension schemes (see note 24).

Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries are eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed.

Key management personnel comprise the Group Board. Their remuneration is set out below in aggregate for each of the 
categories	specified	in	IAS	24	’Related Party Disclosures’.

Directors’ remuneration
Employer’s national insurance contributions

2021
£000

1,189
150

1,339

2020
£000

898
124

1,022

Further details of Directors’ individual and collective remuneration are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 
50. The details provided in the Directors’ Remuneration Report address the Companies Act disclosure requirements relating 
to Directors’ remuneration.

Details of Directors’ shareholdings in the Company are shown on page 51 and total dividends of £33,000 were paid in respect 
of these shareholdings in 2021 (2020: £14,000).

Disclosures in relation to the pension schemes are set out in note 24.
The Directors have considered the implications of IAS 24 ’Related Party Disclosures’	and	are	satisfied	that	there	are	no	other	
related party transactions occurring during the year, which require disclosure other than those already disclosed in these 
financial	statements.

117

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Company balance sheet
At	31 December 2021

Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Investments
Deferred tax assets
Retirement	benefit	obligations
Trade and other receivables

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Trade and other receivables
Current tax asset
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Current tax liabilities
Lease liabilities
Bank borrowings

Total current liabilities

Net current assets

Non-current liabilities
Retirement	benefit	obligations
Deferred tax liabilities
Lease liabilities
Provisions

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Profit	and	loss	account

Total equity

Note

2021 
£000

2020
£000

29
30
31
32
41
33

33

34

36

41
32
36
35

37
38
38

39

48
104
23,085
–
2,894
30,997

57,128

3,825
59
5,895

9,779

54
119
26,935
111
–
33,545

60,764

3,858
–
2,731

6,589

66,907

67,353

1,106
–
14
63

1,183

8,596

–
726
99
825

1,650

2,833

494
135
14
–

643

5,946

589
–
114
–

703

1,346

64,074

66,007

39,453
13,148
11,473

64,074

39,453
13,148
13,406

66,007

The	Company	has	taken	advantage	of	Section	408	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	and	consequently	a	separate	profit	and	loss	
account	for	the	parent	company	is	not	presented	as	part	of	these	financial	statements.

The Company’s loss for the year is £633,000.

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this Company balance sheet.

The	financial	statements	of	Macfarlane	Group	PLC,	Company	registration	number	SC004221,	were	approved	by	the	Board	 
of Directors on 24 February 2022 and signed on its behalf by

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

118   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

 
 
 
 
Company statement of changes in equity
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

At 1 January 2020

39,453

13,148

10,888

63,489

Note

Share
capital
£000

Share
premium
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
£000

Comprehensive income
Profit	for	the	year
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

At 31 December 2020

Comprehensive income
Loss for the year
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

41
32

7
25

41
32
32

7
25

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

2,122
1,698
(323)
51

3,548

(1,105)
75

(1,030)

2,122
1,698
(323)
51

3,548

(1,105)
75

(1,030)

39,453

13,148

13,406

66,007

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

(633)
3,031
(758)
35

1,675

(633)
3,031
(758)
35

1,675

(4,293)
685

(3,608)

(4,293)
685

(3,608)

At 31 December 2021

39,453

13,148

11,473

64,074

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this statement of changes in equity.

119

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the Company financial statements
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

28. Significant accounting policies
Macfarlane Group PLC is a public company listed on the London Stock Exchange, incorporated and domiciled in the United 
Kingdom and registered in Scotland.
These	financial	statements	were	prepared	in	accordance	with	Financial	Reporting	Standard	101	Reduced Disclosure 
Framework (’FRS 101’).

In	preparing	these	financial	statements,	the	Company	applies	the	recognition,	measurement	and	disclosure	requirements	 
of International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the United Kingdom (’Adopted IFRSs’) but makes amendments 
where necessary in order to comply with the Companies Act 2006 and has set out below where advantage of the FRS 101 
disclosure	exemptions	has	been	taken.	In	these	financial	statements,	the	Company	has	applied	the	exemptions	available	
under FRS 101 in respect of the following disclosures: 

(i)	 Cash	flow	statement	and	related	notes;
(ii)  Comparative period reconciliations for share capital and tangible assets;
(iii)  Disclosures in respect of transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries; 
(iv)	 The	effects	of	new	but	not	yet	effective	IFRSs;
(v)  Disclosures in respect of the compensation of Key Management Personnel; and 
(vi)  Disclosures in respect of capital management.

As	the	consolidated	financial	statements	for	Macfarlane	Group	PLC	include	the	equivalent	disclosures,	the	Company	has	also	
applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of certain disclosures required by;

IFRS 2 Share Based Payments in relation to Group-settled share-based payments;
IFRS 3 Business Combinations relating to business combinations undertaken by the Company; and

(i) 
(ii) 
(iii)  IFRS 7 Financial Instruments.

Going concern
The	Directors,	in	their	consideration	of	going	concern,	have	reviewed	the	Company	and	Group’s	future	cash	flow	forecasts	
and revenue projections, which they believe are based on a prudent assessment of the market and past experience as set out 
on page 19. 

After making enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue 
in operational existence for at least the next twelve months. For this reason they continue to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing	the	financial	statements.

Critical judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
The	preparation	of	financial	statements	requires	management	to	make	estimates	and	assumptions	that	affect	the	amounts	
reported for assets and liabilities as at the balance sheet date and the amounts reported for revenues and expenses during 
the	year.	Due	to	the	nature	of	estimation,	the	actual	outcomes	may	well	differ	from	these	estimates.	

Critical judgements
No	significant	critical	judgements	have	been	made	in	the	current	or	prior	year.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The	key	sources	of	estimation	uncertainty	that	have	a	significant	effect	on	the	carrying	amounts	of	assets	and	liabilities	are	
discussed below:

Retirement benefit obligations 
The	determination	of	any	defined	benefit	pension	scheme	liability	is	based	on	assumptions	determined	with	independent	
actuarial	advice.	The	key	assumptions	used	include	discount	rate,	inflation	rate	and	mortality	assumptions,	for	which	a	
sensitivity	analysis	for	the	Group	deficit	is	provided	in	note	24.	The	Directors	consider	that	these	sensitivities	represent	
reasonable	sensitivities	which	could	occur	in	the	next	financial	year.

Changes in accounting policies and application of revised standards and interpretations
There	are	no	new	accounting	policies	applied	in	2021	which	have	had	a	material	effect	on	these	accounts.

The Directors do not consider that the adoption of new and revised standards and interpretations issued by the IASB in 2021 
has	had	any	material	impact	on	the	financial	statements	of	the	Group.

Accounting policies
The	financial	statements	are	prepared	on	the	historical	cost	basis	except	that	certain	of	the	following	assets	and	liabilities	 
are stated at their fair value. The following accounting policies have been applied consistently in dealing with items which are 
considered	material	in	relation	to	the	preparation	of	these	financial	statements.

120   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Tangible assets
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses. 
Depreciation	is	calculated	on	a	straight-line	basis	to	write	off	the	cost	or	valuation	of	the	assets	to	their	estimated	residual	
values over the period of their expected useful lives. The rates of depreciation vary between 2%-5% per annum on property 
and 7%-25% per annum on plant and equipment. Rates of depreciation are reviewed annually to ensure they remain relevant 
and residual values are reviewed once in each calendar year.

Investments
Investments	held	as	fixed	assets	are	stated	in	note	31	at	cost	less	any	provision	for	impairment.

Non-derivative financial instruments
Non-derivative	financial	instruments	comprise	investments	in	equity	and	debt	securities,	trade	and	other	debtors,	cash	and	
cash equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade and other creditors.

Trade and other debtors
Trade and other debtors are recognised initially at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured at amortised 
cost	using	the	effective	interest	method,	less	any	impairment	losses.

Trade and other creditors
Trade and other creditors are recognised initially at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured at 
amortised	cost	using	the	effective	interest	method.

Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial 
recognition,	interest-bearing	borrowings	are	stated	at	amortised	cost	using	the	effective	interest	method.

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’
The Company recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability for all lease arrangements in which it is the 
lessee,	except	for	short-term	leases	(defined	as	leases	with	a	lease	term	of	12	months	or	less)	and	leases	of	low	value	assets	
below £4,000. For these short-term or low value leases, the Company recognises the lease payments as an operating 
expense on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

For all other leases, the lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments that are not paid at the 
commencement date, discounted by using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate cannot be readily determined, the Company 
uses its incremental borrowing rate.

Lease liabilities are presented on two separate lines in the balance sheet for amounts due within one year and amounts due 
beyond	one	year.	The	lease	liability	is	subsequently	measured	by	increasing	the	carrying	amount	to	reflect	interest	on	the	
lease	liability	(using	the	effective	interest	method)	and	by	reducing	the	liability	by	payments	made.	The	Company	remeasures	
the lease liability (and adjusts the related right-of-use asset) whenever the lease term has changed or a lease contract is 
modified	and	the	lease	modification	is	not	accounted	for	as	a	separate	lease.	The	Company	did	not	make	any	such	
adjustments during the period presented.

Right-of-use assets comprise the initial measurement of the corresponding lease liability and are subsequently measured  
at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. Right-of-use assets are depreciated over the shorter period  
of lease term and useful life of the underlying asset. If a lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset or the cost of  
the	right-of-use	asset	reflects	that	the	Company	expects	to	exercise	a	purchase	option,	the	related	right-of-use	asset	 
is depreciated over the useful life of the underlying asset. Depreciation starts at the commencement date of the lease. 

As a practical expedient, IFRS 16 permits a lessee not to separate non-lease components, and instead account for any lease 
and associated non-lease components as a single arrangement. The Company has not used this practical expedient and has 
separated out the non-lease components for its leases. These non-lease components, typically servicing and maintenance 
costs,	have	been	recognised	as	an	expense	on	a	straight-line	basis	and	disclosed	in	the	profit	and	loss	account.

The Company’s incremental borrowing rate applied to lease liabilities in 2021 is 3.0%.

Movements in lease liabilities during 2021 are set out in note 36.

Revenue recognition
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable and represents amounts receivable for 
management services provided to Group undertakings, net of VAT. Revenue is recognised over time as the related charges 
are made. 

121

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

28. Significant accounting policies (continued)
Financial instruments
Financial	assets	and	financial	liabilities	are	recognised	in	the	Company’s	balance	sheet	when	the	Company	becomes	a	party	 
to the contractual provisions of the instrument.

Financial assets
Financial	assets,	categorised	as	investments,	are	recognised	and	derecognised	on	the	effective	date	where	the	purchase	 
or sale of an investment is under a contract whose terms require the delivery of the investment within the timeframe 
established.	They	are	initially	measured	at	fair	value,	net	of	transaction	costs	except	for	those	financial	assets	classified	 
at fair value through the income statement, which are initially measured at fair value.

Other	financial	assets	comprise	trade	and	other	debtors	that	have	fixed	or	determinable	recoveries	and	are	classified	as	trade	
and	other	debtors.	The	classification	takes	account	of	the	nature	and	purpose	of	the	financial	assets	and	is	determined	on	
initial recognition. These are measured at amortised cost less impairment.

Indicators	are	assessed	for	the	impairment	of	financial	assets	at	each	balance	sheet	date.	Financial	assets	are	impaired	when	
there	is	objective	evidence	that	as	a	result	of	one	or	more	events	that	occurred	after	the	initial	recognition	of	the	financial	
asset,	the	estimated	future	cash	flows	have	been	impacted.	For	trade	and	other	debtors	the	amount	of	the	impairment	is	 
the	difference	between	the	asset’s	carrying	amount	and	the	present	value	of	estimated	future	cash	flows.

The	carrying	amount	of	the	financial	asset	is	reduced	by	the	impairment	loss.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and on demand deposits, readily convertible to a known amount of cash 
and	are	subject	to	insignificant	risk	of	changes	in	value.

Financial liabilities and equity instruments	are	classified	as	either	financial	liabilities	or	as	equity	in	accordance	with	the	
substance of the contractual arrangements.

Financial	liabilities	comprise	solely	other	financial	liabilities	under	the	terms	of	IFRS	7.	Financial	liabilities,	including	borrowings,	
are	initially	measured	at	fair	value,	net	of	transaction	costs.	Other	financial	liabilities	are	subsequently	measured	at	amortised	
cost,	with	interest	expense	measured	on	an	effective	yield	basis.

Equity instruments are any contracts evidencing a residual interest in the assets of the Company after deducting all of its liabilities. 
Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

Derivative	financial	instruments	were	not	used	in	the	current	or	preceding	financial	year.

Contingent	consideration	classified	as	a	liability	will	be	subsequently	re-measured	through	the	income	statement	under	the	
requirements of the revised IFRS 3.

Taxation
The tax expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax.

Current	tax	is	payable	based	on	the	taxable	profit	for	the	year.	Taxable	profit	differs	from	profit	before	tax	as	reported	in	the	
profit	and	loss	account	because	it	excludes	items	of	income	or	expense	that	are	taxable	or	deductible	in	other	years	and	it	
further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The current tax liability is calculated using tax rates that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred	tax	balances	represent	the	tax	expected	to	be	payable	or	recoverable	on	differences	between	the	carrying	amounts	
of	assets	and	liabilities	in	the	financial	statements	and	the	corresponding	tax	bases	used	in	the	computation	of	taxable	profit	
and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not discounted.

The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable	that	sufficient	taxable	profits	will	be	available	to	allow	all	or	part	of	the	asset	to	be	recovered.

Deferred	tax	liabilities	are	generally	recognised	for	all	taxable	temporary	differences.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is 
realised based on tax laws and rates that have been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged 
or	credited	in	the	profit	and	loss	account,	except	when	it	relates	to	items	charged	or	credited	in	other	comprehensive	income,	
in which case the deferred tax is also recorded in the statement of other comprehensive income.

122   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Retirement benefit costs
Defined contribution schemes
A	defined	contribution	plan	is	a	post-employment	benefit	plan	under	which	the	Company	pays	fixed	contributions	into	a	
separate entity and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to 
defined	contribution	pension	plans	are	recognised	as	an	expense	in	the	profit	and	loss	account	in	the	periods	during	which	
services are rendered by employees.

Defined benefit schemes
A	defined	benefit	plan	is	a	post-employment	benefit	plan	other	than	a	defined	contribution	plan.	The	Group’s	net	retirement	
benefit	obligation	in	respect	of	its	defined	benefit	pension	plan	is	calculated	by	estimating	the	amount	of	future	benefits	 
that	employees	have	earned	in	return	for	their	service	in	current	and	prior	periods.	These	benefits	are	then	discounted	to	
determine the present value, and the fair values of any plan investments, at bid price, are deducted. The Group determines 
the	net	interest	on	the	net	retirement	benefit	obligation	for	the	year	by	applying	the	discount	rate	used	to	measure	the	
defined	benefit	obligation	at	the	beginning	of	the	year.

The discount rate is the yield at the reporting date on bonds that have a credit rating of at least AA that have maturity  
dates	approximating	to	the	average	duration	of	the	Group’s	retirement	benefit	obligations	and	that	are	denominated	 
in	the	currency	in	which	the	benefits	are	expected	to	be	paid.

Remeasurements	arising	from	defined	benefit	plans	comprise	actuarial	gains	and	losses,	returns	on	plan	assets	(excluding	
interest)	and	the	effect	of	the	asset	ceiling	(if	any,	excluding	interest).	Remeasurements	are	recognised	in	the	statement	 
of	other	comprehensive	income	and	all	other	expenses	related	to	defined	benefit	plans	charged	in	staff	costs	in	the	profit	 
and loss account.

When	the	benefits	of	a	plan	are	changed,	or	when	a	plan	is	curtailed,	the	portion	of	the	changed	benefit	related	to	past	service	 
by	employees,	or	the	gain	or	loss	on	curtailment,	is	recognised	immediately	in	the	profit	and	loss	account	when	the	plan	
amendment or curtailment occurs.

The	calculation	of	the	retirement	benefit	obligations	is	performed	by	a	qualified	actuary	using	the	projected	unit	credit	
method.	When	the	calculation	results	in	a	benefit	to	the	Group,	the	recognised	asset	is	limited	to	the	present	value	of	benefits	
available in the form of any future refunds from the plan or reductions in future contributions and takes into account the 
adverse	effect	of	the	present	value	of	any	minimum	funding	requirements.

The	net	defined	benefit	cost	of	the	plan	is	apportioned	to	participating	entities	on	the	basis	of	the	employment	history	of	
scheme members, who are allocated to the relevant subsidiary company, with any remaining unallocated members allocated  
to the parent company.

Property provisions
The Company has obligations for two property leases. Under IAS 37 an entity must recognise a provision if a present obligation 
has arisen as a result of a past event, payment is probable and the amount can be estimated reliably. Where it is probable at 
the balance sheet date, that there is a liability in respect of restoring the property to its original condition a provision is made 
for	management’s	best	estimate	of	the	cost	of	fulfilling	any	residual	repairing	obligation	for	that	property	lease.

The Company may make the determination to exit a property lease before the expiry date, when it does not have a commercial 
rationale to continue to occupy the property. In this case the Company could have surplus properties and it would seek to 
attract a new tenant to obtain rental income from a sub-lease to cover its ongoing liabilities under the remaining period of the 
head lease. If there is likely to be a rental void for a period of time, then a provision is made at each balance sheet date to cover 
management’s best estimate of the future cost of the likely void period.

Share-based payments
The fair value of share-based payments awards granted to employees is recognised as an employee expense, with a 
corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the awards.  
The fair value of the awards granted is measured using an option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions 
upon	which	the	awards	were	granted.	The	amount	recognised	as	an	expense	is	adjusted	to	reflect	the	actual	number	of	awards	
for which the related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately 
recognised as an expense is based on the number of awards that do meet the related service and non-market performance 
conditions at the vesting date. For share-based payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the grant date fair value of the 
share-based	payment	is	measured	to	reflect	such	conditions	and	there	is	no	true-up	for	differences	between	expected	and	
actual outcomes. Details of the determination of the fair value of equity-settled share-based transactions are set out in note 25.

123

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

29. Property, plant and equipment

Cost
At 1 January 2021 and 31 December 2021

Depreciation
At 1 January 2021
Charge for the year

At 31 December 2021

Net book value
At 31 December 2021

At 31 December 2020

30. Right of use assets
Property

Cost
At 1 January 2021 and 31 December 2021

Depreciation
At 1 January 2021
Charge for year

At 31 December 2021

Net book value
At 31 December 2021

At 31 December 2020

31. Investments

Investment in subsidiaries at cost
At 1 January
Disposals
Group transfers

At 31 December 

Plant and
 equipment
£000

Total
£000

173

173

119
6

125

48

54

119
6

125

48

54

£000

148

29
15

44

104

119

2021
£000

2020
£000

26,935
(3,850)
–

23,085

29,989
–
(3,054)

26,935

The parent company sold its investment in Macfarlane Labels Limited on 31 December 2021 (note 6).

The parent company transferred its investment in Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited to Macfarlane Group UK 
Limited in December 2020. 

Details of the principal operating subsidiaries are set out on page 132.

124   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

32. Deferred tax (liability)/asset

Deferred tax on pension scheme deficit
At 1 January
Charged to reserves
Charged	to	profit	and	loss	account

At 31 December 

33. Trade and other receivables

Due within one year
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings
Other receivables
Prepayments and accrued income
Other taxation and social security
Deferred tax asset (see below)

Deferred tax asset – Corporation tax losses
At 1 January
Charged	to	profit	and	loss	account

At 31 December

Due after more than one year
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings

Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings attract interest at normal commercial rates.

34. Trade and other payables 

Trade creditors
Other taxation and social security
Accruals and deferred income

2021
£000

111
(723)
(114)

(726)

2020
£000

439
(271)
(57)

111

2021
£000

2020
£000

3,000
651
134
21
19

3,825

19
–

19

2021
£000

3,580
11
248
–
19

3,858

38
(19)

19

2020
£000

30,997

33,545

2021
£000

526
–
580

1,106

2020
£000

47
57
390

494

The Company is a party to the Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC, a committed facility of £30m now 
available	until	December	2025.	The	facility	bears	interest	at	normal	commercial	rates	and	carries	standard	financial	covenants	
in relation to interest cover and levels of headroom over the trade receivables of Macfarlane Group UK Limited, the principal 
trading subsidiary.

The Company and certain subsidiaries have given inter-company guarantees to secure the drawdown on this facility. The 
drawdown at 31 December 2021 by the subsidiary company, Macfarlane Group UK Limited amounted to £9.8m (2020: £5.8m).

125

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

35. Provisions 

At 1 January 2021
Additions in the year

At 31 December 2021

Total
£000

–
825

825

The provision is due after more than one year. Property provisions relate to sums due in respect of dilapidations. 

36. Lease liabilities

Amounts due under leases
Within one year
Between	one	and	five	years
After	more	than	five	years

Total amount due
Due within one year

Due after more than one year

At 1 January
New leases
Repayments under leases

At 31 December

37. Share capital

Called up, allotted and fully paid:
At 1 January

At 31 December

The	Company	has	one	class	of	ordinary	shares,	which	carry	no	right	to	fixed	income.

Each ordinary share carries one vote in any General Meeting of the Company. 

2021
£000

2020
£000

14
63
36

113
(14)

99

128
–
(15)

113

14
61
53

128
(14)

114

141
–
(13)

128

Number of 
25p shares

2021
£000

2020
£000

157,812,000

157,812,000

39,453

39,453

39,453

39,453

126   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

38. Reserves

Share
premium
£000

Profit	and
loss account
£000

Balance at 1 January 2020
Profit	for	the	year
Dividends paid (note 7)
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to reserves
Share-based payments (note 25)

Balance at 1 January 2021
Loss for the year
Dividends paid (note 7)
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to reserves
Share-based payments (note 25)

Balance at 31 December 2021

13,148
–
–
–
–

13,148
–
–
–
–

13,148

39. Reconciliation of movements in shareholders’ funds 

Profit	for	the	year
Dividends to equity holders in the year
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to equity
Share-based payments

Movements in shareholders’ funds in the year
Opening shareholders’ funds

Closing shareholders’ funds

40. Operating profit

Operating profit for the parent company has been arrived at after charging:
Depreciation
Depreciation on right-of-use assets
Auditor’s remuneration   Audit services

Non-audit services

Staff costs
The average monthly number of employees was:
Administration

The costs incurred in respect of these employees were:
Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs
Share-based payments (note 25)

Total
£000

24,036
2,122
(1,105)
1,426
75

26,554
(633)
(4,293)
2,308
685

10,888
2,122
(1,105)
1,426
75

13,406
(633)
(4,293)
2,308
685

11,473

24,621

2021
£000

(633)
(4,293)
2,308
685

(1,933)
66,007

64,074

2020
£000

2,122
(1,105)
1,426
75

2,518
63,489

66,007

2021
£000

6
15
57
11

2021
No.

10

2021
£000

1,451
188
42
685

2,366

2020
£000

7
15
44
11

2020
No.

10

2020
£000

924
130
61
75

1,190

127

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

41. Retirement benefit obligations
Introduction
Macfarlane	Group	PLC	sponsors	a	defined	benefit	pension	scheme	for	certain	active	and	former	UK	employees	–	the	
Macfarlane Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance Scheme (1974) (’the Scheme’). One of the trading subsidiaries, Macfarlane 
Group UK Limited is also a sponsoring employer of the Scheme. Macfarlane Labels Limited was a sponsoring employer until  
31 December 2021 when the company was sold and ceased to be a sponsoring member. The Group is working with the 
trustees on a Flexible Apportionment Arrangement in relation to Macfarlane Labels Limited’s cessation as a sponsoring 
employer.	The	Scheme	is	currently	in	surplus	and	disclosure	of	the	respective	proportions	of	the	Group	surplus/deficit	are	
included	and	disclosed	in	the	financial	statements	of	each	of	the	three	participating	employers.

The Scheme is an HMRC registered pension scheme and is administered by a Board of Trustees composed of employer-nominated 
representatives and member-nominated Trustees which is legally separate from the Group. The Scheme’s investments are held 
separately from those of the Group in managed funds under the supervision of the Trustees. The Trustees are required by law 
to	act	in	the	interest	of	all	classes	of	beneficiary	in	the	Scheme	and	are	responsible	for	investment	policy	and	the	administration	
of	benefits.	Macfarlane	Group	PLC,	based	on	legal	opinion	provided,	has	an	unconditional	right	to	a	refund	of	surplus	assets	
assuming the full settlement of plan liabilities in the event of a wind up of the Scheme. Furthermore, in the ordinary course of 
business	the	trustees	have	no	rights	to	unilaterally	wind	up	the	Scheme,	or	otherwise	augment	the	benefits	due	to	members	 
of the Scheme. Based on these rights, any net surplus in the Scheme is recognised in full.

The Scheme provides qualifying employees with an annual pension of 1/60 of pensionable salary for each completed years’ 
service on attainment of a normal retirement age of 65. Pensionable salaries were frozen for the remaining active members  
at	the	levels	current	at	30	April	2009	with	the	change	taking	effect	from	30	April	2010.	As	a	result	no	further	salary	inflation	
applies	for	active	members	who	elected	to	remain	in	the	Scheme.	Active	members’	benefits	also	include	life	assurance	cover,	
with	the	payment	of	these	benefits	at	the	discretion	of	the	Trustees.	The	Scheme	was	closed	to	new	entrants	during	2002.

On leaving active service a deferred member’s pension is revalued from the time of withdrawal until the pension is drawn. 
Revaluation in deferment is statutory and since 2010 has been revalued on the Consumer Price Index (’CPI’) measure of 
inflation.	Revaluation	of	pensions	in	payment	is	a	blend	of	fixed	increases	and	inflationary	increases	depending	on	the	relevant	
periods	of	accrual	of	benefit.	For	pensions	in	payment,	the	inflationary	increase	is	currently	based	on	the	Retail	Price	Index	
(’RPI’)	measure	of	inflation	or	based	on	Limited	Price	Indexation	(’LPI’)	for	certain	defined	periods	of	service.

During	2012,	Macfarlane	Group	PLC	agreed	with	the	Board	of	Trustees	to	amend	benefits	for	pensioner,	deferred	and	active	
members	in	the	Scheme	by	offering	a	Pension	Increase	Exchange	(’PIE’)	option	to	pensioner	members	and	a	PIE	option	to	all	
other members at retirement after 1 May 2012.

Balance sheet disclosures at 31 December 2021
The	Scheme’s	qualified	actuary	from	Aon	carries	out	triennial	valuations	using	the	Projected	Unit	Credit	Method	to	determine	
the	level	of	deficit.	For	the	most	recent	triennial	valuation	at	1	May	2020,	the	results	of	this	valuation	showed	that	the	market	
value	of	the	relevant	investments	of	the	Scheme	was	£94,100,000	and	represented	91%	of	the	actuarial	value	of	benefits	that	
had accrued to members.

The	investments	held	by	the	Scheme	and	the	Scheme	deficit,	based	on	the	results	of	the	actuarial	valuation	as	at	1	May	2020,	
updated	to	the	year-end	to	reflect	amounts	attributable	to	Macfarlane	Group	PLC,	the	parent	company,	are	as	shown	below:

Investment class

Equities
Multi-asset	diversified	funds
Liability-driven investment funds
European loan fund
Secured property income fund
Cash

Fair value of scheme investments
Present value of scheme liabilities

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

2021
£000

9,241
10,189
10,686
2,372
2,449
211

35,148
(32,254)

2,894

2020
£000

9,175
12,624
12,585
2,598
2,501
288

39,771
(40,360)

(589)

2019
£000

8,855
10,153
11,075
2,477
2,552
113

35,225
(37,811)

(2,586)

The Trustees review the Scheme’s investments on a regular basis and consult with the Company regarding any proposed 
changes	to	the	investment	profile.	During	2021	the	Trustees	maintained	the	strategic	asset	allocation	in	the	Trustees’	
Statement of Investment Principles.

128   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Liability-Driven	Investment	Funds	provide	a	match	of	100%	against	the	impact	of	inflation	movements	on	pension	liabilities	
and of approximately 85% against the impact of movements in interest rates on pension liabilities.

The ability to realise the Scheme’s investments at, or close to, fair value was considered when setting the investment 
strategy. 86% (2020: 87%) of the Scheme’s investments can be realised at fair value on a daily or weekly basis. The remaining 
investments	have	monthly	or	quarterly	liquidity,	however,	whilst	the	income	from	these	helps	to	meet	the	Scheme’s	cash	flow	
needs, they are not expected to be realised at short notice. The present value of the Scheme liabilities is derived from cash 
flow	projections	over	a	long	period	and	is	thus	inherently	uncertain.

The Scheme’s liabilities at 31 December 2021 were calculated on the following bases as required under IAS19:

Assumptions

Discount rate
Rate of increase in salaries
Rate of increase in pensions in payment

2021

2020

2019

1.90%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases 
or 3.30% for LPI.
2.27% post  
5 April 2006

1.35%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for	fixed	increases	 
or 2.95% for LPI. 
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

2.00%
0.00%
3% or 5%  
for	fixed	increases	 
or 2.95% for LPI. 
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

75%/75%
65%
3.40%
2.90%

22.8 years
24.4 years

22.3 years
23.6 years
0.40%

75%/75%
65%
3.00%
2.50%

22.8 years
24.3 years

22.2 years
23.5 years
0.40%

Spouse’s pension
Pensioner/active and deferred members
PIE take up rate
Inflation	assumption	(RPI)
Inflation	assumption	(CPI)
Life expectancy beyond normal retirement age of 65
Members aged 55
 Male
 Female
Members aged 65
 Male
 Female
Average uplift for GMP service

Movement in scheme surplus/(deficit) during the year

At 1 January
Current service cost
GMP on transfer values
Company contributions
Net	finance	cost
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability in the year

At 31 December

Analysis of amounts charged to operating profit
Current service cost
GMP on transfer values

Pension cost charged to operating profit

Analysis of amounts charged to other financial charges
Expected return on pension scheme investments
Interest cost of pension scheme liabilities

Other financial charges

Analysis of the remeasurement of the scheme surplus/(deficit)
Return on scheme assets (excluding amount shown in interest income)
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of the scheme’s liabilities

Remeasurement of the pension scheme deficit

70%/80%
45%
3.00%
2.10%

22.6 years
24.7 years

22.0 years
24.0 years
0.40%

2020
£000

(2,586)
(18)
(35)
391
(39)
1,698

(589)

(18)
(35)

(53)

700
(739)

(39)

2021
£000

(589)
(31)
–
485
(2)
3,031

2,894

(31)
–

(31)

467
(469)

(2)

(4,311)
7,342

3,031

5,164
(3,466)

1,698

129

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For	the	year	ended	31 December 2021

41. Retirement benefit obligations (continued)

Movement in the fair value of scheme assets
At 1 January
Interest income
Return on scheme assets (excluding amounts shown in interest income)
Contributions from the Company
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits	paid

At 31 December

Movement in the present value of scheme liabilities
At 1 January
Service cost
GMP on transfer values
Interest cost
Contributions from scheme members
Actuarial gain/(loss) in the year
Benefits	paid

At 31 December

2021
£000

2020
£000

39,771
467
(4,311)
485
5
(1,269)

35,148

(40,360)
(31)
–
(469)
(5)
7,342
1,269

(32,254)

35,225
700
5,164
391
4
(1,713)

39,771

(37,811)
(18)
(35)
(739)
(4)
(3,466)
1,713

(40,360)

The cumulative remeasurement of pension liabilities since IAS19 transition is a gain of £3,611,000 (2020: £580,000).

2021
£000

2020
£000

2019
£000

2018
£000

2017
£000

Present	value	of	defined	benefit	obligations
Fair value of Scheme investments

Pension scheme surplus/(deficit)

(32,254)
35,148

2,894

(40,360)
39,771

(589)

(37,811)
35,225

(2,586)

(34,238)
30,330

(3,908)

(37,113)
32,383

(4,730)

Return on scheme investments

(3,844)

5,864

6,179

(22)

3,355

Percentage of scheme investments

(10.9%)

14.7%

17.5%

(0.1%)

10.4%

Experience adjustment to scheme investments

(4,311)

5,164

5,336

(817)

2,529

Percentage of scheme investments

(12.3%)

13.0%

15.2%

(2.7%)

7.8%

Experience adjustment on scheme liabilities

7,342

(3,466)

(4,298)

1,587

(1,634)

Percentage of scheme liabilities

22.8%

(8.6%)

(11.4%)

4.6%

(4.4%)

Defined contribution schemes
The	Company	also	participated	in	a	defined	contribution	scheme,	the	Macfarlane	Group	Personal	Pension	Plan.	Contributions	
to the plan for the year were £31,000 (2020: £8,000) with contributions £3,000 (2020: £3,000) of payable to the plan at the 
balance sheet date.

42. Related party transactions
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation in 
the	Group	financial	statements.	The	Directors	have	considered	the	implications	of	IAS	24	’Related Party Disclosures’ and are 
satisfied	that	there	are	no	other	related	party	transactions	occurring	during	the	year,	which	require	disclosure,	other	than	
those	already	disclosed	in	these	financial	statements.

130   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Five year record

Continuing and discontinued operations

2021
£000

2020
£000

2019
£000

2018
£000

2017
£000

Turnover

285,685

230,029

225,246

217,129

195,818

Operating profit before separately disclosed items
Net interest payable

Profit before separately disclosed item
Separately disclosed item

Profit before tax
Taxation

Profit for the financial year

Basic earnings per ordinary share

Dividends

Dividends paid per ordinary share

Dividend cover

19,207
1,480

17,727
–

17,727
5,129

12,598

7.98p

4,293

2.72p

2.9

14,369
1,367

13,002
–

13,002
2,831

10,171

6.45p

1,105*

0.70p*

9.2*

13,487
1,625

11,862
–

11,862
2,262

9,600

6.09p

3,689

2.34p

2.6

11,878
823

11,055
330

10,725
2,114

8,611

5.47p

3,387

2.15p

2.5

9,924
837

9,087
–

9,087
1,803

7,284

5.12p

2,854

2.00p

2.6

*	This	reflects	the	cancellation	of	the	dividend	of	1.76p	payable	in	June	2020.

This	table	reflects	the	five-year	record	for	the	Group’s	operations	as	classified	at	31	December	2021.

131

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Principal operating subsidiaries and related undertakings

Company name

Principal activities

Country of registration

Macfarlane Group UK Limited 1
Coventry  

Tel: 02476 511511

Tel: 0116 2641050

Tel: 01296 652700

Tel: 01209 204777

Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited 1
Leicester 
Carters Packaging Limited 1
Redruth 
Ecopac (U.K.) Limited 1
Aylesbury 
GWP Group Limited 1
Swindon 
Nottingham Recycling Limited 1
Nottingham 
Macfarlane Group B.V. 2 
Hoofddorp 
Tel: 00 31 235689207
Macfarlane Packaging Ireland Limited 3
Tel: 00 353 1281 0234
Wicklow  

Tel: 0115 986 7181

Tel: 01793 754444

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment. Design  
and manufacture of specialist packaging.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

England

England

England

England

Design and manufacture of specialist packaging.

England

Recovery of waste paper and corrugated  
board for recycling.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

England

The Netherlands

Ireland

All the above subsidiaries are wholly owned either by Macfarlane Group PLC or one of its subsidiary companies and 
operate in the country of registration. The Group controls 100% of the ordinary share capital of each subsidiary.

The Group’s other related undertakings are the dormant subsidiary undertakings disclosed below. In all cases  
the Company listed as owner controls 100% of the issued share capital of the dormant subsidiary undertaking.

Company name

Company number

Country of registration

Owned by Macfarlane Group PLC
National Packaging Group Limited 1 
Adhesive Labels Limited 1

Owned by Macfarlane Group UK Limited
Online Packaging Limited 1 
Macfarlane Packaging Limited 4 
Abbott’s Packaging Limited 1 
Mitchell Packaging Limited 1 
Greenwoods Stock Boxes Limited 4 
Network Packaging Limited 1 
One Packaging Limited 1 
Tyler Packaging (Leicester) Limited 1 
Harrisons Packaging Limited 1 
Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited 1

Owned by GWP Group Limited
Eastman Packaging Limited 1 
The Great Western Packaging Co. Limited 1 
Corstat Containers Limited 1
Owned by Harrisons Packaging Limited
Temperature Controlled Packaging Limited 1

Owned by Network Packaging Limited
Networkpack Limited 1

01355867 
00723320

02903657 
SC041678 
00372831 
00535311 
SC576825 
03400627 
09647045 
03460830 
06999588 
03775077

03837450 
02455095 
02454197

06896225

07076439

Registered offices
1 Siskin Parkway East, Middlemarch Business Park, Coventry, CV3 4PE
2 Siriusdreef 17, 2132 WT, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands
3 6th Floor, South Bank House, Barrow Street, Dublin 4 
4 3 Park Gardens, Glasgow, G3 7YE

132   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2021

England 
England

England 
Scotland 
England 
England 
Scotland 
England 
England 
England 
England 
England

England 
England 
England

England

England

 
 
Financial diary

Financial results
Interim: Announced – August 
Final: Announced – February

Accounts and Annual General Meeting
Report	and	financial	statements	–	Posted	to	shareholders	on	1	April	2022 
Annual General Meeting – Held in Glasgow on 10 May 2022

Shareholder enquiries
Macfarlane	Group	PLC’s	ordinary	shares	are	classified	under	the	‘Industrial	
– General’ section of the Industrial Sector on the London Stock Exchange.

Enquiries regarding shareholdings, dividend payments, dividend mandate 
instructions,	lost	share	certificates,	tax	vouchers,	changes	of	address,	
transfers of shares to another person and other administrative matters  
should be addressed to the Company’s registrars, 

Equiniti   
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex, BN99 6DA

Telephone: 0371 384 2439 
Website: www.shareview.co.uk

The Company’s website, www.macfarlanegroup.com provides details  
of all major Stock Exchange announcements, details of the current share 
price and information about Macfarlane Group’s business.

Designed and produced by Thunderbolt Projects 

Head Office
Macfarlane Group PLC
First Floor 
3 Park Gardens 
Glasgow G3 7YE 
t. 0141 333 9666 
e. investorinfo@macfarlanegroup.com
www.macfarlanegroup.com